Quarterlytics / Pearson

Pearson

pson · LSE
Claim this profile
Ticker pson
Exchange LSE
Sector
Industry
Employees 10,000+
← All annual reports
FY2007 Annual Report · Pearson
Sign in to download
Loading PDF…
www.pearson.com

Find out how we educate, entertain and
inform at www.pearson.com/pearsonville

P
e
a
r
s
o
n
A
n
n
u
a
l

R
e
p
o
r
t

a
n
d
A
c
c
o
u
n
t
s
2
0
0
7

Annual Report and Accounts 2007

Pearson is a world leader in education, business
information and consumer publishing. We help children
and adults to learn, business people to make good
decisions, readers to enjoy a good book. Our aim is to
help all of them understand the world a little better and
enjoy doing it – what we call ‘education in the broadest
sense of the word’. 

We’ve consistently grown the company by investing 
in content, technology, international expansion and
efficiency gains. In 2007, that strategy and investment
focus produced the best results in Pearson’s 164-year
history – and helped millions of our customers 
get on in their lives. 

Contents

1

Financial Highlights: 
Record Results in 2007
2 Chairman’s Statement
4 Chief Executive’s Review
7 Our Business and Society
8
Business Review
25 Board of Directors
26 Directors’ Report
33 Additional Information 

for Shareholders

50 Consolidated Income Statement
50 Consolidated Statement of 

Recognised Income and Expense

51 Consolidated Balance Sheet
52 Consolidated Cash Flow Statement
53 Independent Auditors’ Report 
to the Members of Pearson plc

54 Notes to the Consolidated 
Financial Statements

95 Company Statement of Recognised 

95 Company Balance Sheet
96 Company Cash Flow Statement
97 Notes to the Company

Financial Statements
102 Principal Subsidiaries
103 Five Year Summary
105 Corporate and Operating Measures
107 Index to the Financial Statements
108 Shareholder Information

35 Report on Directors’ Remuneration

Income and Expense

Notes

Throughout this document 
(unless otherwise stated):
Growth rates are stated on an
underlying basis (i.e. excluding
currency movements and portfolio
changes). The business performance
measures are non-GAAP measures 
and reconciliations to the equivalent
statutory heading under IFRS are
included in notes 2, 8 and 32 to the
annual report. Dollar comparative
figures have been translated at the 
year end rate of $1.99:£1 sterling 
for illustrative purposes only.

Reliance on this document
Our Business Review on pages 8 to 24
has been prepared in accordance with
the Directors’ Report Business Review
Requirements of section 234ZZB of the
Companies Act 1985. It also
incorporates much of the guidance 
set out in the Accounting Standards
Board’s Reporting Statement on the
Operating and Financial Review.

The intention of this document is to
provide information to shareholders and
is not designed to be relied upon by any
other party or for any other purpose.

Forward-looking statements
This document contains forward-
looking statements which are made 
by the directors in good faith based on
information available to them at the time
of approval of this report. In particular,
all statements that express forecasts,
expectations and projections with
respect to future matters, including
trends in results of operations, margins,
growth rates, overall market trends, the
impact of interest or exchange rates, the 

availability of financing, anticipated costs
savings and synergies and the execution
of Pearson's strategy, are forward-
looking statements. By their nature,
forward-looking statements involve risks
and uncertainties because they relate 
to events and depend on circumstances
that will occur in future. There are a
number of factors which could cause
actual results and developments to differ
materially from those expressed or
implied by these forward-looking
statements, including a number of
factors outside Pearson's control. Any
forward-looking statements speak only
as of the date they are made, and Pearson
gives no undertaking to update forward-
looking statements to reflect any changes
in its expectations with regard thereto or
any changes to events, conditions or
circumstances on which any such
statement is based.

Financial Highlights: Record Results  n 2007 

i

Adjusted earnings per share 
46.7p / 92.9¢ 

+8% 

Operating cash flow 

  £684m / $1,361m 

  +19% 

Return on invested capital 

  8.2% 

  Dividend 
  31.6p / 62.9¢ 

  +0.2% pts   +7.8% 

2007 

$m 

2006 

$m 

£m 

£m 

Headline
growth %

Underlying
growth % 

2007 

$m 

2006 

$m 

£m 

£m 

Headline
growth %

Underlying
growth % 

Business performance 

Sales 

4,218  8,394 4,051  8,061 

Adjusted operating profit 

634  1,262

592  1,178 

Adjusted profit before tax 

549  1,093

502 

999 

Adjusted earnings per share  46.7p  92.9¢ 43.1p  85.8¢ 

Operating cash flow 

684  1,361

575  1,144 

Operating free cash flow 

533  1,061

434 

864 

4

7

9

8

19

23

6

14

–

–

–

–

Return on invested capital 

8.2% 

– 8.0% 

–  0.2% pts 1.0% pts

Statutory results 

Sales 

Operating profit 

Profit before tax 

Basic earnings per share 
Basic earnings per share – 
continuing 
Cash generated  
from operations 

4,162  8,282  3,990  7,940

574  1,142 

522  1,039

468 

931 

448 

892

35.6p  70.8¢  55.9p  111.2¢

39.0p  77.6¢  52.7p  104.9¢

659  1,311 

621  1,236

Net debt 

973  1,936 1,059  2,107 

(8)

–

Dividend per share 

31.6p  62.9¢  29.3p  58.3¢

4

10

4

(36)

(26)

6

7.8

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

Growth rates are stated on an underlying basis (i.e. excluding currency movements and portfolio changes) unless otherwise stated. The business performance measures are non-GAAP measures and 
reconciliations to the equivalent statutory heading under IFRS are included in notes 2, 8 and 32 to the annual report. Dollar comparative figures have been translated at the year end rate of $1.99:£1 sterling for 
illustrative purposes only. 

1    Pearson Annual Report and Accounts 2007 

 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
Dear shareholder, 

Our goal at Pearson is to increase the value of your company for the 
long term. 

So we look back on 2007 with somewhat mixed feelings: pride in our 
financial and operational performance, tempered by disappointment 
that we did not sustain the steady share price increases of recent years.  

The results we describe in this report include record operating profits, 
record earnings per share and record operating cash flow. Our return 
on invested capital – the ultimate test of whether we are generating a 
return on all the capital invested in the company – moved up to 8.2%, 
even as we made some significant acquisitions to extend the breadth 
and worldwide leadership of our education company.  

I’d like to thank and congratulate everyone who works at Pearson for 
their dedication and success in 2007. These are remarkable results – 
and all the more so because they were achieved against the headwind 
of a 9% decline in the value of the US dollar, our principal trading 
currency, against the pound. 

But that performance brought little immediate reward in share price 
terms. Amid more turbulent market conditions than we have seen for 
some years, the value of our shares declined by 5%. That compares 
with a 4% increase in the FTSE100 and a 1% decline in the FTSE 
Media Index. Including our dividend, our total return to shareholders 
was marginally negative at -2%. So, while we were producing those 
record results, shareholder value was affected by a series of external 
factors – the dramatic downturn in credit markets; the reaction  
of equity markets; the further weakening of the US dollar; the 
perceived cyclicality of the media sector in more uncertain 
macroeconomic conditions.  

History tells us that bear markets can bring a silver lining for long-term 
investors – the chance to acquire quality companies at historically 
attractive multiples and yields. We continue to believe that, in the long 
term, sustained growth in earnings, cash and returns will be the most 
reliable way for Pearson to increase shareholder value. So let me 
highlight some of the indicators I find encouraging.  

1.  First of all, our excellent results in 2007 were not a one-off; they 
build on a trend of consistently strong growth. Over the past five years, 
our operating profit growth has averaged 15% each year (at constant 
exchange rates), our adjusted earnings per share growth has averaged 
14%, and our operating cash flow has more than doubled to £684m.  

Chairman’s Statement 

2    Pearson Annual Report and Accounts 2007 

 
 
2. Second, that track record is the result of an effective organic  
growth strategy. That is to invest behind our world-leading market 
positions, building on the content, technology and international 
growth opportunities of each one of our companies, at the same time 
as we make the business more efficient.  

3. Third, we can see that strategy paying off in every part of Pearson.  
It is particularly pleasing to see substantial profit growth at Penguin 
(up 20%) and FT Publishing (up 85%) adding to the consistent 
upward trends at Pearson Education (up 9%) and Interactive Data  
(up 13%). 

4. Fourth, we are steadily shifting capital towards our most attractive 
growth opportunities. We began the year by selling our Government 
Solutions business and continued with a series of disposals of 
companies that we viewed as no longer central to our long-term 
strategy. They included Les Echos in France and, early in 2008,  
FT Deutschland and our US Data Management (Scanners) business. 
Meanwhile, we acquired new companies that bring us hugely  
valuable content, international reach and technology – the Harcourt 
international education and educational testing companies and 
eCollege, a pioneer in online distance learning.  

5. Fifth, and at the heart of everything we do, we made significant 
advances in the value we bring to our customers through our content, 
technology and services. There are many examples all around Pearson 
– from the FT’s outstanding and indispensible coverage of the turmoil 
in global credit markets; to Penguin’s uncannily timely publication of 
Alan Greenspan’s memoirs; to our education company’s pioneering 
use of technology to advance student success.  

Examples like those remind us that Pearson plays a unique and 
valuable role in society. Thank you for making that possible. 

We begin 2008 with a good strategy, strong businesses and healthy 
trading momentum. We are certainly living through a more uncertain 
economic environment and more nervous stock markets. Our focus 
will be on serving our customers, building our business and producing 
consistent financial progress, in the belief that those, over the long 
term, are the surest path to value creation.  

As always, I look forward to seeing as many of you as possible at our 
annual shareholders’ meeting. 

Glen Moreno, Chairman 

3    Pearson Annual Report and Accounts 2007 

 
 
 
 
 
 
 
Chief Executive’s Review 

Dear shareholder, 

This year, just as last year, Pearson’s results are a record. I’m sure I 
don’t have to tell you that they’re due to the ingenuity and dedication 
of the 32,000 people who work in Pearson, nearly all of whom are 
owners of this company just like you. We all thank you for the trust 
and confidence you’ve placed in us by investing in the company.  

We’re proud of the numbers in this report, but they signify something 
more than one good year. They’re a trend – one more point on a 
consistent upward march. That makes them not just a footnote to  
the past, but a source of confidence in the future.  

Our last five years make the point: 

–  Operating profit has increased from £416m to £631m, at an annual 

growth rate of 15% (at constant exchange rates). 

–  Adjusted earnings per share are up from 27.6p to 46.7p, an annual 

rate of 14%. 

–  We have more than doubled the cash we produce from operations, 

from £318m to £684m. 

–  The return we make on the capital we invest is up from 6%  

to 8.2%, and now above our cost of that capital. 

–  And we have increased the dividend by an average of 6% each year. 
In fact, our record of increasing the dividend above the rate of 
inflation is now an unbroken 16 years. 

I hope the consistency is reassuring to you. It’s encouraging to the 
shareholders who work here, because it validates much of the work 
we’ve done to change the company. We had a few goals in mind as we 
did that: we wanted to make Pearson a cohesive company, rather than 
a collection of companies; a company of reliable and durable financial 
performance; a company with big growth possibilities; and a leader 
and innovator in its markets.  

While we’ve made great progress toward those goals, we’re still on the 
move in that same direction. We don’t see any reason to slow down; 
and the success so far just makes us want to move faster with a strategy 
that’s working well. 

That strategy has four parts:  

–  creating the most compelling content;  

–  using technology to make our products more useful and  

more valuable; 

–  being a truly international company; and 

–  generating the firepower through efficiency to invest in those goals. 

We apply that same strategy across all parts of Pearson. I hope those 
numbers tell you that it’s working; but I’d like to show you how with 
some highlights from this past year. 

Content, de-throned? 
People in the media world used to assert that ‘content is king’.  
Today many experts would have you believe that technology  
has staged a bloody coup and taken the throne. 

Pearson is still in the court, somewhere in the middle. We’re happy 
with our rich history as a ‘content’ company which stretches back to 
the first Longman English dictionary of 1725; the forerunners of the 
current Financial Times in the late 19th Century; and the first Penguin 
paperbacks in the 1930s. But today our challenge is to live up to the 
creative standards of those illustrious predecessors; and at the same 
time to make what we do relevant and useful to our customers of 
today. That brings a slightly different attitude toward ‘content’ and 
what we should be doing with it.  

4    Pearson Annual Report and Accounts 2007 

Adjusted earnings per share
46.7p / 92.9¢

Adjusted operating profit
£634m / $1,262m

+8%

46.7p

43.1p

34.1p**

27.5p**

27.6p**

+14%*

£634m

£592m

£506m

7
0

6
0

£426m

£447m

05

4
0

03

7
0

6
0

05

4
0

03

Operating cash flow
£684m / $1,361m

+19%

Return on invested capital
8.2%

+0.2% pts

£684m

£575m

£570m

£418m

£318m

8.2%

8.0%

6.7%

7
0

6
0

6.2%

6.0%       

05

4
0

03

7
0

6
0

05

4
0

03

* Underlying growth 
** As reported (before restatement for tax deductibility of goodwill amortisation) 

Our investment in content has been steady and unrelenting, even 
when that has been out of fashion. In each of the past four years, that 
investment has topped $1bn. 

We sustained our investment in journalism at the Financial Times, 
even when it was making losses during a savage advertising downturn. 
We believed that a brand built on quality for over a century should 
sustain its editorial values – and weather the short-term consequences. 
And it has: profits at FT publishing were up 85% to £56 million last year.  

At the newspaper and FT.com our depth of insight in the financial 
markets made us the place to come for news and analysis of the 
mortgage crisis and the global credit crunch, the biggest business story 
in years. We refreshed our design and we introduced to our readers  
a stable of new writers. All its wonderful content earned the FT many 
accolades, from the Newspaper of the Year title to the biggest accolade 
of all: a growing audience of readers, in print and online. 

Penguin, the UK’s Publisher of the Year, made bestsellers of some of the 
books by the world’s best-known authors and thinkers – and created 
some new superstars along the way:  

–  Just as the world was waking up to that global credit crunch, Alan 
Greenspan’s The Age of Turbulence came out and was snapped up 
by one million buyers – and bemused investors – all over the world.  

–  No one has done more to explain life in Afghanistan than Khaled 

Hosseini, who followed up The Kite Runner with another 
wonderful story, A Thousand Splendid Suns, this past year.  

–  And Kim Edwards’ first novel, The Memory Keeper’s Daughter, was 
a bestseller in the US, Canada, Australia and the UK, and a story 
that will stick with us for a long time. 

 
Our largest investment of all was in our education business. Here our 
bestsellers might be a little less famous than those in Penguin, but they 
are no less valuable to their readers. For instance, we had a new edition 
of Reading Street, last year’s leading programme for America’s 
elementary school students. It helps teachers lay a foundation  
of reading skills and, we hope, inspires children to love reading all  
their lives.   

and text to get young children inspired about learning maths. It’s a 
little too early to know how this new experiment will fare – but so far 
the teachers are excited, and that means we are too. 

Digital products like these now account for $1.3bn or about 25%  
of our total education sales. Today Pearson is a technology company, 
as much as we are an ‘education’ or ‘publishing’ or ‘media’ company. 

Those kinds of changes are taking place at Penguin, too. Travel guides, 
for example, are still much in demand, but technology now allows 
travellers to create their own customised travel guides with Dorling 
Kindersley material.  

And last year we created what we like to refer to as ‘the most written 
novel in history,’ a Wikinovel called A Million Penguins that attracted 
online contributions from nearly 1,500 people – who made over 
11,000 edits. In Britain, a new Penguin social networking site called 
‘Spinebreakers’ is run by teenagers, and it’s not only inspiring them to 
read books and write about books; it’s helping Penguin to get a deeper 
understanding of the reading habits of young people. 

Perhaps helped along by these kinds of conversations, online sales of 
Penguin books grew rapidly last year, through both our own websites 
and other online retailers such as Amazon. 

In the Financial Times Group, great content was not confined to pink 
paper. We started new features on FT.com like our live markets blog 
Alphaville and ‘View From the Top’, a regular video interview with 
business leaders. Monthly unique users of FT.com were up 30%, with 
a 2007 average of 5.7 million users. 

Interactive Data, our financial information company, grew its sales by 
8% as it introduced new services – for example, delivering information 
about mergers, tender offers and rights offerings for securities 
throughout the day. Meanwhile our new addition Mergermarket 
provided must-have intelligence about potential deals for companies, 
bankers, lawyers and advisers. Its revenue grew by more than half and 
more than 90% of its customers renewed their subscriptions.  

And to that online library of sources, the FT Group added new 
companies – Money-Media for the fund management market and 
Exec-Appointments in the recruitment field. These moves have not 
only given us new growth possibilities, they’ve also diversified our 
revenues away from print advertising, notoriously vulnerable to 
economic cycles. In 2000 some 52% of the FT Group’s revenue was 
from advertising; now it has just 30%, even though its advertising has 
grown in the last few years.  

Flatter, and wiser 
Content and technology are big opportunities for us, and we’re 
pursuing them intently. But for a company that is the world leader  
in learning and information of all kinds from kindergarten children  
to adults, there may be a bigger opportunity still. 

While developing countries are home to 80% of the world’s 
population, only half the world’s college students come from those 
nations. Globally, adult illiteracy is estimated at around 800 million 
people and about half the world’s population will be speaking or 
learning English – the global language of business and international 
politics – over the next decade.  

So, in every part of Pearson, we’re stepping up our efforts to be a truly 
international company. 

We also extended our programmes that help people of all ages learn 
English, enrolling such familiar characters as Donald Duck and Buzz 
Lightyear in the effort through our worldwide elementary school 
programme, English Adventure, now used in 60 countries from 
Argentina to Yemen.   

We extended and modernised many of the bestsellers that have  
been central to the learning and understanding of each generation of 
college students, in subjects from ancient history to computer science; 
fundamentals of biology to applied healthcare; mathematics to 
accounting and finance; creative writing to literature; social science  
to marketing.  

And with our acquisition of Harcourt’s assessment and testing 
business, we took on some of the most popular and reliable 
assessments of educational skills and intellectual progress, among them 
the Stanford Achievement Test and the Wechsler Intelligence Scale. 

Technology, made central 
Proud as we are of that kind of content, for some years now we’ve 
insisted that it is not enough. Today our customers expect products 
and services that are built to meet their needs and easy to use.  
Our education customers, for example, are asking for ‘solutions,’  
not textbooks. Technology helps us create those. 

For decades, the end-of-term or end-of-year test has come too late for 
too many students. If a test can establish how each child is learning, 
and pinpoint where he might be falling behind, why would anyone 
wait until the end of the course to check? Shouldn’t the teacher take 
that information along the way, analyse it and use it to accelerate the 
student’s learning? 

That is precisely the ‘solution’ that has been our strategy, and a new 
generation of our education products provide that. For college 
students, our ‘MyLabs’ are online programmes that allow each  
student to practice new concepts at their own pace, in their own time. 
The software records their responses to practice test questions and 
intervenes: if a student shows he’s mastered one kind of problem, he 
moves on quickly; if he seems to be struggling, we slow him down, 
serve up more practice and help him discover strategies to find the 
right answers. In educational jargon, this is known as ‘adaptive 
learning’: the path to learning is built around the student. 

Not surprisingly, demand for these kinds of services is growing very 
fast. We now cover about 40 of the main disciplines for university-level 
courses, and students who buy the programmes are really using it – 
usage has grown 50% a year for the past five years. And we believe the 
opportunity is a worldwide one: these MyLabs are now available in 
more than 50 countries. 

And that kind of service is valuable to younger students, too. In 2006 
we unveiled a revolutionary new kind of school programme for 
California: a digital service allowing teachers to fashion their lessons 
from a rich mix of video, audio, class exercises, tests and digital books. 
That social studies programme was a huge hit, so this year we’ve 
applied a similar approach to mathematics, one of the biggest and 
most important subjects in any country’s school curriculum. This new 
programme, enVisionMATH, blends beautiful graphics, animation  

5    Pearson Annual Report and Accounts 2007 

Chief Executive’s Review continued 

At Penguin, we’re publishing more books on a worldwide basis at the 
same time as we build our presence in fast-growing markets like India, 
China and parts of Africa. Last year, Penguin announced plans to 
publish its first Penguin Classics in Mandarin. Meanwhile, we’ve taken 
Jiang Rong’s Wolf Totem – a huge bestseller in China and the winner of 
the inaugural Man Booker Asian Literary Prize – and we’re publishing 
it in English around the world this year.  

Our overall profit margin increased last year to 15% – from 10.8%  
just three years ago – reflecting broad margin improvement across 
every business. 

And by reducing the cash that’s tied up in our businesses, we lowered 
our working capital-to-sales ratio for the sixth straight year to 25.6% 
last year – compared to 31.9% in 2001. 

During our celebration of Penguin’s 20th anniversary in India last 
year, we agreed on a strategy to invest heavily in that country, as a 
vibrant source of writing talent and as a centre for high-quality 
publishing services like design, technology and software development, 
many of which we already use in our business around the world. 

The numbers, and more 
Our goal has been to create a kind of virtuous circle – to take those 
efficiency savings and to invest them in the kind of content, technology 
and international expansion that can sustain our growth. So far, that 
circle is spinning nicely, and we’re determined to move it faster.  

But as we’ve said many times before, our goal as a company goes 
beyond those financial targets, as crucial as they are to our continued 
progress. In a company like ours, our profits endure and grow as the 
result of our seeing the broader picture – working for a broader 
purpose than profits. Whether that is helping a child learn to read; 
helping a teacher inspire her class; helping a business person 
understand the markets and make good decisions about them;  
helping a professional move on in his career; helping a talented  
writer to find her voice and her audience. Helping people make 
progress in their lives. 

We’re extremely proud of what we accomplished in 2007, in 
improving both our financial performance and our customers’ lives. 
And we’re confident that the steps we took last year to bolster all our 
strategies will yield even more in 2008. That is the kind of progress we 
can all look forward to celebrating. 

Marjorie Scardino, Chief executive 

This kind of international outlook features heavily on every page of the 
Financial Times. Its whole mission in life is international: to explain 
and illuminate business, finance and politics in a global context.  
That attitude sets the FT apart both editorially and commercially.  

In circulation, last year the US overtook the UK as the FT’s biggest 
single market. (I know of only one other newspaper anywhere in the 
world, The Economist, which has achieved the feat of selling more 
copies outside its home market than inside.) In advertising, we are 
providing global companies the ability to talk to the world’s senior 
decision-makers in business and politics on a worldwide basis – and 
that’s a valuable niche. That explains the consistent increase in the  
FT’s advertising for each of the past three years.  

In education, we have steadily grown the sales and profits of our 
international (meaning non-US) businesses. We’ve had particular 
success in English Language Teaching through the world-famous 
Longman brand; in investing in local editions of our major textbook 
programmes for school, college and professional students; in school 
testing in the UK through Edexcel and in professional qualifications 
and testing worldwide; and in digital programmes.  

This past year we accelerated that strategy through the acquisition of 
the Harcourt International education businesses. That makes us the 
leading school publishing company in the UK, and it extends our 
strong positions in key markets including Australia, New Zealand  
and South Africa. 

Meanwhile eCollege, our recently-acquired online distance learning 
company, has a big opportunity to become international now that  
it is a part of our worldwide education business. 

Altogether, our education businesses outside America had sales of 
close to $2bn this past year – and we believe the worldwide demand  
for skills and learning can keep pushing that number higher. 

Leaner, and stronger 
We have the firepower to do all this – invest in high-quality content, 
innovative technology and international expansion – for one reason. 
Pearson has become much more efficient in the way we do business 
because we’ve become a cohesive company.   

Today we have a strong centralised operations structure, in charge  
of quality and efficiency in a whole range of centrally-purchased  
and administered services across technology, property, warehousing, 
distribution, printing and many other areas. In some markets our 
book publishing companies operate as one business. In almost every 
one they now share warehouses and distribution and anything else 
they can.  

So while sales growth was strong last year, up an underlying 6%, 
increased efficiency meant that profit growth was especially rapid, up 
14%, with excellent results across all our businesses. On an underlying 
basis, adjusted operating profit rose 9% in education, 20% at Penguin 
and 30% at the FT Group.  

6    Pearson Annual Report and Accounts 2007 

 
 
 
Our Business and Society 

Welcome to our report on ‘Business in Society’ for 2007.  
As Marjorie describes in her review, as an education and information 
company almost all our products and services help our customers 
succeed and get on in their lives whether it’s through formal education, 
lifelong learning or intellectual stimulation. Our goal is simple: to be  
a socially responsible company that has a positive impact on society.  

Each year we set out targets to help us focus on the way we impact  
on society across the company and across the world. Here you can  
see how we performed against these targets last year and our new  
ones for 2008. There were several particular highlights in 2007.  

We are rapidly increasing our commitment to digital products and 
services – nowhere more so than in our education business, where  
we lead our industry in developing new ‘adaptive learning’ products 
which use interactive technology to zero in on the needs of individuals. 
These services can deliver significant learning gains and help schools 
and colleges to be even more responsive to their students.  

We made good progress towards our aim of becoming climate neutral 
across all of our operations by the end of 2009. Of course, there is still  
a lot more to do, and the innovative use of technology will play an 
important part in helping us reach our goal.  

It is central to our strategy that we should become a more international 
and more diverse organisation. We have stepped up our efforts to 
achieve this – launching, for example a new development programme 
to swap people between our companies and between countries 
primarily on short-term assignments. 

The Pearson Foundation continued its work partnering with leading 
businesses and not-for-profit organisations to support education and 
literacy across the globe. The FT’s seasonal campaign once again raised 
money for the charity Camfed, with readers and staff donating over 
£1.6m for the charity which is dedicated to providing better 
educational opportunities for girls across Africa. We extended our 
Booktime programme in the UK to encourage adults and children  
to read together and again helped set a new world record with 
Jumpstart’s Read for the Record campaign in the US. We were also 
awarded a Big Tick by the UK’s Business in the Community – an 
award of excellence which recognises companies’ social impact and,  
in Pearson’s case, the use of technology to transform student learning. 

You can find further details about these and our other activities  
online in our full CSR report at: 
www.pearson.com/community/csr_report2007 

We welcome any comments or suggestions you have, which can be 
sent to me at david.bell@pearson.com  

Our targets for 2007 
Maintain our position in the key indices of social 
responsibility. 
Expand the environmentally friendly book 
packaging options to distribution centres outside our 
key markets of the US and UK. 
Continue our environmental and labour standards 
auditing programme with our printers in Asia, the 
Far East and parts of continental Europe. 
Continue to advance our programme for 
independent certification of the paper we purchase 
for our books and newspapers. 
Continue the process of becoming a climate neutral 
company with a view to completing that process 
globally by the end of 2009. 
Continue our commitment to build a truly 
international business by helping more of our  
people experience a new country on a short-term 
assignment, with our developing markets as priority. 
Show evidence of progress in retention of people 
with diverse backgrounds for both entry level and 
management positions. 
Launch the Pearson Foundation Development Fund 
to support our businesses in their work with  
community-based programmes around the world. 
Work with the UK government to extend our  
flagship community programme Booktime;  
build on the success of Read for the Record with 
Jumpstart in the US. 

Achieved 

Ongoing 

Our plans for 2008 
Maintain our position in the key indices of social responsibility. 

Expand our individual company environmental committees into our  
US and other businesses, directly involving many more of our people.  

Continue our environmental and labour standards auditing programme, 
revisiting our printers in Asia, North America and parts of Europe. 

Achieved 

Continue the process of becoming a climate neutral company with a view  
to completing that process globally by the end of 2009. 

Achieved 

Ongoing 

Ongoing 

Ongoing 

Achieved 

Achieved 

Audit the social and environmental policies and impact of companies 
acquired in 2007 and set out plans to integrate them into Pearson’s 
framework for corporate responsibility. 

Accelerate our commitment to build a truly international business by 
helping more of our people experience a new country on a short-term 
assignment, with our developing markets as a priority.  

Show evidence of progress in retention of people with diverse backgrounds 
for both entry level and management positions. 

Launch the Pearson International Education Summit, bringing  
together global education leaders to identify and share exemplary 
educational practices. 

Use the Pearson Foundation Development Fund to work with our 
businesses in Africa, India, and Asia to provide training and support for local 
teachers in developing communities. 

Build on the success of our ongoing Booktime and Read for the Record 
Campaigns to showcase the importance of early reading for young  
people everywhere. 

David Bell, Director for people 

7    Pearson Annual Report and Accounts 2007 

 
 
 
 
Business Review 

About Pearson 
Pearson is an international media and education company with  
world-leading businesses in education, business information and 
consumer publishing.  

We create and manage intellectual property, which we promote and 
sell to our customers under well-known brand names, to inform, 
educate and entertain. We deliver our content in a variety of forms  
and through a variety of channels, including books, newspapers and 
online services. We increasingly offer services as well as content, from 
test administration and processing to teacher development and  
school software. 

Though we operate in 
markets are the US (59% of sales) and Europe (26% of sales) on a 
continuing basis. 

 countries around the world, today our largest 

60

Our businesses 
Pearson consists of three major worldwide businesses: 

Pearson Education is the world’s leading education company. We are  
a leading publisher of textbooks, supplementary learning materials  
and electronic education programmes for teachers and students of  
all ages, and we play a major role in the testing and certification of 
school students and professionals. Pearson Education operates 
through three worldwide segments, serving School, Higher Education 
and Professional markets.  

The Financial Times Group is a leading provider of international 
business and financial news, data, comment and analysis, in print  
and online. It has two major parts: 

–  FT Publishing includes the Financial Times and FT.com, one of  
the world’s premier sources of business information, alongside a 
portfolio of financial magazines. It also includes an online financial 
information business Mergermarket, which provides early stage 
intelligence to financial institutions and corporates, as well as 
several joint ventures and associates including 50% of both The 
Economist Group and the FTSE index business. 

–  Interactive Data provides specialist financial data to financial 

institutions and retail investors. Pearson owns a 62% interest in 
Interactive Data, which is publicly listed on the New York Stock 
Exchange (NYSE:IDC). 

The Penguin Group is one of the world’s foremost English language 
publishers. We publish the works of many authors in an extensive 
portfolio of fiction, non-fiction and reference titles, under imprints 
including Penguin, Hamish Hamilton, Putnam, Berkley, Viking and 
Dorling Kindersley. 

Our strategy 
Over the past decade we have transformed Pearson by focusing on 
companies which provide ‘education’ in the broadest sense of the 
word; companies that educate, inform and entertain. Through a 
combination of organic investment and acquisitions, we have built 
each one of our businesses into a leader in its market, and have 
integrated our operations so that our businesses can share assets, 
brands, processes, facilities, technology and central services. 

Our goal is to produce sustainable growth on our three key financial 
measures – adjusted earnings per share, cash flow and return on 
invested capital – which we believe are, together, good indicators  
that we are building the long-term value of Pearson. 

8    Pearson Annual Report and Accounts 2007 

We do this by investing consistently in four areas, which are common 
to all our businesses: 

–  Content We invest steadily in unique, valuable publishing  

content and keep replenishing it. Over the past five years, for 
example, we have invested $1.7bn in new content in our education 
business alone. 

–  Technology and services We invested early and consistently in 

technology, believing that, in the digital world, content alone would 
not be enough. We now generate more than $1bn in sales from 
technology products and services, and our testing and assessment 
businesses, serving school students and professionals, make more 
than $1.2bn of sales, up from around $200m eight years ago. 

–  International markets Though we currently generate around 60% 
of our sales in the US, our brands, content and technology-plus-
services models work around the world. All parts of Pearson are 
investing in selected emerging markets, where the demand for 
information and education is growing particularly fast. 

–  Efficiency We’ve invested to become a leaner, more efficient 

company, through savings in our individual businesses and through 
a strong centralised operations structure. Over the past three years, 
we have increased our operating profit margins from 10.8% to 
15.0% and reduced average working capital as a percentage of sales 
in Pearson Education and Penguin from 29.4% to 25.6%, freeing 
up cash for further investment. 

We believe this strategy can create a virtuous circle – efficiency, 
investment, market share gains and scale – which in turn can produce 
sustainable growth on our financial goals and the value of the 
company. This strategy helped us to achieve another set of record 
results in 2007. 

2007 financial overview 
Pearson’s three key financial measures are adjusted earnings per share, 
cash flow and return on invested capital. In 2007, adjusted EPS and 
cash flow reached record levels and we generated a further significant 
underlying improvement in return on invested capital. 

In 2007, Pearson’s sales increased by 6% to £4.2bn and adjusted operating 
profit by 14% to a record £634m. Every part of Pearson contributed to 
this profit increase, with adjusted operating profit at Pearson Education 
up 9%, Penguin up 20% and the FT Group up 30%. Headline earnings 
per share were 46.7p, up 8% (and up 15% at constant currency).  

Growth rates are stated on an underlying basis, excluding the impact 
of currency movements and portfolio changes. In 2007 currency 
movements reduced adjusted sales by £228m, adjusted operating 
profit by £37m and adjusted earnings per share by 2.7p, whilst 
portfolio changes increased adjusted sales by £146m and adjusted 
operating profit by £22m. 

We also produced record cash flows. Operating cash flow increased  
by 19% or £109m to £684m and operating free cash flow by £99m  
to £533m. Cash conversion was once again very strong at 108% of 
operating profit. Over the past three years, the proportion of our 
profits converted to cash has averaged more than 100%. The ratio  
of average working capital to sales at Pearson Education and Penguin 
improved by a further 0.7% points to 25.6%. Our return on invested 
capital shows a headline increase of 0.2% points (to 8.2%) and a 1.0% 
point underlying improvement. 

Statutory results show an increase of £52m in operating profit to 
£574m (£522m in 2006). Basic earnings per share for continuing 
businesses was 39.0p in 2007 against 52.7p in 2006, largely reflecting 
the absence of a 2006 tax credit. Net debt was £86m lower at £973m 
(from £1,059m in 2006). 

The board is proposing a dividend increase of 7.8% to 31.6p. Subject  
to shareholder approval, 2007 will be Pearson’s 16th straight year of 
increasing our dividend above the rate of inflation. 

During the year, we announced the acquisition of Harcourt 
Assessment and Harcourt Education International from Reed Elsevier 
for $950m. The transaction closed in several stages, with the final stage 
completed in January 2008 following clearance by the US Department 
of Justice. Aside from the Harcourt deal, we also announced the 
acquisition of eCollege in 2007, a key provider of e-learning and 
enrolment services to post-secondary education. 

These two transactions extend Pearson’s position as the world’s 
leading education company by adding new capabilities, 
complementary products and further international reach. 

In February 2008 Pearson completed the sale of its Data Management 
business to M & F Worldwide Corp. for $225m. 

In December 2007, we completed the sale of Les Echos to LVMH 
for €240m in cash. In January 2008, we announced that we had 
agreed to sell our 50% stake in FT Deutschland to Gruner + Jahr. 
The transaction increases Gruner + Jahr’s stake to 100% and is  
expected to complete in the first quarter of 2008.  

These two transactions will allow us to focus the FT Group on the 
worldwide expansion of the Financial Times and our digital financial 
information business. 

Pearson Education: overview  
Pearson Education is the world’s largest publisher of textbooks and 
online teaching materials. It serves the growing demands of teachers, 
students, parents and professionals throughout the world for 
stimulating and effective education programmes, in print and online.  

In 2007 Pearson Education had sales of £2,684m or 64% of Pearson’s 
total. Of these, £1.9bn (70%) were generated in North America and 
£0.8bn (30%) in the rest of the world. Pearson Education generated 
64% of Pearson’s operating profit. 

Pearson Education competes with other publishers and creators of 
educational materials and services. These competitors include large 
international companies, such as McGraw-Hill and Houghton  
Mifflin Harcourt, alongside smaller niche players that specialise  
in a particular academic discipline or focus on a learning technology. 
Competition is based on the ability to deliver quality products and 
services that address the specified curriculum needs and appeal to  
the school boards, educators and government officials making 
purchasing decisions. 

* Underlying growth 

We report Pearson Education’s performance by the three worldwide 
market segments it serves: School, Higher Education and Professional. 

School: overview 
Our School business contains a unique mix of publishing, testing and 
technology products, which are increasingly integrated. It generates 
around two-thirds of its sales in the US.  

In the US, we publish high quality curriculum programmes for school 
students covering subjects such as reading, literature, maths, science 
and social studies. We publish under a range of well-known imprints 
that include Scott Foresman in the elementary school market and 
Prentice Hall in secondary.  

Our school testing business is the leading provider of test 
development, processing and scoring services to US states and the 
federal government, processing some 40 million tests each year. Its 
capabilities will be further enhanced through the integration of the 
recently acquired Harcourt Assessment. 

We are also the leading provider of electronic learning programmes  
for schools, and of ‘Student Information Systems’ technology which 
enables schools and districts to record and manage information about 
student attendance and performance.  

In the US, more than 90% of school funds come from state or local 
government, with the remainder coming from federal sources.  
The major customers of our School business are state education 
boards and local school districts.  

*Restated to reflect the impact of the 2007 change in tax treatment of amortisation of goodwill, 2.9p. 

Note: 
Throughout this review, we refer to a series of ‘Key Performance Indicators’ alongside our key financial 
measures. Management uses these indicators to track performance on non-financial measures such as 
market share or growth relative to our industries. 

9    Pearson Annual Report and Accounts 2007 

 
 
 
–  Strong performance from school publishing businesses in South 

Africa and Australia; in Italy, integration of Pearson Paravia Bruno 
Mondadori complete, producing integration savings, margin 
improvement and market share gains; strong organic growth in 
Spanish language school publishing. 

Innovation in school technology 
–  13 product nominations in ten categories, more than any other 
education company, for the Software and Information Industry 
Association ‘Codie’ awards. The products include: PASeries, the 
first formative assessment product designed to measure progress 
and forecast student growth toward state goals or grade level 
expectations; Pearson Inform 4.1, a K-12 data analysis and decision 
support tool; PowerSchool Premier, a student information system 
that provides access to student information, enabling data-driven 
decisions that enhance student learning; and eCollege, an on-
demand distance learning platform. 

–  Continued investment in digital programmes both for basal 

adoption and for special populations, including NovaNet and 
SuccessMaker. Pre-publication expenditure for digital programmes 
growing as a proportion of total pre-publication expenditure. 

–  enVisionMATH, our new integrated print-and-digital elementary 
maths programme (and the next generation of our successful 
California Social Studies programme), successfully launched  
for the 2008 adoption campaign. In 2008, maths accounts for 
approximately one-third of the total new adoption opportunity.  

Strong growth and share gains in school testing 
–  US School testing sales up in double digits (after high single digit 
growth in 2006), benefiting from further contract wins, market 
share gains and strength in online assessment. 

–  2.5 million secure online tests delivered across 13 states during  

the year, up from 1.4 million in 2006.  

–  Acquisition of Harcourt Assessment complements our existing 
assessment business, broadens our scale and reach in adjacent 
markets and creates new publishing and digital opportunities  
both in the US and around the world.  

–  In the UK, we marked a total of 9.6 million GCSE, AS and A-level 

exam scripts, 4.6 million of which were marked on-screen. 
ResultsPlus rolled out across the UK and internationally providing 
more than 2,250 schools with secure online access to question-level 
examination performance data on exam results day for the first 
time. More than 100,000 students access their results online on 
results day for the first time. 

Business Review continued 

Outside the US, we publish school materials in local languages in a 
number of countries. We are the world’s leading provider of English 
Language Teaching materials for children and adults, published under 
the well-known Longman imprint. We bolstered our position further 
in international markets through the recent acquisition of Harcourt 
Education International.  

We are also a leading provider of testing, assessment and qualification 
services. Our key markets outside the US include Canada, the UK, 
Australia, New Zealand, Italy, Spain, South Africa, Hong Kong and the 
Middle East. 

School: 2007 performance 

£ millions 

Sales 

Adjusted operating profit 

2007 

1,537 

203 

2006 

1,455 

184 

Headline 
growth 

Underlying 
growth 

6% 

10% 

6% 

11% 

Continued share gains in school publishing 
–  Pearson US School publishing up 3.5%, against industry growth of 
2.7% (source: Association of American Publishers), as we benefit 
from our sustained investment in new basal programmes and 
innovative digital services.  

–  Faster underlying growth in international school publishing, with 

continued margin improvement. 

–  Pearson takes a leading share of the new US adoption market: 30% 
of the total market and 31% where we competed. #1 or #2 market 
share in reading, maths, science and social studies. Total 2007 new 
adoption opportunity of approximately $830m, up from $670m  
in 2006.  

–  US School new adoption market expected to remain strong over 
the next three years (estimated at $900m in 2008; $860m in 2009; 
and more than $1bn in 2010). In 2008 we are competing for around 
90% of the total new adoption opportunity.  

–  Acquisition of Harcourt International brings leading content for 
school and vocational customers in many markets including the 
UK, South Africa, Australia and New Zealand. Transaction adds 
further scale to Pearson’s international education businesses and 
accelerates the combination of educational content and innovative 
technology to personalise learning. Integration of the Harcourt 
business is progressing well. 

–  Major cross company global English, maths and science projects 

launched, with the aim of sharing assets, expertise, investment and 
technology across all major international markets. 

–  Successful global ELT publishing franchises in every major  

market segment – primary, secondary, adult, business and exam 
preparation – drives strong growth worldwide. Sales of student 
editions of English Adventure, developed with Disney, top six 
million units in less than three years; Economist and FT branded 
courses also performing strongly with major launch of Penguin 
Readers planned for this year. 

10    Pearson Annual Report and Accounts 2007 

 
In 2007, our Higher Education business generated approximately  
77% of its sales in the US. Outside the US, we adapt our textbooks and 
technology services for individual markets, and we have a growing 
local publishing programme. Our key markets outside the US include 
Canada, the UK, Benelux, Mexico, Germany, Hong Kong, Korea, 
Taiwan and Malaysia. 

Higher Education: 2007 performance 

£ millions 

Sales 

Adjusted operating profit 

2007 

793 

161 

2006 

795 

161 

Headline
growth 

Underlying 
growth 

–% 

–% 

5% 

5% 

Rapid growth in online learning and custom publishing 
–  Investment in established and new author franchises, such as 

Campbell’s Biology, Kotler’s Marketing Management, Hubbard’s 
Economics and Cicarrelli’s Psychology, continues to underpin the 
strong performance of our higher education business. 

–  ‘MyLab’ digital homework and assessment programmes launched 
in 22 new subject disciplines in 2007, increasing the total number  
of disciplines covered to 38. These programmes support over 2,000 
textbooks and were used globally by 2.9 million students in 2007 
(up more than 30% on 2006). Evaluation studies show that the use 
of the MyLab programmes can significantly improve student test 
scores and instructional productivity.  

–  In corporate finance, one of the largest global markets in business 
education, Pearson publishes the successful first edition bestseller, 
Berk/DeMarzo’s Corporate Finance, together with MyFinanceLab. 
Pearson’s market share increases from 4% to 11% in the US and 
from 39% to 48% in the UK. It is the most successful launch of a 
first edition in this discipline in more than a decade and one of 
Pearson’s most successful global launches ever, winning university 
adoptions in 22 countries. In World History, the first edition of 
Fernandez-Armesto’s The World: A History with MyHistoryLab 
increases Pearson’s market share from 25% to 35%.  

–  Acquisition of eCollege builds Pearson’s position as an education 

services provider. eCollege works with partner educational 
institutions to design, build and support online degree, certificate, 
diploma and professional development programmes. Student 
enrolments increase 44% in 2007 to 1.9 million. eCollege broadens 
Pearson’s services to academic institutions; Pearson’s scale and 
reach enable eCollege to access new customers in the school,  
post-secondary and professional/vocational markets both in the  
US and worldwide. 

–  Pearson is the largest publisher on CourseSmart.com, a joint 

venture of the largest US education textbook publishers with over 
2,500 titles. CourseSmart.com provides cost effective ebooks to 
students and time-efficient review of textbooks for professors. 

–  Continued strong double digit growth in our custom solutions 

business – which builds customised textbooks and online services 
and has become a leader in the creation of courseware and 
curriculum for e-learning institutions. 

Good progress in international markets 
–  In Europe, good revenue growth and strong margin improvement 
as organic and acquisition investment in international education 
continues to bear fruit. Particular areas of strength included local 
language editions of our major authors and custom publishing 
including the successful launch of ‘local language’ science 
publishing in Germany. 

Higher Education: overview 
Pearson is the largest publisher of textbooks and related course 
materials for colleges and universities in the US. We publish across  
all of the main fields of study with imprints such as Prentice Hall, 
Addison Wesley, Allyn & Bacon and Benjamin Cummings.  

Typically, professors or other instructors select or ‘adopt’ the textbooks 
and online resources they recommend for their students, which 
students then purchase either in a bookstore or online. Today the 
majority of our textbooks are accompanied by online services which 
include homework and assessment tools, study guides and course 
management systems that enable professors to create online courses.  

We have also introduced new formats such as downloadable audio 
study guides and electronic textbooks which are sold on subscription. 
In addition, we have a fast-growing custom publishing business which 
works with professors to produce textbooks and online resources 
specifically adapted for their particular course. 

11    Pearson Annual Report and Accounts 2007 

 
 
Business Review continued 

–  Major programme of adapting/versioning ‘MyLab’ and  

‘Mastering’ technology platforms for international markets.  
MyLab programmes now being used internationally in almost  
50 countries, with almost 160,000 student registrations for online 
courses in Europe, the Middle East and Africa.  

Professional: overview 
Our Professional education business publishes educational materials 
and provides testing and qualifications services for adults. Our 
publishing imprints include Addison Wesley Professional, Prentice 
Hall PTR, Cisco Press (for IT professionals), Peachpit Press and New 
Riders Press (for graphics and design professionals), Que/Sams 
(consumer and professional imprint) and Prentice Hall Financial 
Times and Wharton School Publishing (for the business education 
market).  

We have a fast-growing Professional Testing business, Pearson VUE, 
which manages major long-term contracts to provide qualification  
and assessment services through its network of test centres around  
the world. Key customers include major technology companies, the 
Graduate Management Admissions Council and the UK’s Driving 
Standards Agency.  

Professional: 2007 performance 

£ millions 

Sales* 

Adjusted operating profit 

2007 

354 

40 

2006 

341 

38 

Headline 
growth 

Underlying 
growth 

4% 

5% 

9% 

11% 

*Excludes Government Solutions and includes Data Management 

–  With the sale of Government Solutions in 2007 and Data 

Management in 2008, our Professional business is focused on 
publishing for professionals in business and technology, and  
on testing and certifying adults to be professionals. 

12    Pearson Annual Report and Accounts 2007 

Professional Testing: rapid organic sales and profit growth  
–  Professional Testing sales up 14% in 2007. Approximately  

5.8 million secure online tests delivered in more than 5,000 test 
centres worldwide in 2007. 

–  Strong margin improvement as test volumes rise, driven by higher 
demand from existing customers such as GMAC (for business 
school applicants), NCLEX (for nurses) and the DSA/DVTA 
driving theory test. Good new contract performance, including the 
American Board of Internal Medicine and the National Association 
Boards of Pharmacy; and strong renewals, including the Institute  
of Financial Services and the American Registry of Radiological 
Technologists. 

Professional publishing: good sales growth and further margin 
improvement 
–  Technology Publishing achieves good sales growth and significantly 
improves profitability, benefiting from a focused and refreshed 
front list, a favourable software release schedule and Safari Books 
Online, our electronic publishing platform (a joint venture with 
O’Reilly Media). Scott Kelby, a Peachpit author, is the top-selling 
US computer book author for the fourth consecutive year with 
titles including The iPod Book; The Digital Photography Book; and 
The Adobe Photoshop Lightroom Book for Digital Photographers.  

–  Strong performance in Europe, helped by success of publishing for 
the new Windows Vista launch; a new partnership with Microsoft 
Press in the Netherlands; and a successful move into digital 
publishing and training in Germany. 

–  Strong performance from business imprints Wharton School 

Publishing and FTPress, aided by Pearson’s global distribution and 
strong retail relationships. Wharton School Publishing recognised 
on the Amazon.com Best Business Books of 2007 with We Are 
Smarter Than Me: How to Unleash the Power of Crowds in Your 
Business, by Barry Libert and Jon Spector, and Firms of Endearment: 
How World-Class Companies Profit from Passion and Purpose, by 
Rajendra S. Sisodia, David B. Wolfe and Jaqdish N. Sheth. 

Data Management: sale completed 22 February 2008 
–  Sale of Data Management to M & F Worldwide Corp. for $225m. 

Data Management contributed $112m of sales and $25m of 
operating profit to Pearson in 2007. 

Financial Times Group: overview 
The FT Group provides a broad range of data, analysis and services to 
an audience of internationally-minded business people and financial 
institutions. In 2007, the FT Group had sales of £688m, or 16% of 
Pearson’s total sales (15% in 2006), and contributed 24% of Pearson’s 
operating profit.  

It has two major parts: FT Publishing, a combination of the Financial 
Times, FT.com and a portfolio of financial magazines and online 
financial information companies; and Interactive Data, our 62%-
owned financial information company.  

FT Publishing competes with newspapers and other information 
sources, such as The Wall Street Journal, by offering timely and expert 
journalism. It competes for advertisers with other forms of media 
based on the ability to offer an effective means for advertisers to reach 
their target audience.  

Interactive Data competes with Bloomberg, Reuters and Thomson 
Financial on a global basis for the provision of financial data to  
the back office financial institutions. In Europe, Telekurs is also a 
direct competitor for these services. Smaller, more specialised vendors 
also compete with Interactive Data in certain market segments and  
in certain geographic areas. 

 
Interactive Data’s four businesses provide a range of enterprise-wide 
services, including:  

Pricing and Reference Data: supplying global securities pricing, 
evaluations and reference data for more than 3.5 million securities 
traded around the world, including hard-to-value instruments  

Real-Time Services: providing real-time global market data and 
managed solutions to financial institutions, redistributors and online 
financial portals worldwide. Services range from a consolidated, low-
latency data feed, to tools for building, managing and hosting 
customised applications  

Fixed Income Analytics: providing fixed income portfolio analytics  
in North America and Europe  

Desktop Solutions eSignal: through its eSignal division, Interactive 
Data’s eSignal provides global, real-time market data and decision 
support tools to active investors and professionals worldwide  

FT Group: 2007 performance 

£ millions 

Sales: 

FT Publishing 

Interactive Data 

Total 

Adjusted operating profit: 

FT Publishing 

Interactive Data 

Total 

2007 

2006 

Headline
growth 

Underlying
growth 

344 

344 

688 

56 

97 

153 

280 

332 

612 

27 

89 

116 

23% 

4% 

12% 

107% 

9% 

32% 

12% 

8% 

10% 

85% 

13% 

30% 

Note: excludes Les Echos, sold in December 2007. 

Great publishing, continued growth and significant margin improvement 
–  FT Publishing revenues up 12% (advertising revenues up 10%) 

with operating profit more than doubling to £56m in  
headline terms. 

–  Outstanding year at the Financial Times: 

–  FT newspaper circulation up 2% to almost 440,000 (for the  
July-December 2007 ABC period), with a 19% increase  
in subscriptions; 

–  Digital subscribers to the FT up 13% to 101,000; monthly 

unique users up 30% to 5.7 million; monthly page views up 33%  
to 48.2 million; 

–  FT.com attracts 150,000 new registered users since launch of its 
innovative new access model in October 2007; strong growth 
continues in the early part of 2008.  

* Underlying growth 

FT Publishing 
The Financial Times is the world’s leading international daily business 
newspaper. Its six month average circulation of approximately 440,000 
copies at December 2007, is split between the UK (31% of circulation), 
Europe, Middle East and Africa (29%), the US (30%), Asia (10%). Its 
main sources of revenue are from sales of the newspaper, advertising  
and conferences.  

The FT also sells content and advertising online through FT.com 
which charges subscribers for detailed industry news, comment and 
analysis, while providing general news and market data to a wider 
audience. The new FT.com access model was successfully introduced 
in 2007 and is based on frequency of use and is intended to drive usage 
and accelerate advertising growth, while providing greater value and 
services to its premium paying customers. 

FT Publishing also includes: FT Business, which publishes specialist 
information on the retail, personal and institutional finance industries 
through titles including Investors Chronicle, Money Management, 
Financial Adviser, The Banker; and Mergermarket, our online financial 
data and intelligence provider.  

Mergermarket provides early stage proprietary intelligence to financial 
institutions and corporates. Its key products include Mergermarket, 
Debtwire, dealReporter, Wealthmonitor and Pharmawire (which was 
launched in 2007). 

FT Publishing joint ventures and associates 
Our joint ventures and associates include: 

–  50% interest in The Economist Group, publisher of the world’s 

leading weekly business and current affairs magazine; 

–  50% interest in FTSE International, a joint venture with the 

–  FT named Newspaper of the Year at the 2007 What the Papers  

London Stock Exchange, which publishes a wide range of global 
indices, including the FTSE index; 

–  50% interest in Business Day and Financial Mail, publishers  
of South Africa’s leading business newspaper and magazine; 

Say Awards.  

–  Strong trading performance at FT Business as integration with  
the FT Newspaper helps to generate additional revenue and  
reduce costs. 

–  33% interest in Vedomosti, a leading Russian business newspaper; 

–  The Economist, in which Pearson owns a 50% stake, increases  

–  14% interest in Business Standard, one of India’s leading business 

newspapers. 

Interactive Data 
Interactive Data is a leading global provider of financial market data, 
analytics and related services to financial institutions, active traders  
and individual investors. The company’s customers use its offerings  
to support their portfolio management and valuation, research and 
analysis, trading, sales and marketing, and client service activities. 

its circulation by 9% to 1.3 million (for the July-December 2007  
ABC period). 

Continued shift towards global digital businesses and subscription 
revenues 
–  Strong contribution from Mergermarket: rapid revenue growth 

with 90%+ subscription renewal rates and a series of new product 
launches around the world including Pharmawire, Debtwire in  
Asia Pacific and dealReporter in Emerging Europe, Middle East  
and Africa. 

13    Pearson Annual Report and Accounts 2007 

 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
Business Review continued 

–  FTSE, in which Pearson owns a 50% stake, achieves double digit 

–  Interactive Data is listed on the New York Stock Exchange (NYSE: 

sales growth, benefiting from a strong new business performance,  
a joint venture with Xinhua Finance in China and strong growth  
in Exchange Traded Fund (ETF) licenses. 

–  Several small acquisitions of complementary subscription-based 

and digital businesses: 

IDC) and Pearson owns a 62% stake. Interactive Data’s 2007 results 
under US GAAP are available at www.pearson.com 

FT Group Key Performance Indicators
FT Publishing advertising  
revenue growth**

FT average copy sales growth

–  Infinata, a provider of research and business information to  
life science and financial services companies. The company’s 
products, which include BioPharm Insight and HNW Insight, 
provide clients with comprehensive, timely information used  
to make strategic and tactical business decisions. 

–  Exec-Appointments, a well-established global job site that 

focuses on the high-earning executive sector with approximately 
200,000 registered executive users. 

–  Money-Media, acquired in January 2008, a provider of must-
have news and analysis via email and websites to US mutual 
fund managers, institutional investors, high net-worth 
individuals, company directors and advisers. Approximately 
two-thirds of Money-Media’s revenues were generated through 
subscriptions with close to 90% renewal rates. 

–  Sale of Les Echos to LVMH for €240m (£174m) completed in 

December 2007.  

–  Sale of 50% stake in FT Deutschland to Gruner + Jahr announced 

in January 2008.  

Interactive Data 
Strong sales momentum 
–  Underlying sales growth of 8% driven primarily by strong sales  

to both existing and new institutional customers and a renewal rate 
of approximately 95% within the Institutional Services segment. 

–  Strong new sales momentum in Q4 2007 further supported 
activities to realign the company’s two largest institutional 
businesses under a single management structure. 

Continued focus on high value services 
–  Pricing and Reference Data continues to generate good growth  

in North America and Europe. The business continues to broaden 
its coverage of complex securities by expanding its universe  
of European asset-backed and mortgage-backed securities.  
The business also launched a new web-based offering, the Basket 
Calculation Service, designed to provide clients with the indicative 
optimised portfolio value for equity and fixed income exchange 
traded funds.  

–  Real-Time Services continues to achieve strong growth with new 
institutional sales in its two core product areas of real-time data 
feeds and managed solutions. Highlights include: growing adoption 
of its PlusFeed data service for algorithmic trading applications; the 
introduction of DirectPlus, a new ultra low latency direct exchange 
data service; and excellent sales momentum for managed solutions 
in North America with new customers including media companies, 
online brokerages, stock exchanges and financial institutions. 

–  Fixed Income Analytics completed 30 new BondEdge® installations 
during the year and made good progress in the development of its 
next-generation BondEdge® platform. 

–  In the Active Trader Services segment, eSignal experienced modest 

expansion of its direct subscriber base, delivered numerous 
innovations across its suite of active trader services, and added new 
content and capabilities on its financial websites. 

14    Pearson Annual Report and Accounts 2007 

10%

10%

2%

1%

FT Publishing’s year on year  
advertising sales growth.*

07

06

The FT Newspaper’s year on year  
average growth in copy sales.
(ABC)

07

06

FT.com unique user growth

Interactive Data customer retention

30%

13%

95%

95%

The FT’s year on year growth  
in unique users of FT.com.*

07

06

The number of customers  
renewing contracts as a percentage  
of total customer base.

07

06

Internal statistics.

* 
**  This KPI now reflects advertising growth of FT Publishing (FT Newspaper, FT.com, FT Business  

and FT Chinese).

The Penguin Group: overview 
Penguin is one of the world’s premier English language book 
publishers. We publish an extensive backlist and frontlist of titles, 
including fiction and non-fiction, literary prize winners, commercial 
bestsellers, classics and children’s titles. We rank in the top three 
consumer publishers, based upon sales, in all major English speaking 
and related markets – the US, the UK, Australia, New Zealand, 
Canada, India and South Africa. 

Penguin publishes under many imprints including, in the adult 
market, Allen Lane, Avery, Berkley, Dorling Kindersley (DK), Dutton, 
Hamish Hamilton, Michael Joseph, Plume, Putnam, Riverhead and 
Viking. Our leading children’s imprints include Puffin, Ladybird, 
Warne and Grosset & Dunlap.  

In 2007, Penguin had sales of £846m, representing 20% of Pearson’s 
total sales (21% in 2006) and contributed 12% of Pearson’s operating 
profit. Its largest market is the US, which generated around 55%  
of Penguin’s sales in 2007. The Penguin Group earns around 99%  
of its revenues from the sale of hard cover and paperback books.  
The balance comes primarily from audio books and e-books.  

 
 
in fiction for Sacred Games, Vikram Seth in non-fiction for Two 
Lives and Kiran Desai in readers’ choice for The Inheritance of Loss.  

–  China: Jiang Rong and Howard Goldblatt win inaugural Man Asian 
Literary prize for Wolf Totem, to be published in English around the 
world by Penguin in 2008. 

–  South Africa: another strong year led by John van de Ruit’s Spud: 

The Madness Continues. 

Innovation in print and online 
–  Rapid growth in sales through online retail and digital channels 

driven by innovative digital marketing initiatives and investment  
in ebooks (with 5,000 Penguin titles currently available) and digital 
content. Strong growth in online revenues and unique visitors to 
Penguin and DK websites.  

–  Continued innovation in formats (including the pioneering US 

premium paperback and personalised ‘on-demand’ travel guides), 
genres (Portfolio business imprint in India), sales channels 
(bestselling eBooks via online retailers and Penguin’s own websites; 
audio books via iTunes and Audible; Rough Guides via Motorola, 
Nokia and Samsung phones) and communications channels 
(www.spinebreakers.com, an online community for teenagers).  

–  Subscribers to Penguin and DK opt-in newsletters building rapidly, 
up 34% year-on-year to over 150,000, allowing Penguin consumers 
to personalise areas of interest and strengthening relationship with 
Penguin brand. 

Continued focus on quality and efficiency 
–  Pearson-wide renegotiation of major global paper, print and 
binding contracts continue to bring cost savings in 2007. 

–  Further improvement expected in 2008 from ongoing management 

of production, warehousing and distribution costs.  

Strong 2008 publishing schedule; strong start to the year 
–  Strong list of new titles for 2008 from bestselling and new authors 
including Patricia Cornwell, Steve Coll, Michael Pollan, Jamie 
Oliver, Marian Keyes, Jeremy Clarkson, Thomas Friedman, Niall 
Ferguson and the new James Bond book from Sebastian Faulks. 

–  Outstanding sales performance from Eckhart Tolle’s A New Earth, 

with 4 million copies shipped since its selection for Oprah 
Winfrey’s book club on 30 January. First of ten online classes 
featuring Eckhart Tolle and Oprah Winfrey aired on 3 March. 

07

06

Penguin sells directly to bookshops and through wholesalers. Retail 
bookshops normally maintain relationships with both publishers  
and wholesalers and use the channel that best serves the specific 
requirements of an order. It also sells through online retailers such  
as Amazon.com, as well as Penguin’s own website. 

Penguin competes with other publishers of fiction and non-fiction 
books. Principal competitors include Random House, HarperCollins, 
and Hachette Group. Publishers compete by developing a portfolio  
of books by established authors and by seeking out and promoting 
talented new writers. 

* Underlying growth 

The Penguin Group: 2007 performance 

£ millions 

Sales 

Adjusted operating profit 

2007 

846 

74 

2006 

848 

66 

Headline
growth 

Underlying 
growth 

–% 

12% 

3% 

20% 

Strong competitive performance in major markets 
–  Successful global publishing performance led by Alan Greenspan’s 
The Age of Turbulence, with almost 1 million hard cover copies 
shipped to date worldwide, and Kim Edwards’ first novel,  
The Memory Keeper’s Daughter, a global #1 bestseller for Penguin  
in the US, UK, Australia and Canada.  

–  Outstanding year for bestsellers in the US with titles including 

Elizabeth Gilbert’s Eat, Pray, Love (4.4 million copies shipped to 
date); Khaled Hosseini’s A Thousand Splendid Suns (2.2 million); 
and Ken Follett’s World Without End (almost 1 million).  

–  UK bestsellers included Marian Keyes’ Anybody Out There?, Jamie 
Oliver’s Jamie at Home, Jeremy Clarkson’s Don’t Stop Me Now and 
Charlie Higson’s Double or Die. Strong year for Brands & Licensing 
division driven by The Dr Who Annual (the second best-selling 
children’s book of 2007) and bestselling In the Night Garden titles.  

–  Australia: strong publishing from authors including Bryce 

Courtenay with The Persimmon Tree and Dr Manny Noakes  
with CSIRO Total Wellbeing Diet Book 2. 

–  DK delivered a strong global performance in traditional, custom 

and digital publishing, benefiting from innovative formats 
including The Human Body Book, personalised travel guides  
via traveldk.com and the first DK textbooks for higher  
education markets. 

Rapid growth in emerging markets 
–  India: Penguin India celebrated its 20th anniversary in 2007 with 

continued rapid growth. Penguin authors win all the major English 
language prizes in India’s national book awards: Vikram Chandra 

15    Pearson Annual Report and Accounts 2007 

 
 
 
Business Review continued 

Pearson outlook 2008  
In recent years we have significantly changed the shape of Pearson, 
building and diversifying our education company, shifting our 
financial information businesses towards recurring revenue streams 
and becoming more efficient through a centralised operations 
organisation. These moves have made Pearson a more profitable,  
more cash generative and more resilient company, and we expect  
to make further progress on our financial goals in 2008.  

At this early stage, our outlook for 2008 is: 

–  In Education (64% of 2007 sales and operating profit), we expect 
another year of good profit growth, benefiting once again from  
the unique breadth of our education business – from pre-school  
to adult learning; across publishing, testing and technology; and in 
the US and around the world.  

In our School business, integration of our recently-acquired 
Harcourt businesses is progressing well. In 2008, we expect School 
margins to be similar to 2007, after expensing integration costs 
relating to the acquisition. In 2009, we expect School margins to  
rise to around 15% as the majority of the integration costs fall  
away and as we realise the financial benefits of the acquisition.  

Including the Harcourt contribution, we expect our School 
business to grow sales well into double digits in 2008 at constant 
currency. Excluding Harcourt, we expect underlying sales growth  
in the low single digits, as US market growth of 3-4% is partly  
offset by our lower participation rate in new US adoptions and  
the conclusion of our UK key stage testing contract. 

In Higher Education, we expect our underlying sales to grow in the 
mid single digits, a little ahead of the industry. We expect margins 
to be stable, as we continue to invest in expanding our adaptive 
learning technologies and in taking our recently-acquired eCollege 
platform into new segments and geographic markets.  

In Professional, we expect sales to increase in the low single digits in 
underlying terms with underlying margins improving once again.  

–  Penguin (20% of sales; 12% of operating profit) expects to improve 
margins further and into double digits. Penguin’s good publishing 
and trading performance has continued into the early part of 2008. 

–  The Financial Times Group (16% of sales; 24% of operating profit) 

expects to continue its profit growth. We have substantially 
increased our digital and subscription revenues and reduced our 
exposure to print advertising in recent years (in 2007, digital 
services accounted for 63% of FT Group revenues, compared with 
28% in 2000; advertising accounted for 30% of FT Group revenues, 
down from 52% in 2000). At FT Publishing, advertising revenues 
have continued to grow in the early part of the year, but future 
advertising trends remain difficult to predict. However, as a result 
of our revenue diversification and cost actions we expect further 
profit improvement at FT Publishing this year, even without any 
growth in advertising revenues. Interactive Data expects to achieve 
revenue growth in the 7-9% range and operating profit growth in 
the 9-11% range (headline growth under US GAAP). 

16    Pearson Annual Report and Accounts 2007 

Group financial review 
Operating result  
On a headline basis, adjusted sales increased by £167m or 4% from 
£4,051m to £4,218m and total adjusted operating profit increased by 
£42m or 7% to £634m in 2007 from £592m in 2006.  

Adjusted sales include discontinued operations held throughout the 
current and previous year. In 2007 the sales by our Data Management 
business have been included in adjusted sales. Adjusted operating 
profit excludes amortisation and adjustment of acquired intangibles 
but also includes the adjusted profits from discontinued operations.  

Statutory operating profit from continuing operations increased  
by £52m or 10%, to £574m in 2007 from £522m in 2006.  
The statutory operating profit includes the effect of increased 
intangible amortisation but does not reflect the decreased  
contribution from discontinued operations. 

Net finance costs  
£ millions 

Net interest payable 

Finance income in respect of employee benefits 

Net finance costs reflected in adjusted earnings 

Net foreign exchange (losses)/gains 

Other (losses) 

Net finance costs 

2007 

(95)

10 

(85)

(17)

(4)

(106)

2006 

(94)

4 

(90)

19 

(3)

(74)

Net finance costs reported in our adjusted earnings comprise net 
interest payable and net finance income relating to post-retirement 
plans. Net interest payable in 2007 was £95m, up from £94m in 2006. 
Although we were partly protected by our fixed rate policy, a rise in 
average US dollar floating interest rates had an adverse effect. Year  
on year, average three month LIBOR (weighted for the Group’s 
borrowings in US dollars, euros and sterling at each year end) rose  
by 0.5% to 5.4%, reflecting a rise in interest rates and a change in the 
currency mix of year end debt. These two factors, together with a 
decrease in the Group’s average net debt of £90m, increased the 
Group’s average net interest rate payable by 0.3% to 7.3%. The net 
finance income relating to post-retirement plans rose by £6m in  
2007 resulting in an overall net finance cost reflected in adjusted 
earnings of £85m. 

We expect our interest charge in 2008 to be similar to that in 2007 with 
the higher level of net debt following the completion of the Harcourt 
transaction offset by strong cash generation and the recent proceeds 
from the disposals of Les Echos and Data Management. We expect our 
pension credit will remain at a similar level to 2007, despite an upward 
revision of life expectancy assumptions.  

Also included in the statutory definition of net finance costs are foreign 
exchange and other gains and losses. These are excluded from adjusted 
earnings as they represent short-term fluctuations in market value and 
are subject to significant volatility. Other gains and losses may not be 
realised in due course as it is normally the intention to hold the related 
instruments to maturity. Net foreign exchange losses of £17m in 2007 
mainly relate to exchange losses on legacy euro denominated debt  
held to hedge the receipt of euro proceeds from the sale of Les Echos.  
A corresponding gain is included in the higher proceeds realised on 
this sale. In 2006 euro borrowings and cross currency swaps that were 
not designated as net investment hedges contributed to the overall 
foreign exchange gains. 

 
 
 
 
Taxation  
In 2007 we revised our calculation of the effective tax rate on  
adjusted earnings to reflect the benefit of tax deductions attributable  
to amortisation of acquired goodwill and intangibles as this  
more accurately aligns the adjusted tax charge with the expected 
medium-term rate of cash tax payment. We have restated the 2006 
comparative figure. 

On this basis the effective tax rate on adjusted earnings was 26.4%  
in 2007 compared with 25.9% in 2006. Our overseas profits, which 
arise mainly in the US, remain mostly subject to tax rates which are 
higher than the UK corporation tax rate (which was 30% in 2007  
but will fall to 28% from 1 April 2008). This factor was offset by the 
amortisation-related tax deductions and, as in 2006, by releases from 
provisions reflecting continued progress in agreeing our tax affairs 
with the authorities. 

For 2008 we expect our effective tax rate on adjusted earnings to  
be in the 27% to 29% range.  

The reported tax charge on a statutory basis was £131m,  
representing a rate of 28.0%. As we explained last year, the 2006  
rate was abnormally low because of one-off adjustments related to  
the recognition of deferred tax assets for both capital losses and  
operating losses. The tax effects of the disposals during 2007, mainly 
Government Solutions (tax £93m) and Les Echos (tax £nil), are 
reflected in discontinued operations. 

Tax paid in 2007 was £87m, compared with £59m in 2006. The 2007 
amount included £26m paid in respect of disposals. 

Discontinued operations  
Discontinued operations relate to the disposal of Government 
Solutions (in February 2007), Les Echos (in December 2007) and the 
Data Management business (in February 2008). In total, we received 
cash proceeds of £469m for disposals in 2007.  

As previously announced, we realised a loss before tax of £19m and a 
tax charge of £93m on the sale of Government Solutions. We realised a 
profit before tax of £165m with no tax payable on the sale of Les Echos. 
In anticipation of a loss on sale of the Data Management business,  
a goodwill impairment of £97m has been charged to the income 
statement in 2007. We received cash proceeds of $225m on  
the sale of Data Management on 22 February 2008. 

Minority interests  
Our minority interests comprise mainly the minority share in 
Interactive Data. Our stake in Interactive Data remained at 62% 
throughout 2007, leaving the minority interest unchanged at 38%. 

Dividends  
The dividend accounted for in our 2007 financial statements totalling 
£238m, represents the final dividend (18.8p) in respect of 2006 and the 
2007 interim dividend of 11.1p. 

We are proposing a final dividend for 2007 of 20.5p, bringing the total 
paid and payable in respect of 2007 to 31.6p, a 7.8% increase on 2006. 
This final 2007 proposed dividend was approved by the board in 
February 2008, is subject to shareholder approval at the forthcoming 
AGM and will be charged against 2008 profits. For 2007, the dividend 
is covered 1.5 times by adjusted earnings. 

We seek to maintain a balance between the requirements of our 
shareholders for a rising stream of dividend income and the 
reinvestment opportunities which we identify around the Group.  

The board expects to raise the dividend more in line with earnings 
growth, while building our dividend cover towards two times earnings. 

Pensions 
Pearson operates a variety of pension plans. Our UK Group plan  
is by far the largest and includes a significant defined benefit section. 
We also have some smaller defined benefit plans in the US and 
Canada. Outside the UK, most of our companies operate defined 
contribution plans.  

The income statement expense for defined benefit plans is determined 
using annually derived assumptions as to salary inflation, investment 
returns and discount rates, based on prevailing conditions at the start 
of the year. The assumptions for 2007 are disclosed in note 24 to our 
accounts, along with the year end surpluses and deficits in our defined 
benefit plans. We recognise actuarial gains and losses arising when 
assumptions diverge from reality through the statement of recognised 
income and expense (SORIE). 

Our charge to profit in respect of worldwide pensions and post 
retirement benefits amounted to £61m in 2007 (2006: £60m) of which 
a charge of £71m (2006: £64m) was reported in operating profit and 
the net finance benefit of £10m (2006: £4m) was reported against net 
finance costs.  

Pension funding levels are kept under regular review by the company 
and the plan Trustee. Following the completion of the latest actuarial 
valuation of the UK Group pension plan as at January 2006, we  
made additional payments to the plan in 2007 amounting to £100m. 
These additional payments have contributed to the overall surplus 
recognised in the UK plan. 

Corporate responsibility 
Alongside our commitment to our financial goals, Pearson has a clear 
social purpose: to provide education, information and entertainment 
and help our customers get on in their lives. Our Corporate 
Responsibility programme addresses four main areas:  

–  Society – making communities better places to live and work;  

–  Our People – the issues that affect the people who work for us;  

–  Environment – our environmental impacts and what we do to 

manage them;  

–  Governance – our business procedures, code of conduct and supply 

chain management.  

Pearson is a founder signatory of the UN Global Compact on labour 
standards, human rights, the environment and anti-corruption.  
We are also long-standing members of the Dow Jones Sustainability 
and FTSE4Good ethical indices. In 2007 Pearson was named media 
sector leader in the Dow Jones Sustainability Indices. Our ranking in 
the Business in the Community Corporate Responsibility Index again 
rose and we were awarded the highest, ‘platinum’ status. 

We publish a detailed annual report on corporate responsibility 
providing details of our progress and plans in all these areas, which  
is available at www.pearson.com/community/csr_report2007 

Society 
Each one of our businesses pays great attention to the quality and 
accuracy of its content and services; in education, for example, we are 
investing in a series of long-term studies to measure the robustness of 
our programmes in enhancing student achievement. 

Beyond those basic products and services, Pearson has a proud history 
of corporate giving and supporting projects in our communities. 
Through the Pearson Foundation – and also through the efforts of  
our businesses and employees – we focus our charitable giving on 
education and literacy projects around the world. 

17    Pearson Annual Report and Accounts 2007 

Business Review continued 

People 
The following table shows for 2007 and 2006 the average number of 
people employed in each of our operating divisions.  
Average number employed 

2007 

2006 

School 

Higher Education 

Professional 

Penguin 

FT Publishing 

Interactive Data 

Other 

Continuing operations 
Discontinued operations 

Total 

12,906 

11,064 

5,098 

3,458 

4,163 

2,083 

2,300 

1,614 

31,622 
1,070 

32,692 

4,368 

3,204 

3,943 

1,766 

2,200 

1,669 

28,214 
6,127 

34,341 

Our people are our biggest – and most important – asset. We want to 
be the best company to work for. We want the people who work with 
us to enjoy what they do, to know they are good enough to work 
anywhere, but to stay with us because they think we are the best.  

We have a way still to go, but each year we have got closer to making 
this a reality. We think our benefits, incentive plans and training and 
management development programmes are as good as anywhere else 
and they all help to reinforce a strong culture which is anchored in the 
simple idea that as a company we want to be brave, imaginative and 
decent in the way we treat our customers, our suppliers and ourselves. 

Training and development Last year 220 senior managers went on 
Pearson-run management development and training programmes. 
650 of our senior managers have now been on one or more of these 
programmes which cover finance, strategic planning and advanced 
management techniques which are taught by business school 
professors from both sides of the Atlantic. Each of our operating 
companies also run extensive training programmes of their own. 

Talent management Our goal is to make absolutely sure that we  
have a strong pipeline of talented people for the future and we have 
introduced personal development plans for many of our senior 
management. But we take care to identify and develop talent at all 
levels within the company and review this talent regularly with each 
operating company. We are committed to ensuring that everyone in 
the company has an annual appraisal. Each operating company also 
reviews its talent annually and the results of this process are reviewed 
by the CEO of Pearson, the Director for people and the CEO of each 
company. We focus on performance and potential. Each autumn the 
Pearson board has a special session devoted solely to reviewing senior 
talent and some of our most promising people in the company.  
This ensures that we have a comprehensive succession plan for each 
part of our business. 

60

International development As we become more and more international 
 countries – we have significantly expanded 
– we are now at work in 
New Directions our programme of short term overseas assignments. 
In the first year of this centrally-managed programme, we moved 67 
people between companies and countries and in 2008 our target is to 
move at least 100. In 2008, we will also launch a Senior International 
Leadership Programme which will help prepare senior executives to 
work overseas on two- to three-year assignments as part  
of their management development. 

People for the future Pearson has a lot of talented people at all levels  
and we continue to run very successful programmes to identify and 
develop great talent deep within the company. The cornerstone of this 
is our annual Forum which brings together about 100 of our newest  

18    Pearson Annual Report and Accounts 2007 

and brightest managers from all over the world for a three-day session 
with the Pearson Management Committee and other senior managers. 
Similar forums are held within our operating companies and we also 
bring together our talent in functions like marketing, human resources 
and finance. 

Diversity Our goal is to be a company that reflects the societies in 
which we operate and we seek to attract the very best candidates at all 
levels regardless of race, gender, age, physical ability, religion or sexual 
orientation. We don’t set specific targets, but we do work very hard to 
make sure that the pool of applicants for jobs is diverse. We have made 
progress on several fronts in the past year, but there is still a great  
deal to do. We have increased the number of people we hire from 
minorities in the US and the UK, expanded our minority intern 
programmes on both sides of the Atlantic and added new titles to our 
African-American and Hispanic publishing lists. But we do not have 
enough executives at middle and senior management levels from 
minority backgrounds and we continue to work hard to correct this. 

Health and safety A Group level health and safety policy is in place  
and there are many examples of good practice relating to management 
initiatives and employee engagement, particularly in our distribution 
centres. 

Share ownership We want everyone in Pearson to own shares in  
the company and believe that the best way for people to profit from  
the success of the company is for them to become shareholders.  

Employee feedback and communication We continue to ask employees 
what they think about working in Pearson and each operating 
company also seeks and reviews its own feedback in detail. We have  
an internal communications programme which enables us to reach 
people through e-mails, employee road shows and visits from our 
senior managers. We try to listen as much as we talk so that we can  
act upon ideas, suggestions and views. 

Additional detail concerning our people is found on page 31. 

Suppliers 
To be a successful and sustainable business we have to ensure that  
we balance our objective of securing supplies without compromising 
our standards of quality, causing harm to the environment or 
damaging our suppliers and their workers wherever they are in  
the world. 

We were one of the founder signatories to the United Nations Global 
Compact. This sets out a series of principles on labour standards, 
human rights, the environment and anti-corruption. We have set out  
a series of commitments that reflect these principles against which we 
monitor and report our performance.  

The majority of our key suppliers are located in North America and 
Western Europe. However, some of our suppliers, particularly those 
providing print and production services are based in less developed 
countries. Since signing the Global Compact, we have: 

–  Written to many thousands of our suppliers to advise them of our 
commitment to the Global Compact, and our code of conduct.  

–  Included specific contractual commitments relating to the 

environment, labour standards and human rights in our key 
contracts, particularly those that relate to paper supply, printing 
and distribution.  

–  Managed an ongoing programme of supplier visits to assess 
compliance with the Global Compact and our contractual 
commitments.  

–  Worked with the UK book publishing industry to introduce 

common standards on labour standards and human rights and  
on an industry database on the environmental characteristics of 
paper purchased.  

Paper is our most significant area of supply and is predominantly 
sourced from North America and Scandinavia. Pearson was the first 
global publishing company to publicly disclose our environmental 
standards with regard to paper purchasing and we set targets relevant 
to our policy. 

In addition to auditing suppliers against our commitments, we ensure 
that our commercial purchasing teams have received training on our 
supply chain labour standards. 

Consistent with prior years, our 2007 supplier audits have not 
identified any material breaches of our supply chain policies. 

Details of our supplier payment policy are shown on page 31 in the 
Directors’ Report. 

Environment 
Increasing consensus over the causes of climate change is emerging. 
Pearson does not directly operate in industries where there is a 
potential for serious industrial pollution. Our main products are based 
on intellectual property. However, our offices and distribution centres 
do have an impact and we are committed to playing our part in 
tackling climate change.  

A formal environmental policy has been in place at Pearson since 1992. 
Our Director for people is responsible for the policy, but day-to-day 
implementation is with our operating companies. 

Pearson has an established Environmental Management System 
(EMS) in place for its global operations broadly based on the 
requirements of the International Environmental Management  
System standard, ISO 14001.  

Our approach has been successful. We were two years ahead of target 
in achieving our aim of reducing energy use by 10% compared to our 
2003 baseline. However we felt we could go further, so last year, we 
made a commitment to become climate neutral for those operations 
we directly control with a view to completing the process by the end  
of 2009. The challenge is also to every Pearson employee to become 
climate aware and to identify opportunities for improvement.  

We have set up an Environment Executive Committee which will  
have responsibility for overseeing progress against our climate  
neutral commitment.  

Our main environmental performance indicator is our greenhouse  
gas emissions expressed in metric tonnes of carbon dioxide (CO2), the 
main greenhouse gas. Our target is to reduce these emissions from the 
2006 level to zero by the end of 2009. In 2008 we will also be reviewing 
the environmental impact of companies acquired during 2007. 

We have widened the scope of what we include within the company’s 
greenhouse gas inventory and carried out a review of our data 
collection processes. As a result, we expect the total tonnes of CO2  
we report for 2007 to increase. Based on this, our initial focus is on 
strategies to reduce our greenhouse gas emissions. We will be outlining 
our plans further in our Environmental Review for 2007 which will be 
available in April. 

In addition to our broad objectives, management in our operating 
companies and individual facilities are encouraged to set targets to 
reduce energy use, emissions and other environmental impacts.  

For further information you can read about our environmental policy, 
practices and our progress towards our climate neutral commitment  
at www.pearson.com/environment 

19    Pearson Annual Report and Accounts 2007 

Governance and ethical standards 
We are committed to complying with the standards of corporate 
governance in all countries in which we operate, including UK 
governance rules contained in the Combined Code on Corporate 
Governance. Our Director for people has board responsibility for 
matters relating to Corporate Responsibility. 

We also recognise the additional standards that are expected of us in 
terms of how we conduct our business to ensure we behave and report 
in an open and transparent manner. Pearson has established its own 
code of conduct and whistleblowing policies. These are supported  
by detailed policies on specific issues such as editorial standards and  
we adhere to external codes such as those of the Press Complaints 
Commission. Editors and journalists have freedom to make their own 
content choices within these frameworks. These codes are enforced  
as an integral part of editorial management and are subject to regular 
communication, training, and compliance audits.  

Risk management 
We conduct regular risk reviews to identify risk factors which may 
affect our business and financial performance. Our internal audit 
function reviews these risks with each business, agreeing measures and 
controls to mitigate these risks wherever possible. It is not possible to 
identify every risk that could affect our businesses, and the actions 
taken to mitigate the risks described below cannot provide absolute 
assurance that a risk will not materialise and/or adversely affect our 
business or financial performance. Our principal risks and 
uncertainties are outlined on the following pages. 

Government regulation 
The manufacture of certain of our products in various markets is 
subject to governmental regulation relating to the discharge of 
materials into the environment. Our operations are also subject to  
the risks and uncertainties attendant to doing business in numerous 
countries. Some of the countries in which we conduct these operations 
maintain controls on the repatriation of earnings and capital and 
restrict the means available to us for hedging potential currency 
fluctuation risks. The operations that are affected by these controls, 
however, are not material to us. Accordingly, these regulations have 
not significantly affected our international operations. Regulatory 
authorities may have enforcement powers that could have an impact 
on us. We believe, however, that we have taken and continue to take 
measures to comply with all applicable laws and governmental 
regulations in the jurisdictions where we operate so that the risk  
of these sanctions does not represent a material threat to us. 

Principal risks and uncertainties 
Our intellectual property and proprietary rights may not be adequately 
protected under current laws in some jurisdictions and that may adversely 
affect our results and our ability to grow. 

Our products largely comprise intellectual property delivered through 
a variety of media, including newspapers, books and the internet. We 
rely on trademark, copyright and other intellectual property laws to 
establish and protect our proprietary rights in these products. 

We cannot be sure that our proprietary rights will not be challenged, 
invalidated or circumvented. Our intellectual property rights in 
countries such as the US and UK, jurisdictions covering the largest 
proportion of our operations, are well established. However, we  
also conduct business in other countries where the extent of effective 
legal protection for intellectual property rights is uncertain, and this 
uncertainty could affect our future growth. Moreover, despite 
trademark and copyright protection, third-parties may copy,  
infringe or otherwise profit from our proprietary rights without  
our authorisation. 

Business Review continued 

These unauthorised activities may be more easily facilitated by the 
internet. The lack of internet-specific legislation relating to trademark 
and copyright protection creates an additional challenge for us in 
protecting our proprietary rights relating to our online business 
processes and other digital technology rights. The loss or diminution 
in value of these proprietary rights or our intellectual property could 
have a material adverse effect on our business and financial 
performance. In that regard, Penguin Group (USA) Inc. and Pearson 
Education have joined three other major US publishers in a suit 
brought under the auspices of the Association of American Publishers 
to challenge Google’s plans to copy the full text of all books ever 
published without permission from the publishers or authors. This 
lawsuit seeks to demarcate the extent to which search engines, other 
internet operators and libraries may rely on the fair-use doctrine to 
copy content without authorisation from the copyright proprietors, 
and may give publishers more control over online users of their 
intellectual property. If the lawsuit is unsuccessful, publishers and 
authors may be unable to control copying of their content for 
purposes of online searching, which could have an adverse impact  
on our business and financial performance.  

We seek to mitigate this type of risk through general vigilance, co-
operation with other publishers and trade associations, as well as 
recourse to law as necessary. 

We operate in a highly competitive environment that is subject to rapid 
change and we must continue to invest and adapt to remain competitive.  

Our education, business information and book publishing businesses 
all operate in highly competitive markets, which are constantly 
changing in response to competition, technological innovations and 
other factors. A common trend facing all our businesses is the 
digitisation of content and proliferation of distribution channels,  
either over the internet, or via other electronic means, replacing 
traditional print formats. If we do not adapt rapidly to these changes 
we may lose business to ‘faster’ more ‘agile’ competitors, who 
increasingly are non-traditional competitors, making their 
identification all the more difficult. 

To remain competitive we continue to invest in our authors, products, 
services and people to take advantage of these opportunities. There is 
no guarantee that these investments will generate the anticipated 
returns or protect us from being placed at a competitive disadvantage 
with respect to scale, resources and our ability to develop and  
exploit opportunities. 

Other competitive threats we face at present include: 

–  Students seeking cheaper sources of content, e.g. online, used books 
or re-imported textbooks. To counter this trend we introduced our 
own digital textbook programmes and are providing students with 
a greater choice and customisation of our products. 

–  People: the investments we make in our employees, combined  

with our employment policies and practices, we believe are critical 
factors enabling us to recruit and retain the very best people in our 
business sectors.  

Our US educational textbook and assessment businesses may be adversely 
affected by changes in state educational funding resulting from either 
general economic conditions, changes in government educational funding, 
programmes and legislation (both at the federal and state level), and/or 
changes in the state procurement process. 

The results and growth of our US educational textbook and 
assessment business is dependent on the level of federal and state 
educational funding, which in turn is dependent on the robustness  
of state finances and the level of funding allocated to educational 
programmes. State finances could be adversely affected by a US 
recession and/or fallout from the sub-prime mortgage crisis reducing 
property values and hence state property tax receipts.  

Federal and/or state legislative changes can also affect the funding 
available for educational expenditure, e.g. the No Child Left  
Behind Act.  

Similarly changes in the state procurement process for textbooks, 
learning material and student tests, particularly in the adoptions 
market can also affect our markets. For example, changes in curricula, 
delays in the timing of adoptions and changes in the student testing 
process can all affect these programmes and therefore the size of our 
market in any given year. 

There are multiple competing demands for educational funds and 
there is no guarantee that states will fund new textbooks or testing 
programmes, or that we will win this business. 

Education remains a priority across the US political spectrum.  
Our customer relationship teams have detailed knowledge of each  
state market. We are investing in new and innovative ways to expand 
and combine our product and services to provide a superior customer 
offering when compared to our competitors, thereby reducing our 
reliance on any particular funding stream in the US market. 

Failure to generate anticipated revenue growth, synergies and/or  
cost savings from recent acquisitions leading to goodwill and intangible 
asset impairments. 

We continually acquire and dispose of businesses to achieve our 
strategic objectives. We recently completed two relatively large 
acquisitions, i.e. the Harcourt Assessment and Harcourt Education 
International business for $950m and the acquisition of eCollege for 
$491m. If we are unable to generate the anticipated revenue growth, 
synergies and/or cost savings associated with these acquisitions there is 
a risk the goodwill and intangible assets acquired (estimated at £430m) 
could be impaired in future years.  

–  Competition from major publishers and other educational material 
and service providers, including not for profit organisations, in our 
US educational textbook and assessment businesses. 

We generate a substantial proportion of our revenue in foreign currencies, 
particularly the US dollar, and foreign exchange rate fluctuations could 
adversely affect our earnings and the strength of our balance sheet. 

–  Penguin: authors’ advances in consumer publishing. We compete 
with other publishing businesses to purchase the rights to author 
manuscripts. Our competitors may bid to a level at which we could 
not generate a sufficient return on our investment, and so, typically, 
we would not purchase these rights.  

–  FT: we face competitive threats both from large media players  
as well as from smaller businesses, online portals and news 
redistributors operating in the digital arena and providing 
alternative sources of news and information.  

As with any international business our earnings can be materially 
affected by exchange rate movements. We are particularly exposed to 
movements in the US dollar to sterling exchange rate as approximately 
60% of our revenue is generated in US dollars. We estimate that if 
2006 average rates had prevailed in 2007, sales for 2007 would have 
been £228m or 6% higher.  

This is predominantly a currency translation risk (i.e. non-cash flow 
item), and not a trading risk (i.e. cash flow item) as our currency 
trading flows are relatively limited.  

20    Pearson Annual Report and Accounts 2007 

Pearson generates about 60% of its sales in the US and each 5¢ change 
in the average £:$ exchange rate for the full year (which in 2007 was 
£1:$2.00) would have an impact of 1p on adjusted earnings per share. 

We estimate that a 5¢ change in the closing exchange rate between  
the US dollar and sterling in any year could affect our reported 
adjusted earnings per share by 1p and shareholders’ funds by 
approximately £55m. 

The Group’s policy on managing foreign currency risk is described  
on page 24. 

Other risks 
Our newspaper businesses may be adversely affected by reductions in 
advertising revenues and/or circulation either because of competing news 
information distribution channels, particularly online and digital formats, 
or due to weak general economic conditions. 

Changes in consumer purchasing habits, as readers look to alternative 
sources and/or providers of information, such as the internet and 
other digital formats, may change the way we distribute our content. 
We might see a decline in print circulation in our more mature 
markets as readership habits change and readers migrate online, 
although we see further opportunities for growth in our less mature 
markets outside Europe. If the migration of readers to new digital 
formats occurs more quickly than we expect, this is likely to affect  
print advertising spend by our customers, adversely affecting  
our profitability. 

Our newspaper businesses are highly geared and remain dependent on 
print advertising revenue; relatively small changes in revenue, positive 
or negative, have a disproportionate affect on profitability; therefore 
any downturn in corporate and financial advertising spend would 
negatively impact our results. 

The diversification of the FT Group into other business models  
and revenue streams, e.g. subscription based businesses, higher 
proportion of digital revenues, increased business to business 
products, conferences and its global reach, goes some way to  
offsetting reliance on newspaper print advertising.  

These businesses are characterised by multi-million pound contracts 
spread over several years. As in any contracting business, there  
are inherent risks associated with the bidding process, start-up, 
operational performance and contract compliance (including penalty 
clauses) which could adversely affect our financial performance and/or 
reputation. Failure to retain contracts at the end of the contract term 
could adversely impact our future revenue growth.  

At Edexcel, our UK examination board and testing business, any 
change in UK Government policy to examination marking – for 
example, introduction of new qualifications - could have a significant 
impact on our present business model.  

In addition to the internal business procedures and controls 
implemented to ensure we successfully deliver on our contractual 
commitments, we also seek to develop and maintain good 
relationships with our customers, whether they are commercial or 
governmental. We also look to diversify our portfolio to minimise 
reliance on any single contract. 

At Penguin, changes in product distribution channels, increased book 
returns and/or customer bankruptcy may restrict our ability to grow and 
affect our profitability. 

New distribution channels, e.g. digital format, the internet, used books, 
combined with the concentration of retailer power pose multiple 
threats (and opportunities) to our traditional consumer publishing 
models, potentially impacting both sales volumes and pricing.  

Penguin’s financial performance can also be negatively affected if book 
return rates increase above historical average levels. Similarly, the 
bankruptcy of a major retail customer would disrupt short-term 
product supply to the market as well as result in a large debt write off. 

We develop new distribution channels wherever possible by adapting 
our product offering and investing in new formats. We take steps to 
challenge illegal distribution sources. To minimise returns we are 
careful about how we supply orders, taking account of expected sell 
through. The application of strict credit control policies is used to 
monitor customer debt. 

A control breakdown in our school assessment businesses could result  
in financial loss and reputational damage. 

We operate in markets which are dependent on information technology 
(IT) systems and technological change. 

There are inherent risks associated with our school assessment 
businesses, both in the US and UK. A breakdown in our testing and 
assessment products and processes could lead to a mis-grading of 
student tests and/or late delivery of test results to students and their 
schools. In either event we may be subject to legal claims, penalty 
charges under our contracts, non-renewal of contracts and/or the 
suspension or withdrawal of our accreditation to conduct tests.  
It is also probable that such events would result in adverse publicity, 
which may affect our ability to retain existing contracts and/or obtain 
new customers. 

Our robust testing procedures and controls, combined with  
our investment in technology, project management and skills 
development of our people minimise the risk of a breakdown  
in our student marking. 

Our professional services and school assessment businesses involve complex 
contractual relationships with both government agencies and commercial 
customers for the provision of various testing services. Our financial 
results, growth prospects and/or reputation may be adversely affected if 
these contracts and relationships are not properly managed. 

All our businesses, to a greater or lesser extent, are dependent on 
technology. We either provide software and/or internet services to our 
customers or we use complex IT systems and products to support our 
business activities, particularly in business information publishing, 
back-office processing and infrastructure. 

We face several technological risks associated with software product 
development and service delivery in our educational businesses, 
information technology security (including virus and hacker attacks), 
e-commerce, enterprise resource planning system implementations 
and upgrades. The failure to recruit and retain staff with relevant skills 
may constrain our ability to grow as we combine traditional 
publishing products with online and service offerings.  

We mitigate these IT risks by employing project management 
techniques to manage new software developments and/or system 
implementations and have implemented an array of security measures 
to protect our IT assets from attack.  

Reputational damage to our brands and financial loss arising from a 
major data privacy breach. 

Across our businesses we hold increasingly large volumes of personal 
data including that of employees, customers and, in our assessment 
businesses, citizens. Failure to adequately protect personal data  
could lead to penalties, significant remediation costs and/or 
reputational damage.  

21    Pearson Annual Report and Accounts 2007 

Business Review continued 

The protection of personal data and compliance with data privacy 
legislation has always been a considered a business risk. We have 
recently re-evaluated our data security procedures and controls across 
all our businesses with the aim of ensuring personal data is secured  
and we comply with relevant legislation.  

Operational disruption to our business caused by a major disaster and/or 
external threats restricting our ability to supply products and services to 
our customers. 

Across all our businesses we manage complex operational and 
logistical arrangements including distribution centres, data centres and 
large office facilities as well as relationships with third party print-sites. 
Failure to recover from a major disaster, e.g. fire, flood etc, at a key 
facility or the disruption of supply from a key third-party vendor could 
restrict our ability to service our customers. Similarly external threats, 
such as avian flu, terrorist attacks, strikes etc, could all affect our 
business and employees, disrupting our daily business activities.  

We have developed business continuity arrangements, including IT 
disaster recovery plans and back-up delivery systems, to minimise any 
business disruption in the event of a major disaster. However, despite 
regular updates and testing of these plans there is no guarantee that 
our financial performance will not be adversely affected in the event  
of a major disaster and/or external threat to our business. Insurance 
coverage may minimise any losses in certain circumstances.  

Investment returns outside our traditional core US and UK markets may 
be lower than anticipated.  

To minimise dependence on our core markets, particularly the US,  
we are seeking growth opportunities outside these markets, building 
on our existing substantial international presence. Certain markets we 
may target for growth are inherently more risky than our traditional 
markets. Political, economic, currency and corporate governance  
risks (including fraud) as well as unmanaged expansion are all  
factors which could limit our returns on investments made in these 
non-traditional markets.  

We draw on our experience of developing businesses outside our  
core markets and our existing international infrastructure to manage 
specific country risks, as well as expanding our financial control 
resources in those areas. The diversification of our international 
portfolio, and relative size of ‘emerging markets’ in relation to the 
group, further minimises the effect any one territory could have on  
the overall group results. 

Our reported earnings and cash flows may be adversely affected by 
changes in our pension costs and funding requirements. 

We operate a number of pension plans throughout the world, the 
principal ones being in the UK and US. The major plans are self-
administered with the plans’ assets held independently of the Group. 
Regular valuations, conducted by independent qualified actuaries,  
are used to determine pension costs and funding requirements. 

It is our policy to ensure that each pension plan is adequately funded, 
over time, to meet its ongoing and future liabilities. Our earnings and 
cash flows may be adversely affected by the need to provide additional 
funding to eliminate pension fund deficits in our defined benefit plans. 
Our greatest exposure relates to our UK defined benefit pension plan. 
Pension fund deficits may arise because of inadequate investment 
returns, increased member life expectancy, changes in actuarial 
assumptions and changes in pension regulations, including accounting 
rules and minimum funding requirements. 

The latest valuation of our UK defined benefit pension plan has  
been completed and future funding arrangements have been agreed 
between the company and the pension fund Trustee. Additional 
payments amounting to £100m were made by the company in 2007. 
We review these arrangements every three years and are confident  
that the pension funding plans are sufficient to meet future liabilities 
without unduly affecting the development of the company. 

Changes in our tax position can significantly affect our reported earnings 
and cash flows. 

Changes in corporate tax rates and/or other relevant tax laws in the UK 
and/or the US could have a material impact on our future reported tax 
rate and/or our future tax payments. 

We have internal tax professionals in the UK and US who review all 
significant arrangements around the world and respond to changes in 
tax legislation. They work closely with local management and external 
tax advisers. 

Social, environmental and ethical risk  
We consider social, environmental and ethical (SEE) risks no 
differently to the way we manage any other business risk. Our 2007 
risk assessments did not identify any significant under-managed SEE 
risks, nor have any of our most important SEE risks, many concerned 
with reputational risk, changed year on year. These are: 

–  Journalistic/author integrity  

–  Ethical business behaviour  

–  Compliance with UN Global Compact principles on labour 
standards, human rights, environment and anti-corruption  

–  Environmental impact 

–  People  

Our risk reporting systems together with our approach to managing 
the key SEE risks above are described in ‘Our Business and Society’, the 
Pearson Corporate Responsibility Report. The web link is available at 
www.pearson.com/community/csr_report2007 

Financial risk management 
This section explains the Group’s approach to the management  
of financial risk. 

Treasury policy  
The Group holds financial instruments for two principal purposes:  
to finance its operations and to manage the interest rate and currency 
risks arising from its operations and its sources of finance. The Group 
finances its operations by a mixture of cash flows from operations, 
short-term borrowings from banks and commercial paper markets, 
and longer term loans from banks and capital markets. The Group 
borrows principally in US dollars and sterling, at both floating  
and fixed rates of interest, using derivative financial instruments 
(‘derivatives’), where appropriate, to generate the desired effective 
currency profile and interest rate basis. The derivatives used for this 
purpose are principally rate swaps, rate caps and collars, currency rate 
swaps and forward foreign exchange contracts.  

The main risks arising from the Group’s financial instruments are 
interest rate risk, liquidity and refinancing risk, counterparty risk and 
foreign currency risk. These risks are managed by the Chief financial 
officer under policies approved by the board, which are summarised 
below. All the treasury policies remained unchanged throughout 2007. 
The audit committee and a group of external treasury advisers, receives 
reports on the Group’s treasury activities, policies and procedures.  
The treasury department is not a profit centre and its activities are 
subject to regular internal audit. 

22    Pearson Annual Report and Accounts 2007 

Interest rate risk management 
The Group’s exposure to interest rate fluctuations on its borrowings  
is managed by borrowing on a fixed rate basis and by entering into  
rate swaps, rate caps and forward rate agreements. The Group’s policy 
objective has continued to be to set a target proportion of its forecast 
borrowings (taken at the year end, with cash netted against floating 
rate debt and before any adjustments for IFRS) to be hedged (i.e.  
fixed or capped at the year end) over the next four years, subject to  
a maximum of 65% and a minimum that starts at 40% and falls by 
10% at each year end. At the end of 2007 the hedging ratio, on the 
above basis, was approximately 58%. A simultaneous 1% change on  
1 January in the Group’s variable interest rates in each of US dollar, 
euro and sterling, taking into account forecast seasonal debt, would 
have a £6m effect on profit before tax.  

Use of interest rate derivatives  
The policy in the section above creates a group of derivatives, under 
which the Group is a payer of fixed rates and a receiver of floating 
rates. The Group also aims to avoid undue exposure to a single interest 
rate setting. Reflecting this objective, the Group has swapped its fixed 
rate bond issues to floating rate at their launch. This creates a second 
group of derivatives, under which the Group is a receiver of fixed rates 
and a payer of floating rates. 

The Group’s accounting objective in its use of interest rate derivatives 
is to minimise the impact on the income statement of changes in the 
mark-to-market value of its derivative portfolio as a whole. It uses 
duration calculations to estimate the sensitivity of the derivatives to 
movements in market rates. The Group also identifies which 
derivatives are eligible for fair value hedge accounting (which reduces 
sharply the income statement impact of changes in the market value of 
a derivative). The Group then balances the total portfolio between 
hedge-accounted and pooled segments, so that the expected 
movement on the pooled segment is minimal. 

Interest rate derivative sensitivity analysis 
The following sensitivity analysis of derivative financial instruments to 
interest rate movements is based on the assumption of a 1% change in 
interest rates for all currencies and maturities, with all other variables 
held constant. 

Liquidity and refinancing risk management 
The Group’s objective is to secure continuity of funding at a 
reasonable cost. To do this it seeks to arrange committed funding for  
a variety of maturities from a diversity of sources. The Group’s policy 
objective has been that the weighted average maturity of its core gross 
borrowings (treating short-term advances as having the final maturity 
of the facilities available to refinance them) should be between three 
and ten years. At the end of 2007 the average maturity of gross 
borrowings was 4.6 years of which bonds represented 72% of these 
borrowings (up from 4.5 years and down from 90% respectively at  
the beginning of the year).  

The Group believes that ready access to different funding markets also 
helps to reduce its liquidity risk, and that published credit ratings and 
published financial policies improve such access. All of the Group’s 
credit ratings remained unchanged during the year. The long-term 
ratings are Baa1 from Moody’s and BBB+ from Standard & Poor’s, 
and the short-term ratings are P2 and A2 respectively.  

The Group’s policy is to strive to maintain a rating of Baa1/BBB+ over 
the long term. The Group will also continue to use internally a range  
of ratios to monitor and manage its finances. These include interest 
cover, net debt to operating profit and cash flow to debt measures.  
The Group also maintains undrawn committed borrowing facilities. 
During the year the Group extended the maturity date of its main 
revolving credit facility by one year and entered into a short-term 
bridge financing facility. At the end of 2007 the committed facilities 
amounted to £1,369m and their weighted average maturity was  
3.2 years. 

Analysis of group debt, including the impact of derivatives 
The following tables analyse the Group’s sources of funding and  
the impact of derivatives on the Group’s debt instruments. 

Net borrowings fixed and floating rate stated after the impact of  
rate derivatives: 
£ millions 

2007 

Fixed rate 

Floating rate 

Total 

Net carrying 
amount 

+1% change 

–1% change 

Gross borrowings: 
£ millions 

2007 

10  

(1) 

17  

9  

35  

1 

– 

– 

(23)

(24)

26 

Bank debt 

Bonds 

(1)

Total 

– 

– 

25 

£ millions 

US dollar 

Sterling 

Net carrying 
amount 

+1% change 

–1% change 

Total 

2006 

Euro 

Gross borrowings by currency: 

567 

406 

973 

2007 

458 

1,150 

1,608 

2006 

514 

545 

1,059 

2006 

177 

1,566 

1,743 

As reported 

1,251 

357 

– 

1,608 

Currency 
derivatives 

150 

(150) 

– 

– 

2007 

2006 

Combined 

1,401 

207 

– 

1,253 

206 

284 

1,608 

1,743 

3 

7 

40 

17 

67 

(28)

1 

– 

(1)

(28)

31 

(1) 

– 

1 

31 

Financial counterparty risk management  
The Group’s risk of loss on deposits or derivative contracts with 
individual banks is managed in part through the use of counterparty 
limits. These limits, which take published credit limits (among other 
things) into account, are approved by the Chief financial officer within 
guidelines approved by the board. In addition, prior to their maturity 
in February 2007, for a currency rate swap that transformed a major 
part of the 6.125% Euro Bonds due 2007 into a US dollar liability, the 
Group entered into a mark-to-market agreement which significantly 
reduced the counterparty risk of that rate swap transaction. 

£ millions 

Interest rate derivatives – in a fair value 
hedge relationship 

Interest rate derivatives – not in hedge 
relationship 
Cross currency rate derivatives – in a net 
investment hedge relationship 

Cross currency rate derivatives – not in 
hedge relationship 

Total 

£ millions 

Interest rate derivatives – in a fair value 
hedge relationship 

Interest rate derivatives – not in hedge 
relationship 

Cross currency rate derivatives – in a net 
investment hedge relationship 

Cross currency rate derivatives – not in 
hedge relationship 

Total 

23    Pearson Annual Report and Accounts 2007 

 
 
 
 
 
 
Carrying 
value 

Impact of 1% 
increase in 
interest rates 

Impact of 1% 
decrease in 
interest rates 

2006 

Impact of 
10% 
strengthening
in sterling 

Impact of 
10% 
weakening in 
sterling 

17 

592 

25 

67 

(1,566)

(177)

425 

(617)

– 

– 

– 

(28) 

28 

– 

– 

– 

– 

– 

– 

31 

(31) 

– 

– 

– 

(1)

(38)

(2)

8 

108 

16 

1 

46 

2 

(10)

(132)

(19)

(31)

38 

60 

(74)

All amounts in £ millions 

Investments in 
unlisted securities 

Cash and cash 
equivalents 

Marketable 
securities 

Derivative financial 
instruments 

Bonds 

Other borrowings 

Other net financial 
assets 

Total financial 
instruments 

The table shows the sensitivities of the fair values of each class of 
financial instruments to an isolated change in either interest rates or 
foreign exchange rates. The class ‘Other net financial assets’ comprises 
trade assets less trade liabilities. 

The sensitivities of derivative instruments are calculated using 
established estimation techniques such as discounted cash flow and 
option valuation models. 

A large proportion of the movements shown above would impact 
equity rather than the income statement, depending on the location 
and functional currency of the entity in which they arise and the 
availability of net investment hedge treatment. 

The changes in valuations are estimates of the impact of changes in 
market variables and are not a prediction of future events or 
anticipated gains or losses. 

Robin Freestone, Chief financial officer 

Business Review continued 

Foreign currency risk management  
Although the Group is based in the UK, it has its most significant 
investment in overseas operations. The most significant currency  
for the Group is the US dollar. The Group’s policy on routine 
transactional conversions between currencies (for example, the 
collection of receivables, and the settlement of payables or interest) 
remains that these should be transacted at the relevant spot exchange 
rate. The majority of our operations are domestic within their country 
of operation. No unremitted profits are hedged with foreign exchange 
contracts, as the company judges it inappropriate to hedge non-cash 
flow translational exposure with cash flow instruments. However, the 
Group does seek to create a natural hedge of this exposure through its 
policy of aligning approximately the currency composition of its core 
net borrowings with its forecast operating profit before depreciation 
and amortisation. This policy aims to dampen the impact of changes 
in foreign exchange rates on consolidated interest cover and earnings. 

The policy above applies only to currencies that account for more than 
15% of Group operating profit before depreciation and amortisation, 
which currently is only the US dollar. However, the Group still 
borrows small amounts in other currencies, typically for seasonal 
working capital needs. In addition, the Group currently expects to 
hold legacy borrowings in sterling to their maturity dates: our policy 
does not require existing currency debt to be terminated to match 
declines in that currency’s share of Group operating profit before 
depreciation and amortisation. Included within year end net debt, the 
net borrowings/(cash) in the two principal currencies above (taking 
into account the effect of cross currency swaps) were: US dollar 
£1,119m and sterling £45m.  

Use of currency debt and currency derivatives  
The Group uses both currency denominated debt and derivative 
instruments to implement the above policy. Its intention is that 
gains/losses on the derivatives and debt offset the losses/gains on the 
foreign currency assets and income. Each quarter the value of hedging 
instruments is monitored against the assets in the relevant currency 
and, where practical, a decision is made whether to treat the debt or 
derivative as a net investment hedge (permitting foreign exchange 
movements on it to be taken to reserves) for the purposes of IAS 39. 

Financial instruments – sensitivity analysis 
The sensitivity of the Group’s financial instruments to fluctuations  
in interest rates and exchange rates is as follows: 

Carrying 
value 

Impact of 1% 
increase in 
interest rates 

Impact of 1% 
decrease in 
interest rates 

2007 

Impact of 
10% 
strengthening
in sterling 

Impact of 
10% 
weakening in 
sterling 

52 

560 

40 

35 

(1,150) 

(458) 

408 

(513) 

– 

– 

– 

(23) 

24 

– 

– 

1 

– 

– 

– 

25 

(26) 

– 

– 

(4) 

(36) 

(3) 

11 

71 

42 

5 

44 

4 

(13)

(87)

(51)

(29) 

35 

(1) 

52 

(63)

All amounts in £ millions 

Investments in 
unlisted securities 

Cash and cash 
equivalents 

Marketable 
securities 

Derivative financial 
instruments 

Bonds 

Other borrowings 

Other net financial 
assets 

Total financial 
instruments 

24    Pearson Annual Report and Accounts 2007 

 
 
 
 
Board of Directors 

Chairman 
Glen Moreno,†(cid:129) chairman, aged 64, was appointed chairman of 
Pearson on 1 October 2005. He is the senior independent director  
of Man Group plc and a director of Fidelity International Limited. 

Executive directors 
Marjorie Scardino,(cid:129) chief executive, aged 61, joined the Pearson board 
in January 1997. She trained and practised as a lawyer, and was chief 
executive of The Economist Group from 1993 until joining Pearson. 
She is also a non-executive director of Nokia Corporation and a 
director of several charitable organisations. 

David Bell, director for people, aged 61, became a director of Pearson 
in March 1996. In 1998 he was appointed Pearson’s director for people 
with responsibility for finding, keeping, rewarding and inspiring our 
employees. He is chairman of the Financial Times and Sadler’s Wells 
Theatre. He is also chairman of Crisis, a charity for the homeless and 
The Institute for War and Peace Reporting. 

Rona Fairhead, chairman and chief executive of The Financial Times 
Group, aged 46, joined the Pearson board in June 2002 as chief 
financial officer. She was appointed chief executive of The Financial 
Times Group in June 2006. From 1996 until 2001, she worked at ICI, 
where she served as executive vice president, group control and 
strategy. She is also chairman of Interactive Data, a non-executive 
director of HSBC Holdings plc and chairs the HSBC audit committee. 

Robin Freestone, chief financial officer, aged 49, joined Pearson in 
2004 as deputy chief financial officer and became chief financial  
officer in June 2006, when he also joined the Pearson board. He was 
previously group financial controller of Amersham plc (now part of 
GE), having joined Amersham as chief financial officer of their health 
business in 2000. Prior to that he held a number of senior financial 
positions with ICI, Zeneca and Henkel. He is also a non-executive 
director and founder shareholder in eChem Limited. 

John Makinson, chairman and chief executive of The Penguin Group, 
aged 53, joined the Pearson board in March 1996 and was finance 
director until June 2002. He was appointed chairman of The Penguin 
Group in May 2001. He is also chairman of the Institute of Public 
Policy Research and a director of The International Rescue  
Committee (UK). 

Non-executive directors 
David Arculus,*†(cid:129) aged 61, is a non-executive director of Telefónica SA 
and was previously chairman of O2 plc from 2004 until it was acquired 
by Telefónica at the beginning of 2006. His previous roles include 
chairman of Severn Trent plc and IPC Group, chief operating officer 
of United Business Media plc and group managing director of EMAP 
plc. He became a non-executive director of Pearson in February 2006. 

Terry Burns,†(cid:129) aged 63, has been chairman of Marks and Spencer 
Group plc since July 2006, having previously been deputy chairman 
from October 2005. He is chairman of Abbey National plc and a non-
executive director of Banco Santander Central Hispano. He is also 
chairman of Glas Cymru Limited. He was the UK government’s chief 
economic adviser from 1980 until 1991 and Permanent Secretary  
of HM Treasury from 1991 until 1998. He was appointed a non-
executive director of Pearson in May 1999 and senior independent 
director in February 2004. 

Patrick Cescau,*(cid:129) aged 59, is group chief executive of Unilever.  
He became a non-executive director of Pearson in April 2002. 

Susan Fuhrman,*(cid:129) aged 63, is president of Teachers College at 
Columbia University, America’s oldest and largest graduate school  
of education. She was previously dean of the Graduate School of 
Education at the University of Pennsylvania. She is a member of the 
Board of Trustees of the Carnegie Foundation for the Advancement  
of Teaching and an officer of the National Academy of Education.  
She became a non-executive director of Pearson in July 2004. 

Ken Hydon,*(cid:129) aged 63, is a non-executive director of Tesco plc,  
Reckitt Benckiser plc and Royal Berks NHS Foundation Trust. He was 
previously financial director of Vodafone Group plc and subsidiaries 
of Racal Electronics. He became a non-executive director of Pearson  
in February 2006. 

*  A member of the audit committee.  
†  A member of the personnel committee. 
(cid:129)  A member of the nomination committee. 

25    Pearson Annual Report and Accounts 2007 

Directors’ Report 

The directors are pleased to present their report to shareholders, 
together with the financial statements for the year ended 31 December 
2007 on pages 50 to 52 and 54 to 101 respectively. Details of the 
businesses, the development of the Group and its subsidiaries and 
likely future developments are given on pages 1 to 24. Sales and  
profits of the different sectors and geographical markets are given  
on pages 59 to 61. 

Pearson also made a number of other smaller acquisitions during  
the year, mainly within the FT Group. Net consideration paid for all 
acquisitions during the year ended 31 December 2007 was £472m  
and provisional goodwill recognised was £304m. 

In total the acquisitions made in 2007 contributed an additional £90m 
of sales and £13m of operating profit. 

Principal business activities 
Pearson is an international media company with market-leading 
businesses in education, business information and consumer 
publishing. With more than 32,000 employees based in 
 countries, 
we are a large family of businesses focused on making the reading and 
learning experience as enjoyable and as beneficial as it can possibly be. 

60

Results and dividend 
The profit for the financial year ended 31 December 2007 was £310m 
(2006: £469m) and has been transferred to reserves. A final dividend  
of 20.5p per share is recommended for the year ended 31 December 
2007. This, together with the interim dividend already paid, makes a 
total for the year of 31.6p (2006: 29.3p). The final dividend will be paid 
on 9 May 2008 to shareholders on the register at close of business on 
11 April 2008, the record date. 

Business review 
The chairman’s statement and chief executive’s review on pages 2 to 6, 
report on the development and performance of the Group during the 
year ended 31 December 2007 and our likely future development.  
The elements covered in these reports are required by the business 
review and are incorporated into the directors’ report by reference. 
The business review itself can be found on pages 8 to 24.  

Significant acquisitions and disposals 
During the year, Pearson announced the acquisition of Harcourt 
Assessment and Harcourt Education International from Reed Elsevier 
for $950m in cash. Harcourt Assessment has an extensive catalogue  
of high quality research-based education and clinical assessment 
products for children and adults. In international education, Harcourt 
publishes textbooks and online learning materials for teachers and 
students in primary and secondary schools and the vocational market. 
The Harcourt Education International acquisition was completed in 
stages during 2007 and the Harcourt Assessment acquisition was 
completed in January 2008.  

In July 2007, Pearson completed the acquisition of eCollege, a leading 
provider of eLearning and enrollment services to post-secondary 
education, for $491m in cash. 

On 15 February 2007, Pearson completed its sale of Government 
Solutions and on 24 December 2007, the Group sold Les Echos to 
LVMH for €240m. 

Transactions with related parties 
Details of transactions with related parties, which are reportable under 
IAS 24 ‘Related party disclosures’, are given in note 35 to the accounts 
on page 94. 

Capital expenditure 
The analysis of capital expenditure and details of capital commitments 
are shown in notes 10, 11 and 34 to the accounts on pages 68 to 70  
and 94. 

Events after the balance sheet date 
On 2 January 2008, the Group completed its acquisition of Money-
Media a US-based company offering online news and commentary  
for the money management industry. 

On 30 January 2008, the Group completed its acquisition of Harcourt 
Assessment from Reed Elsevier, after receiving clearance from the  
US Department of Justice.  

Also on 30 January 2008 the Group announced that it had agreed to 
sell its 50% interest in Financial Times Deutschland to its joint venture 
partner, Gruner + Jahr. 

On 22 February 2008, the Group completed the sale of its Data 
Management business to M & F Worldwide Corp. for $225m. 

Directors 
The present members of the board, together with their biographical 
details, are shown on page 25. Details of directors’ remuneration, 
interests and dealings in ordinary shares and options of the company 
are contained in the report on directors’ remuneration on pages 35  
to 49.  

Four directors, Terry Burns, Ken Hydon, Glen Moreno and Marjorie 
Scardino will retire by rotation at the forthcoming annual general 
meeting (AGM) on 25 April 2008. All of them, being eligible, will  
offer themselves for re-election.  

Details of directors’ service contracts can be found on page 42.  
No director was materially interested in any contract of significance to 
the company’s business. 

26    Pearson Annual Report and Accounts 2007 

Corporate governance 
Introduction  
A detailed account of how we comply with the provisions of the 2006 
Combined Code on Corporate Governance (the Code) can be found 
on our website at www.pearson.com/investor/corpgov.htm 

The board believes that we are in full compliance with the Code  
with one exception: since the resignation of Rana Talwar last April,  
our personnel committee is made up of only two independent  
non-executive directors and the chairman. The board is aware of  
this issue and intends to appoint an additional independent director  
in due course. 

Composition of the board  
The board consists of the chairman, Glen Moreno, five executive 
directors including the chief executive, Marjorie Scardino, and five 
independent non-executive directors.  

Senior independent director  
Terry Burns was appointed as our senior independent director in 2004. 
His role includes being available to shareholders if they should have 
concerns that have not been addressed through the normal channels, 
and attending meetings with shareholders in order to gain a balanced  

understanding of what those concerns might be. The senior 
independent director also meets with the non-executive directors at 
least once a year in order to appraise the performance of the chairman, 
and would be expected to chair the nomination committee on those 
occasions when it is considering succession to the role of chairman of 
the board. 

Independence of directors  
The board considers all of the non-executive directors to be 
independent. Particular consideration was given to the assessment of 
Terry Burns’ independence since he has now served on the board for 
almost nine years. Terry has been asked by the chairman to remain  
on the board because of his experience, knowledge and effectiveness  
as a non-executive director and he has indicated that he is willing to 
stand for re-election as a director of the company on an annual basis. 
A resolution for his re-election will be proposed at the forthcoming 
AGM. The board believes that it is in shareholders’ interests for Terry 
Burns to be re-elected as an independent non-executive director of the 
company. They believe that he continues to challenge rigorously the 
executive directors, the board and the committees on which he sits  
and brings a wealth of useful experience both in his position as a  
non-executive director and as the senior independent director.

Board meetings 
The board meets six times a year and at other times as appropriate. The following table sets out the attendance of our directors at the board and 
committee meetings during 2007: 

Board 
meetings 
(maximum 6) 

Audit 
committee 
meetings 
(maximum 4) 

Personnel
committee
meetings
(maximum 5) 

Nomination
committee
meetings
(maximum 2) 

6/6 

6/6 

5/6 

6/6 

6/6 

6/6 

6/6 

6/6 

6/6 

6/6 
6/6 

1/2 

– 

– 

– 

– 

– 

– 

4/4 

– 

4/4 

4/4 
4/4 

– 

5/5 

– 

– 

– 

– 

– 

5/5 

5/5 

– 

– 
– 

2/2 

2/2 

2/2 

– 

– 

– 

– 

2/2 

2/2 

2/2 

2/2 
2/2 

1/2 

Chairman 
Glen Moreno 

Executive directors 
Marjorie Scardino 

David Bell 

Rona Fairhead 

Robin Freestone 

John Makinson 

Non-executive directors 
David Arculus 

Terry Burns 

Patrick Cescau 

Susan Fuhrman 
Ken Hydon 
Rana Talwar1 

1 Resigned on 30 April 2007 

27    Pearson Annual Report and Accounts 2007 

 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
Directors’ Report continued 

The role and business of the board  
The formal matters reserved for the board’s decision and approval 
include: the company’s strategy and reviewing performance against it; 
major changes to the company’s corporate structure; approval of all 
shareholder documents; acquisitions, disposals and capital expenditure 
projects above certain thresholds; all guarantees over £10m; treasury 
policies; the interim and final dividends and the financial statements; 
borrowing powers; ensuring adequate succession planning for the 
board and senior management; appointments to the board; and the 
appointment and removal of the company secretary. 

The board receives timely, regular and necessary management and 
other information to fulfil its duties. Directors can obtain independent 
professional advice at the company’s expense in the performance of 
their duties as directors. All directors have access to the advice and 
services of the company secretary. 

In addition to these formal roles, we endeavour to give the non-
executive directors access to the senior managers of the business via 
involvement at both formal and informal meetings. In this way we 
hope that the experience and expertise of the non-executive directors 
can be garnered to the benefit of the company. At the same time, the 
non-executive directors develop an understanding of the abilities of 
the most senior managers which will help them judge the company’s 
prospects and plans for succession. 

Board evaluation 
Following the chairman’s review of the effectiveness of our board  
and of the board committees, as described last year, the board 
identified four areas where it could most effectively contribute to the 
company’s success: strategy, governance, operating effectiveness and 
management succession. 

The board cycle was adapted to ensure that at least one board meeting 
per year is primarily devoted to each of these themes, with significant 
time for thorough review and discussion.  

In addition, the chairman asked the deputy secretary to meet with each 
of the directors to gather their views on the level of support they felt 
they were receiving as board directors. The deputy secretary duly met 
with each of the directors and asked for feedback on a number of 
matters, including the Pearson induction programme, their ongoing 
training needs, the logistical support they receive and their thoughts  
on the process for board and committee meetings. Following this 
review a paper was tabled at a subsequent board meeting which set  
out the findings from these one to one sessions and detailed what the 
company planned to do to address some of the concerns that were 
expressed. As a result of this review a number of actions have been 
taken, including making changes to the balance of board meetings  
held outside of the UK and deciding on the process for the next  
board evaluation. 

In early 2008 the chairman asked the directors to complete an 
evaluation questionnaire on the board and each of its committees. 
Responses will be gathered and communicated to the board at a 
forthcoming meeting. 

During the course of the year the executive directors were evaluated  
by the chief executive on their performance against personal objectives 
under the company’s standard appraisal mechanism. The chairman 
leads the assessment of the chief executive and the senior independent 
director conducts a review of the chairman’s performance. 

Directors’ training  
Directors receive a significant induction programme and a range  
of information about the company when they join the board.  
This includes background information on Pearson and details of 
board procedures, directors’ responsibilities and various governance-
related issues, including procedures for dealing in Pearson shares and 
their legal obligations as directors. The induction also includes a series 
of meetings with members of the board, presentations regarding the 
business from senior executives and a briefing on Pearson’s investor 
relations programme. We supplement the existing directors’ training 
programme through continuing presentations about the company’s 
operations at board meetings and by making available to the directors 
the opportunity for additional visits to operating company divisions  
as well as meetings with local management. Externally run courses are 
also made available should directors wish to make use of them. 

Directors’ indemnities  
The company grants an indemnity to all of its directors in accordance 
with section 232 of the Companies Act 2006 in relation to costs 
incurred by them in defending any civil or criminal proceedings and in 
connection with an application for relief under section 144(3) or (4) or 
section 727 of the Companies Act 1985, so long as it is repaid not later 
than when the outcome becomes final if: i) they are convicted in the 
proceedings; ii) judgement is given against them; or iii) the court 
refuses to grant the relief sought. 

The company has purchased and maintains directors’ and officers’ 
insurance cover against certain legal liabilities and costs for claims in 
connection with any act or omission by such directors and officers in 
the execution of their duties. 

Dialogue with institutional shareholders  
There is an extensive programme for the chairman, CEO, executive 
directors and senior managers to meet with institutional shareholders. 
The non-executive directors meet informally with shareholders both 
before and after the AGM, and respond to shareholder queries and 
requests. The chairman and senior independent director make 
themselves available to meet any significant shareholder as required. 
Makinson Cowell reports to the board on the results of an extensive 
survey on major shareholders’ views. 

Furthermore, reports on changes in shareholder positions and views 
are given to the board at every board meeting. 

28    Pearson Annual Report and Accounts 2007 

Board committees 
The board has established three committees: the audit committee,  
the personnel committee and the nomination committee. Chairmen 
and members of these committees are appointed by the board on the 
recommendation (where appropriate) of the nomination committee 
and in consultation with each requisite committee chairman. 

i Audit committee  
The audit committee comprises Ken Hydon (chairman), David 
Arculus, Patrick Cescau and Susan Fuhrman. 

All of the committee members are independent non-executive 
directors and have financial and/or related business experience due to 
the senior positions they hold or held in other listed or publicly traded 
companies and/or similar public organisations. Ken Hydon is our 
designated financial expert. 

The committee has written terms of reference which clearly set out  
its authority and duties. These are reviewed annually and can be found 
on the company website at www.pearson.com/investor/corpgov.htm 

The committee has been established by the board primarily for the 
purpose of overseeing the accounting and financial reporting processes 
of the company and audits of the financial statements of the company.  

The committee is responsible for assisting the board’s oversight of  
the quality and integrity of the company’s external financial reporting 
and statements and the company’s accounting policies and practices. 
The Group’s internal and external auditors have direct access to the 
committee to raise any matter of concern and to report on the results 
of work directed by the committee. The committee reports to the full 
board on a regular basis. It also reviews the objectivity of the external 
auditors, including services supplied, and ensures that there is an 
appropriate audit relationship. 

–  Reports on the activities of the internal audit function, including  

the results of internal audits, risk reviews, project assurance reviews 
and fraud/whistleblowing; 

–  A review of its own effectiveness and both the internal and  

external auditors; 

–  Reporting of whistleblowing incidents; 

–  Reappointment of the external auditors; 

–  Approval of the external audit engagement, scope and fees; 

–  Receipt of the external auditor report on the year end audit and 

Form 20-F filing; 

–  Assessment of the external auditor relationship to confirm 
independence and compliance with professional and  
auditing standards; 

–  Approval of  services and fees provided by the external auditor; 

–  Significant legal claims and regulatory issues (where applicable)  

in the context of the impact on financial reporting; and 

–  A review of treasury policy. 

ii Personnel committee  
The members of the committee comprise David Arculus (chairman), 
Terry Burns and Glen Moreno. The board will appoint an additional 
independent director in due course so as to comply with the Code. 

The committee has responsibility for determining the remuneration 
and benefits packages of the executive directors, the chief executives  
of the principal operating companies and other members of the 
management committee, as well as recommending the chairman’s 
remuneration to the board for its decision. 

The committee met four times during the year with the chief financial 
officer, head of internal audit and other members of the senior 
management team, together with the external auditors, in attendance. 
The committee also met regularly in private with the external auditors 
and the head of internal audit. 

The committee takes independent advice from consultants when 
required. No director takes part in any discussion or decision 
concerning their own remuneration. The committee reports to the  
full board and its report on directors’ remuneration, which has been 
considered and adopted by the board, is set out on pages 34 to 48. 

The committee receives regular technical updates as well as specific  
or personal training as required. 

During the course of the year the audit committee considered, 
amongst other things, the following matters: 

–  The annual report and accounts and preliminary announcement, 

the interim statement and trading updates; 

–  The Group accounting policies; 

–  The annual accounts being prepared on a going concern basis; 

–  The Form 20-F and related disclosures including the annual 
Sarbanes – Oxley Act 404 attestation of financial reporting  
internal controls; 

The committee met five times during the year, and has written  
terms of reference which clearly set out its authority and duties.  
These can be found on the company website at 
www.pearson.com/investor/corpgov.htm 

iii Nomination committee  
The nomination committee comprises Glen Moreno (chairman), 
Marjorie Scardino, David Arculus, Terry Burns, Patrick Cescau, Susan 
Fuhrman and Ken Hydon, and meets as and when required. During 
2007 the committee met twice to consider the ongoing search for a 
new non-executive director. The committee primarily monitors the 
composition and balance of the board and its committees, and 
identifies and recommends to the board the appointment of new 
directors.  

–  Monitoring of the company’s financial reporting, internal controls 

and risk management procedures; 

When considering the appointment of a new director the committee 
reviews the current balance of skills and experience of the board.  

–  Review of company risk returns including Social, Ethical and 

Environmental (SEE) risks; 

–  Assessment of the effectiveness of the company’s risk management 
and internal control systems, including appropriate disclosure 
requirements; 

–  The committees’ and internal audit’s terms of reference; 

–  The annual internal audit plan including resourcing of the internal 

audit function; 

Whilst the chairman of the board chairs this committee he is not 
permitted to chair meetings when the appointment of his successor  
is being considered or during discussion regarding his performance. 

In accordance with the company’s articles of association, directors are 
subject to reappointment at the AGM immediately following the date 
of their appointment, and thereafter must seek re-election no more 
than three years from the date they were last re-elected. The committee 
will recommend to the board the names of the directors who are to 
seek re-election at the AGM. 

29    Pearson Annual Report and Accounts 2007 

iv Risk management 
Operating companies undertake formal, semi-annual risk reviews to 
identify new or potentially under-managed risks. The results of these 
reviews are submitted to internal audit for evaluation and onward 
reporting to the board, via the audit committee. Throughout the year, 
risk sessions facilitated by internal audit are held with operating 
company management and with the Pearson Management Committee 
to discuss and review the significant risks facing the business. 

v Internal audit  
The internal audit function is responsible for providing independent 
assurance to management on the effectiveness of internal controls.  
The annual internal audit plan, derived from a risk model, is approved 
by the audit committee. Internal audit activity is supplemented by 
annual financial control self-assessment returns, completed by the 
businesses. Recommendations to improve internal controls and/or  
to mitigate risks are agreed with operating company management  
after each audit. Formal follow-up procedures allow internal audit  
to monitor operating companies’ progress in implementing its 
recommendations and to resolve any control deficiencies. The internal 
audit function also has a remit to monitor significant group projects, 
in conjunction with the central project management office, to provide 
assurance that appropriate project governance and risk management 
strategies are in place. Regular reports on the work of internal audit  
are provided to executive management and, via the audit committee, 
to the board. 

The head of internal audit is jointly responsible with the group legal 
counsel for monitoring compliance with our Code of Business 
Conduct, and investigating any reported incidents. 

vi Treasury management 
The treasury department operates within policies approved by  
the board and its procedures are reviewed regularly by the audit 
committee. Major transactions are authorised outside the department 
at the requisite level, and there is an appropriate segregation of duties. 
Frequent reports are made to the chief financial officer and regular 
reports are prepared for the audit committee and the board. 

vii Insurance  
Insurance is provided through Pearson’s insurance subsidiary or 
externally, depending on the scale of the risk and the availability of 
cover in the external market, with the objective of achieving the most 
cost effective balance between insured and uninsured risks. 

Going concern 
Having reviewed the Group’s liquid resources and borrowing facilities, 
and the Group’s 2008 and 2009 cash flow forecasts, the directors 
believe that the Group has adequate resources to continue as a going 
concern. For this reason, the financial statements have, as usual, been 
prepared on that basis. 

Directors’ Report continued 

The committee has written terms of reference which clearly set out  
its authority and duties. These can be found on the company website 
at www.pearson.com/investor/corpgov.htm 

Internal control 
The board of directors has overall responsibility for Pearson’s system 
of internal control, which is designed to manage the risks facing the 
Group, safeguard assets and provide reasonable, but not absolute, 
assurance against material financial misstatement or loss. 

In accordance with the provisions of the Code, the directors confirm 
that they have reviewed the effectiveness of the Group’s internal 
control system. 

They also confirm there is an ongoing process allowing for the 
identification, evaluation and management of significant business 
risks. This process accords with the revised Turnbull guidance and has 
been in place throughout 2007 and up to the date of approval of this 
annual report. 

The Group’s internal control framework covers financial, operational 
and compliance risks. Its main features are described below: 

i Board  
The board of directors exercises its control through an organisational 
structure with clearly defined levels of responsibility and authority and 
appropriate reporting procedures. To maintain effective control over 
strategic, financial, operational and compliance matters the board 
meets regularly, and has a formal schedule of matters that is brought to 
it, or its duly authorised committees, for attention. Responsibility for 
monitoring financial management and reporting, internal control and 
risk management has been delegated to the audit committee by the 
board. At each meeting, the audit committee considers reports from 
management, internal audit and the external auditors, with the aim  
of reviewing the effectiveness of the internal financial and operating 
control environment of the Group. 

ii Operating company controls 
The identification and mitigation of major business risks is the 
responsibility of operating company management. Each operating 
company, including the corporate centre, maintains internal controls 
and procedures appropriate to its structure and business environment, 
whilst complying with Group policies, standards and guidelines. These 
controls include those over external financial reporting which are 
documented and tested in accordance with the requirements of section 
404 of the Sarbanes-Oxley Act, which is relevant to our US listing. 

iii Financial reporting  
There is a comprehensive strategic planning, budgeting and forecasting 
system with an annual operating plan approved by the board of 
directors. Monthly financial information, including trading results, 
balance sheets, cash flow statements and indebtedness, is reported 
against the corresponding figures for the plan and prior years, with 
corrective action outlined by operating company executives as 
appropriate. Group senior management meet, on a quarterly basis, 
with operating company management to review their business and 
financial performance against plan and forecast. Major business risks 
relevant to each operating company as well as performance against the 
stated strategic objectives are reviewed in these meetings. 

In addition, the chief executive prepares a monthly report 11 times  
a year for the board on key developments, performance and issues in 
the business. 

30    Pearson Annual Report and Accounts 2007 

Supplier payment policy 
Operating companies are responsible for agreeing the terms and 
conditions under which business transactions with their suppliers are 
conducted. These supplier payment terms vary by operating company 
reflecting the different industries and countries in which they operate. 
It is company policy that suppliers are aware of such terms of payment 
and that payments to them are made in accordance with these, 
provided that the supplier is also complying with all relevant terms  
and conditions. Group trade creditors at 31 December 2007 were 
equivalent to 28 days of purchases during the year ended on that date. 
The company does not have any significant trade creditors and 
therefore is unable to disclose average supplier payment terms. 

External giving 
During 2007, Pearson’s cash charitable giving totalled £7.2m (2006: 
£3.6m). In addition to cash donations, Pearson also provides in-kind 
support such as books, publishing expertise, advertising space and  
staff time. Through the Pearson Foundation, we focus our charitable 
giving on education and literacy projects around the world.  
We encourage our employees to support their personal charities  
by matching donations and payroll giving and by providing 
volunteering opportunities. 

More details can be found in our 2007 CSR report at 
www.pearson.com/community/csr_report2007 

Share capital 
Details of share issues are given in note 26 to the accounts on page 88. 
The company has a single class of shares which is divided into ordinary 
shares of 25p each. The ordinary shares are in registered form.  
The company’s current authorised share capital is £298,500,000 
comprising 1,194,000,000 ordinary shares of which 808,028,141 were 
issued as at 31 December 2007. At the AGM held on 27 April 2007,  
the company was authorised, subject to certain conditions, to  
acquire up to 80 million of its ordinary shares by market purchase. 
Shareholders will be asked to renew this authority at the AGM on  
25 April 2008. 

At 29 February 2008, the company had been notified of the following 
substantial shareholdings (3% or more) in the capital of the company. 

Aviva plc 

Legal & General Group plc 

Templeton Global Advisors Ltd 

Number of 
shares  

40,126,002 

33,336,528 

56,508,060 

Percentage 

4.96% 

4.12% 

6.99% 

Shareholder communication 
Pearson has an extensive programme of communication with all of its 
shareholders – large and small, institutional and private. We also make 
a particular effort to communicate regularly with our employees, a 
large majority of whom are shareholders in the company. We post all 
company announcements on our website, www.pearson.com, as soon 
as they are released, and major shareholder presentations are made 
accessible via webcast or conference call. Our website contains a 
dedicated investor relations section with an extensive archive of past 
announcements and presentations, historical financial performance, 
share price data and a calendar of events. It also includes information 
about all of our businesses, links to their websites, and details of our 
corporate responsibility policies and activities. 

We have an established programme of educational seminars for our 
institutional shareholders focusing on individual parts of Pearson.  
The seminars are available to all shareholders via webcast on 
www.pearson.com 

Our AGM – which will be held on 25 April this year – includes 
opportunities to meet the company’s managers, presentations about 
Pearson’s businesses and the previous year’s results as well as general 
AGM business. 

People 
During 2007, Pearson employed over 32,000 people in 
Each business has detailed employment practices for recruitment, 
remuneration, employee relations, health and safety, and terms and 
conditions designed for the different sectors and countries in which  
it operates. 

 countries. 

60

We are committed to equality of opportunity for all regardless of 
gender, race, age, physical ability, religion or sexual orientation. This 
applies equally to recruitment and to the promotion, development and 
training of people who are already part of Pearson. The company takes 
seriously its obligations to the disabled and seeks not to discriminate 
against current or prospective employees because of any disability.  

We are always willing to make reasonable adjustments to premises  
or employment arrangements if these substantially disadvantage a 
disabled employee or prospective employee. Every effort is made to 
find a suitable alternative job and, as necessary, training for those who 
are unable to continue in their existing role due to disability. 

Pearson is committed to clear and timely communication with its 
people to ensure they understand the financial and economic factors 
that affect the performance of the company. Pearson supports 
employee representation to help positive employee relations.  

We believe that the best way for employees to profit from the  
success of the company is for them to become shareholders. Pearson 
operates worldwide share plans taking account of local country tax  
and securities regulations. With most of our people based in the US, 
we have taken special care to make it easy for them to acquire shares  
in Pearson. The listing of our shares on the New York Stock  
Exchange allows us to operate a US Employee Stock Purchase Plan 
that makes share ownership in Pearson accessible to the majority  
of our employees. 

31    Pearson Annual Report and Accounts 2007 

 
 
Directors’ Report continued 

Annual general meeting 
The notice convening the AGM to be held at 12 noon on Friday,  
25 April 2008 at The Queen Elizabeth II Conference Centre, Broad 
Sanctuary, Westminster, London SW1P 3EE, is contained in a circular 
to shareholders to be dated 20 March 2008. 

Registered auditors  
In accordance with section 384 of the Companies Act 1985 and  
section 489 of the Companies Act 2006 resolutions proposing the 
reappointment of PricewaterhouseCoopers LLP (PwC) as auditors to 
the company will be proposed at the AGM, at a level of remuneration 
to be agreed by the directors. 

Auditor independence 
In line with best practice, our relationship with PwC, our independent 
auditor, is governed by our external auditor policy, which is reviewed 
and approved annually by the audit committee. The policy establishes 
procedures to ensure the auditors’ independence is not compromised 
as well as defining those non-audit services that the independent 
auditor may or may not provide to Pearson. These allowable services 
are in accordance with relevant UK and US legislation. 

The audit committee approves all audit and non-audit services 
provided by the independent auditor. Certain categories of allowable 
non-audit services have been pre-approved by the audit committee 
subject to the authorities below: 

–  Pre-approved non-audit services can be authorised by the chief 

financial officer up to £100,000 per project, subject to a cumulative 
limit of £500,000 per annum; 

–  Acquisition due diligence services up to £100,000 per transaction; 

Statement of directors’ responsibilities 
Company law requires the directors to prepare financial statements for 
each financial year which give a true and fair view of the state of affairs 
of the Group as at the end of the year and of the profit or loss of the 
Group for that period. The directors are responsible for keeping 
proper accounting records that disclose with reasonable accuracy at 
any time, the financial position of the company and the Group and to 
enable them to ensure that the financial statements comply with the 
Companies Act 1985, Companies Act 2006 and the report on 
directors’ remuneration.  

They are also responsible for safeguarding the assets of the Group,  
and hence for taking reasonable steps towards preventing and 
detecting fraud and other irregularities. In preparing the financial 
statements on pages 50 to 52 and 54 to 101 inclusive, the directors 
consider that appropriate accounting policies have been used and 
applied in a consistent manner, supported by reasonable and prudent 
judgements and estimates, and that all relevant accounting standards 
have been followed. 

The directors confirm that the auditors have concluded that the 
directors’ report is consistent with the financial statements. 

The directors also confirm that, for all directors in office at the date  
of this report: 

So far as each director is aware, there is no relevant audit information 
of which the company’s auditors are unaware. 

Each director has taken all the steps that they ought to have taken as 
directors in order to make themselves aware of any relevant audit 
information and to establish that the company’s auditors are aware  
of that information. 

–  Tax compliance and related activities up to the greater of £1m per 

annum or 50% of the external audit fee; 

Approved by the board on 13 March 2008 and signed on its  
behalf by  

Philip Hoffman, Secretary  

–  For forward looking tax planning services we use the most 

appropriate advisor, usually after a tender process. Where we  
decide to use our independent auditor authority up to £100,000  
per project, subject to a cumulative limit of £500,000 per annum 
has been delegated by the audit committee to management. 

Services provided by the independent auditor above these limits and 
all other allowable non-audit services, irrespective of value, must be 
approved by the audit committee. Where appropriate, services will be 
tendered prior to awarding work to the auditor. 

During 2007, Interactive Data appointed Ernst & Young LLP (Ernst  
& Young) as its independent auditor. To maintain Ernst & Young’s 
independence we have restricted the services that Ernst & Young can 
provide to Pearson and its subsidiaries, similar to those we impose  
on PwC. 

The audit committee receives regular reports summarising the amount 
of fees paid to the auditor. 

A full statement of the fees for audit and services is provided in note 4 
to the accounts on page 63. 

32    Pearson Annual Report and Accounts 2007 

 
Additional Information for Shareholders 

Amendment of articles of association 
Any amendments to the articles of association (Articles) of the 
company may be made in accordance with the provisions of the 
Companies Acts by way of special resolution. A special resolution will 
be put to the AGM to be held on 25 April 2008 to amend the Articles, 
details of which are set out in the Notice of AGM. 

Rights attaching to shares 
The rights attaching to the ordinary shares are defined in the 
company’s Articles. A shareholder whose name appears on the 
company’s register of members can choose whether his shares are 
evidenced by share certificates (i.e. in certificated form) or held in 
electronic (i.e. uncertificated form) in CREST (the electronic 
settlement system in the UK). 

Subject to any restrictions below, shareholders may attend any general 
meeting of the company and, on a show of hands, every shareholder 
(or his/her representative) who is present at a general meeting has one  
vote on each resolution for every ordinary share of which they are  
the registered shareholder. A resolution put to the vote at a general 
meeting is decided on a show of hands unless before, or on the 
declaration of the result of, a vote on a show of hands, a poll is 
demanded by the chairman of the meeting, or by at least three 
shareholders (or their representatives) present in person and having 
the right to vote, or by any shareholders (or their representatives) 
present in person having at least 10% of the total voting rights of all 
shareholders, or by any shareholders (or their representatives) present 
in person holding ordinary shares on which an aggregate sum has been 
paid up of at least 10% of the total sum paid up on all ordinary shares. 

Shareholders can declare a final dividend by passing an ordinary 
resolution but the amount of the dividend cannot exceed the amount 
recommended by the board. The board can pay interim dividends on 
any class of shares of the amounts and on the dates and for the periods 
they decide, provided the distributable profits of the company justify 
such payment. The board may, if authorised by an ordinary resolution 
of the shareholders, offer any shareholder the right to elect to receive 
new ordinary shares, which will be credited as fully paid, instead of 
their cash dividend. 

Any dividend which has not been claimed for 12 years after it became 
due for payment will be forfeited and will then belong to the company, 
unless the directors decide otherwise. 

If the company is wound up, the liquidator can, with the sanction  
of a special resolution passed by the shareholders, divide among the 
shareholders all or any part of the assets of the company and he/she 
can value assets and determine how the division shall be carried out  
as between the members or different classes of members.  
The liquidator can also transfer the whole or any part of the  
assets to trustees upon any trusts for the benefit of the members. 

Voting at general meetings 
Any form of proxy sent by the company to shareholders in relation  
to any general meeting must be delivered to the company, whether  
in written form or in electronic form, not less than 48 hours before  
the time appointed for holding the meeting or adjourned meeting  
at which the person named in the appointment proposes to vote. 

No shareholder is, unless the board decide otherwise, entitled to attend 
or vote either personally or by proxy at a general meeting or to exercise 
any other right conferred by being a shareholder if he/she or any 
person with an interest in shares has been sent a notice under section 
793 of the Companies Act 2006 (which confers upon public 
companies the power to require information with respect to interests 
in their voting shares) and he/she or any interested person failed to 
supply the company with the information requested within 14 days 
after delivery of that notice. The board may also decide, where the 
relevant shareholding comprises at least 0.25% of the nominal value  
of the issued shares of that class, that no dividend is payable in respect 
of those default shares and that no transfer of any default shares shall 
be registered.  

The company operates two employee benefit trusts to hold  
shares, pending employees becoming entitled to them under the 
company’s employee share plans. 11,760,626 shares were so held  
as at 31 December 2007. Each trust has an independent trustee  
which has full discretion in relation to the voting of such shares.  
A dividend waiver operates on the shares held in these trusts. 

The company also operates a nominee shareholding arrangement 
known as Sharestore which holds shares on behalf of employees. 
1,857,818 shares were so held as at 31 December 2007. The trustees 
holding these shares seek voting instructions from the employee as 
beneficial owner, and voting rights are not exercised if no instructions 
are given. 

Transfer of shares 
The board may refuse to register a transfer of a certificated share which 
is not fully paid, provided that the refusal does not prevent dealings in 
shares in the company from taking place on an open and proper basis. 
The board may also refuse to register a transfer of a certificated share 
unless (i) the instrument of transfer is lodged, duly stamped (if 
stampable), at the registered office of the company or any other place 
decided by the board accompanied by the certificate for the share to 
which it relates and such other evidence as the board may reasonably 
require to show the right of the transferor to make the transfer, (ii) is 
in respect of only one class of shares, and (iii) is in favour of not more 
than four transferees. 

Transfers of uncertificated shares must be carried out using CREST 
and the board can refuse to register a transfer of an uncertificated share 
in accordance with the regulations governing the operation of CREST. 

Variation of rights 
If at any time the capital of the company is divided into different 
classes of shares, the special rights attaching to any class may be varied 
or revoked either: 

(i) with the written consent of the holders of at least 75% in nominal 
value of the issued shares of the class; or 

(ii) with the sanction of a special resolution passed at a separate general 
meeting of the holders of the shares of the class. 

Without guidance to any special rights previously conferred on the 
holders of any existing shares or class of shares, any share may be 
issued with such preferred, deferred, or other special rights, or such 
restrictions, whether in regard to dividend, voting, return of capital  
or otherwise as the company may from time to time by ordinary 
resolution determine. 

33    Pearson Annual Report and Accounts 2007 

Additional Information for Shareholders continued 

Appointment and replacement of directors 
Directors shall number no less than two. Directors may be appointed 
by the company by ordinary resolution or by the board. A director 
appointed by the board shall hold office only until the next AGM and 
shall then be eligible for reappointment, but shall not be taken into 
account in determining the directors or the number of directors who 
are to retire by rotation at that meeting. The board may from time to 
time appoint one or more directors to hold executive office with the 
company for such period (subject to the provisions of the Companies 
Acts) and upon such terms as the board may decide and may revoke  
or terminate any appointment so made. 

At every AGM of the company, one-third of the directors shall retire 
by rotation (or, if their number is not a multiple of three, the number 
nearest to one-third). The first directors to retire by rotation shall be 
those who wish to retire and not offer themselves for reappointment. 
Any further directors so to retire shall be those of the other directors 
subject to retirement by rotation who have been longest in office  
since their last appointment but, as between persons who became or 
were last appointed on the same day, those to retire shall (unless they 
otherwise agree among themselves) be determined by lot. In addition, 
any director who would not otherwise be required to retire shall retire 
by rotation at the third AGM after his last appointment. 

The company may by ordinary resolution remove any director  
before the expiration of his term of office. In addition, the board  
may terminate an agreement or arrangement with any director  
for the provision of his services to the company. 

Powers of the directors 
Subject to the company’s memorandum of association and the 
Articles, the Companies Acts and any directions given by special 
resolution, the business of the company will be managed by the  
board who may exercise all the powers of the company, including 
powers relating to the issue and/or buying back of shares by the 
company, (subject to any statutory restrictions or restrictions  
imposed by shareholders in general meeting). 

Significant agreements 
The following significant agreements contain provisions entitling the 
counterparties to exercise termination or other rights in the event of  
a change of control of the company: 

–  under the $1,750,000,000 revolving credit facility agreement  

dated July 2004 (as amended) with a final maturity date of July 2012 
between, amongst others, the company, HSBC Bank plc (as facility 
agent) and the banks and financial institutions named therein as 
lenders (together, the ‘Credit Facilities’), the facility agent must, 
upon a change of control, cancel the total commitments of the 
lenders under such Credit Facilities and declare all outstanding 
advances, together with accrued interest and any other amounts 
payable in respect of such Credit Facilities, to be immediately due 
and payable. For these purposes, a ‘change of control’ occurs if the 
company becomes a subsidiary of any other company or one or 
more persons acting either individually or in concert, obtains 
control (as defined in Section 840 of the Income and Corporation 
Taxes Act 1988) of the company. 

–  under the $975,000,000 revolving credit facility agreement  

dated July 2007 (as amended by an agreement dated February  
2008, under which the facility will reduce to $300,000,000 in 
December 2008 with a final maturity date of September 2009) 
between, amongst others, the company, Barclays Bank PLC  
(as facility agent) and the banks and financial institutions named 
therein as lenders (together, the ‘Credit Facilities’), the facility agent 
must, upon a change of control, cancel the total commitments of 
the lenders under such Credit Facilities and declare all outstanding 
advances, together with accrued interest and any other amounts 
payable in respect of such Credit Facilities, to be immediately due 
and payable. For these purposes, a ‘change of control’ occurs if the 
company becomes a subsidiary of any other company or one or 
more persons acting either individually or in concert, obtains 
control (as defined in Section 840 of the Income and Corporation 
Taxes Act 1988) of the company.  

–  shares acquired through the company’s employee share plans rank 
pari passu with shares in issue and have no special rights. For legal 
and practical reasons, the rules of these plans set out the 
consequences of a change of control of the company. 

34    Pearson Annual Report and Accounts 2007 

Report on Directors’ Remuneration 

The board presents its report on directors’ remuneration to 
shareholders. This report complies with the Directors’ Remuneration 
Report Regulations 2002 and was approved by the board of directors 
at the board meeting on 29 February 2008. 

The committee’s terms of reference are set out on the company’s 
website. The committee met five times during 2007. The matters 
discussed and actions taken were as follows: 
15 and 23 February 2007 

The committee believes that the company has complied with the 
provisions regarding remuneration matters contained within the 
Combined Code, with one exception: since the resignation of  
Rana Talwar last April, our personnel committee is made up of  
only two independent non-executive directors and the chairman. 

A resolution will be put to shareholders at the annual general  
meeting (AGM) on 25 April 2008 inviting them to consider and 
approve this report. 

The personnel committee 
During 2007, David Arculus chaired the personnel committee; the 
other members were Rana Talwar, who stood down as a member  
of the committee at the AGM on 27 April 2007, Terry Burns and  
Glen Moreno. David Arculus, Rana Talwar and Terry Burns were 
independent non-executive directors. Glen Moreno, chairman of the 
board, joined the committee in 2007 as permissible under the UK 
Combined Code. 

The board will appoint an additional independent director to join the 
personnel committee in due course, so as to comply with the Code. 

Marjorie Scardino, chief executive, David Bell, director for people, 
Robert Head, compensation and benefits director, and Stephen  
Jones, deputy company secretary, provided material assistance to the 
committee during the year. They attended meetings of the committee, 
although no director was involved in any decisions as to his or her own 
remuneration. 

To ensure that it receives independent advice, the committee has 
appointed Towers Perrin to supply survey data and to advise on 
market trends, long-term incentives and other general remuneration 
matters. Towers Perrin also advised the company on health and 
welfare benefits in the US and provided consulting advice directly  
to certain Pearson operating companies. 

Reviewed and approved 2006 annual incentive plan payouts 

Reviewed and approved 2004 long-term incentive plan payouts 

Approved vesting of 2002 and 2004 annual bonus share matching awards  
and operation of plan for 2007 
Reviewed and approved increases in executive base salaries for 2007 

Reviewed and approved 2007 Pearson and operating company annual 
incentive plan targets 
Reviewed 2007 long-term incentive awards and associated performance 
conditions for Pearson Management Committee 
Reviewed strategy on 2007 long-term incentive awards for executives and 
managers 
Reviewed and approved 2006 report on directors’ remuneration 

Noted company’s use of equity for employee share plans 

26 July 2007 

Approved 2007 long-term incentive awards for Pearson Management 
Committee and other executives and managers 
Reviewed and amended committee’s charter and terms of reference 

3 October 2007 

Considered Towers Perrin’s report on remuneration for Pearson  
Management Committee for 2008 
Noted status of outstanding long-term incentive awards 

3 December 2007 

Reviewed 2008 annual incentive plan structure and metrics 

Agreed to submit annual bonus share matching plan for renewal by 
shareholders in 2008 

Remuneration policy 
This report sets out the company’s policy on directors’ remuneration. 
This policy will continue to apply to each director for 2008 and, so far 
as practicable, for subsequent years. The committee considers that a 
successful remuneration policy needs to be sufficiently flexible to take 
account of future changes in the company’s business environment  
and in remuneration practice. Future reports, which will continue to 
be subject to shareholder approval, will describe any changes in policy 
for years after 2008. Shareholders should consider all statements in this 
report about remuneration policy for years after 2008 in this context. 

35    Pearson Annual Report and Accounts 2007 

 
Report on Directors’ Remuneration continued 

Pearson’s goal is to produce sustainable growth on our three key 
financial measures – adjusted earnings per share, cash generation  
and return on invested capital – which we believe are, together,  
good indicators that we are building the long-term value of Pearson. 
We do this by investing consistently in four areas which are common 
to all our businesses: content, technology and services, international 
markets and efficiency. We believe this strategy can create a virtuous 
circle of efficiency, investment, market share gains and scale which in 
turn can produce sustainable growth on our financial goals and the 
value of the company. 

We seek to generate a performance culture that supports these  
goals by operating incentive programmes that directly reward their 
achievement. The committee selects performance conditions for the 
company’s various performance-related annual or long-term incentive 
plans that are linked to the company’s strategic objectives set out above 
and aligned with the interests of shareholders.  

Share ownership is encouraged throughout the company.  
All outstanding long-term incentive awards for each of the executive 
directors are set out in tables 4 and 5 on pages 46 to 49 of this report. 

The committee determines whether or not targets have been met 
under the company’s various performance-related annual or long-
term incentive plans based on the relevant internal information and 
input from external advisers. Since 2005, the Group’s financial results 
have been reported under IFRS. Earnings per share and any other 
accounting measures used for the purposes of the company’s short-  
or long-term incentive plans are adjusted for IFRS where applicable. 

It is the company’s policy that total remuneration (base  
compensation plus short- and long-term incentives) should reward 
both short- and long-term results, delivering competitive rewards  
for target performance, but outstanding rewards for exceptional 
company performance.

Main elements of remuneration 
Total remuneration is made up of fixed and performance-linked elements, with each element supporting different objectives. 
Element  

Performance period 

Objective 

Performance conditions 

Base salary 
(see page 37) 

Reflects competitive market level, role and 
individual contribution 

Not applicable 

Normally reviewed annually taking into account 
the remuneration of directors and executives in 
similar positions in comparable companies, 
individual performance and levels of pay and pay 
increases throughout the company 

Annual incentives 
(see page 37) 

Bonus share matching 
(see page 38) 

Long-term incentives 
(see page 39) 

Motivates achievement of annual strategic goals 

Encourages executive directors and other senior 
executives to acquire and hold Pearson shares.
Aligns executives and shareholders’ interests 

One year  Subject to achievement of targets for sales, earnings 
per share or profit, working capital 
and cash 

Three years 

Subject to achievement of target for earnings 
per share growth 

Drives long-term earnings and share price 
growth and value creation.
Aligns executives’ and shareholders’ interests 

Three years 

Subject to achievement of targets for relative 
total shareholder return, return on invested capital 
and earnings per share growth 

Consistent with its policy, the committee places considerable emphasis 
on the performance-linked elements i.e. annual incentives, bonus 
share matching and long-term incentives. The relative importance of 
fixed and performance-related remuneration for each of the directors 
is as follows: 

Proportion of total compensation
Marjorie Scardino 

32.8%

26.6%

David Bell 

Robin Freestone

Rona Fairhead

John Makinson

39.0%

31.7%

34.2%

29.7%

38.4%

29.0%

47.1%

28.3%

Base salary and other fixed remuneration 
Annual incentive and bonus share matching
Long-term incentives

40.6%

29.3%

36.1%

32.6%

24.6%

The committee will continue to review the mix of fixed and 
performance-linked remuneration on an annual basis, consistent  
with its overall philosophy. 

Benchmarking 
Our policy is that the remuneration of the executive directors should 
be competitive with those of directors and executives in similar 
positions in comparable companies. We use a range of UK companies 
in different sectors including the media sector. Some are of a similar 
size to Pearson, while others are larger, but the method which the 
committee’s independent advisers use to make comparisons on 
remuneration takes this into account. All have very substantial 
overseas operations. We also use selected media companies in  
North America. 

We use these companies because they represent the wider executive 
talent pool from which we might expect to recruit externally and the 
pay market to which we might be vulnerable if our remuneration was 
not competitive. 

The market assessments against the two groups are not a simple 
statistical outcome and nor are they an average of the two groups.  
In preparing the assessments and comparisons with the Pearson  
data, the data for the comparator group companies are considered 
separately and are adjusted using regression analysis to take  
account of those factors which Towers Perrin’s research shows 
differentiate remuneration for jobs of a similar nature. The factors 
include sales, board membership, reporting relationships and 
international activities. 

36    Pearson Annual Report and Accounts 2007 

 
 
For benchmarking purposes, the main elements of remuneration are 
valued as follows: 
Element of remuneration 

Valuation 

Base salary 

Actual base salary 

Annual incentive 

Target level of annual incentive 

Bonus share matching 

Expected value of matching award based on 50%  
of target level of annual incentive 

Long-term incentive 

Expected value of long-term incentive award 

Pension and benefits 

Cost to company of providing pension and  
other benefits 

Total remuneration 

Sum of all elements of remuneration 

Expected value means the net present value of awards taking into 
account the vesting schedule, risk of forfeiture and the probability  
that any performance target will be met. 

Base salary 
Our normal policy is to review salaries annually consistent with our 
approach to benchmarking set out above. For 2007, the increases in 
base salary for the executive directors were in line with the general 
guideline for increases in the company as a whole with two exceptions. 
In the light of its review, the committee concluded that higher 
increases were justified for the Chief Executive to keep her salary  
in line with competitive market levels and for the Chief Financial 
Officer to bring his salary up to competitive market levels following  
his appointment in 2006. 

The committee has reviewed executive directors’ base salaries for 2008. 
Full details will be set out in the report on directors’ remuneration  
for 2008. 

Allowances and benefits 
It is the company’s policy that benefit programmes should be 
competitive in the context of the local labour market, but as an 
international company we require executives to operate worldwide 
and recognise that recruitment also operates worldwide. 

Annual incentives 
The committee establishes the annual incentive plans for the executive 
directors and the chief executives of the company’s principal operating 
companies, including performance measures and targets. 

The financial performance measures relate to the company’s main 
drivers of business performance at both the corporate and operating 
company level. Performance is measured separately for each item.  
For each performance measure, the committee establishes threshold, 
target and maximum levels of performance for different levels  
of payout.  

With the exception of the CEO, 10% of the total annual incentive 
opportunity for the executive directors and other members of  
the Pearson Management Committee is based on performance  
against personal objectives as agreed with the CEO. These  
may include inter alia objectives relating to corporate social 
responsibility. The company publishes a detailed annual report  
on our progress and plans in this area, which is available at 
www.pearson.com/community/csr_report2007. 

For 2008, the financial performance measures for Pearson plc are  
sales, growth in underlying adjusted earnings per share for continuing 
operations at constant exchange rates, average working capital as  
a ratio to sales and operating cash flow. For subsequent years, the 
measures will be set at the time. 

For 2008, the committee has reviewed the structure for annual 
incentives for the executive directors other than the CEO.  
Previously, this has expressed individual annual incentive 
opportunities by reference to base salary. In future, starting in 2008, 
these incentive opportunities will be expressed as absolute cash 
amounts. The committee with the advice of the CEO will determine 
the aggregate level of annual incentives and individual incentive 
opportunities taking into account all relevant factors. These factors 
may include the profitability of the company, individual roles and 
responsibilities, market annual incentive levels, and the performance 
required to achieve the maximum payout. 

In aggregate, the target individual incentive opportunities for the 
current executive directors including the CEO will be up to 0.4% of 
operating profit in the company’s operating plan each year. In each 
year’s report on directors’ remuneration, the committee will set out 
the target and maximum incentive opportunities for the CEO and the 
other executive directors for the year ahead. 

For 2008, there is no change to the incentive opportunity for the CEO 
which remains at 100% of base salary at target and 150% of salary at 
maximum. The average target individual incentive opportunity for the 
other executive directors is £381,000 (compared to £345,000 in 2007) 
and the maximum is twice target (as in 2007). 

The annual incentive plans are discretionary and the committee 
reserves the right to make adjustments to payouts up or down  
taking into account exceptional factors in line with the committee’s 
existing policy. 

The committee will continue to review the annual incentive plans each 
year and to revise the performance measures, targets and individual 
incentive opportunities in light of current conditions. The committee 
will continue to disclose details of the operation of the annual incentive 
plans in the report on directors’ remuneration each year. 

Annual incentive payments do not form part of pensionable earnings. 

For 2007, total annual incentive opportunities were based on Pearson 
plc and operating company financial performance and performance 
against personal objectives as follows: 

Name 

Marjorie Scardino 

David Bell 

Rona Fairhead 

Robin Freestone 

John Makinson 

Pearson plc 

Operating
company 

Personal
objectives 

100% 

90% 

30% 

90% 

30% 

– 

– 

60%
(FT Group) 
– 

60% 
(Penguin 
Group) 

– 

10% 

10% 

10% 

10% 

37    Pearson Annual Report and Accounts 2007 

Report on Directors’ Remuneration continued 

Performance in 2007 against the incentive plans was as follows: 

Incentive plan 

Pearson plc 

Performance measure 

Sales 

Underlying growth in adjusted earnings per share at constant  
exchange rates 

Average working capital to sales ratio 

Operating cash flow 

FT Group  

Sales 

Operating profit 

Operating cash flow 

Penguin Group 

Sales 

Operating margin 

Average working capital to sales ratio 

Operating cash flow 

Performance against incentive plan 

Below 
threshold 

Between  
threshold  
and target 

Between
target and
maximum 

Above
maximum 

√

√

√

√

√

√

√

√

√

√

√

None of the executive directors was directly covered by the plans  
for the education businesses where the same performance measures 
applied. The performance of these businesses is covered elsewhere  
in the annual report. 

For real growth in adjusted earnings per share of between 3% and 5% 
per annum compound, the rate at which the participant’s invested 
shares will be matched will be calculated according to a straight-line 
sliding scale. 

Details of actual payouts for 2007 are set out in table 1 on page 45. 

Real earnings per share growth per annum 

Proportion of maximum matching award released 

Bonus share matching 
We are asking shareholders by separate resolution to approve the 
renewal of the annual bonus share matching plan first approved by 
shareholders in 1998. 

Less than 3% 

3% 

0% 

50% 

Between 3% and 5% 

Sliding scale between 50% and 100% 

5% or more 

100% 

The committee has reviewed the operation of this plan since its 
introduction. Taking into account how plans of this type have evolved, 
we are seeking to renew the plan for a further ten-year term on broadly 
similar terms. But we are proposing certain changes that we think are 
consistent with market practice, will simplify the plan, enhance take-
up, particularly in our key market, avoid compliance difficulties in the 
US, and benefit the plan’s administration. 

Subject to shareholders’ approval, the renewed annual bonus share 
matching plan will operate in 2008 in respect of annual incentives for 
2007. The plan will continue to permit executive directors and senior 
executives around the company to invest up to 50% of any after-tax 
annual bonus in Pearson shares.  

If the participant’s invested shares are held, they will be matched 
subject to earnings per share growth over the three-year performance 
period on a gross basis up to a maximum of one matching share for 
every one held i.e. the number of matching shares will be equal to the 
number of shares that could have been acquired with the amount of 
the pre-tax annual bonus taken in invested shares. 

One matching share for every two invested shares held i.e. 50% of the 
maximum matching award, will be released if the company’s adjusted 
earnings per share increase in real terms by 3% per annum compound 
over the three-year performance period. One matching share for every 
one invested share held i.e. 100% of the maximum matching award, 
will be released if the company’s adjusted earnings per share increase 
in real terms by 5% per annum compound over the same period. 

Earnings per share growth is calculated using the point-to-point 
method. This method compares the adjusted earnings per share in the 
company’s accounts for the financial year ended prior to the grant date 
with the adjusted earnings per share for the financial year ending three 
years later and calculates the implicit compound annual growth rate 
over the period. 

Real growth is calculated by reference to the UK Government’s  
Retail Prices Index (All Items). We choose to test our earnings  
per share growth against UK inflation over three years to measure the 
company’s financial progress over the period to which the entitlement 
to matching shares relates. 

Where matching shares vest in accordance with the plan, a participant 
will also receive ‘dividend’ shares representing the gross value of 
dividends that would have been paid on the matching shares during 
the holding period and reinvested. 

Under the previous plan, if a participant’s invested shares are held  
and the company’s adjusted earnings per share increase in real terms 
by at least 3% per annum over a five-year period, the company will 
match them on a gross basis of one share for every one held. Half the 
matching shares will vest if the performance condition is met over the 
first three years. Since its introduction, there have been six full five-year 
cycles of this plan. For the 1998 award, the first one-for-two match 
vested, but not the full one-for-one. For both the 1999 and 2000 
award, both matches lapsed. And for the 2001, 2002 and 2003 awards, 
the full one-for-one match vested. 

38    Pearson Annual Report and Accounts 2007 

 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
Details of awards made, held or released under the annual bonus share matching plan in 2007 are as follows (subject to audit): 

Date of award 

22 May 2007 

12 April 2006 

15 April 2005 

Share price on 
date of award 

899.9p 

Vesting  

50% on 22 May 2010 

100% on 22 May 2012 

Outstanding subject to 2006 to 2009 performance 

Outstanding subject to 2006 to 2011 performance 

Status 

776.2p 

50% on 12 April 2009 

Outstanding subject to 2005 to 2008 performance 

100% on 12 April 2011 

Outstanding subject to 2005 to 2010 performance 

631.0p 

50% on 15 April 2008 

100% on 15 April 2010 

Performance condition met. Increase in adjusted earnings per 
share for 2004 to 2007 of 69.8% against target of 20.1% 

Outstanding subject to participants not electing to call for 50% 
of shares that vest on 15 April 2008 and subject to 2004 
to 2009 performance 

Target met as reported in report on directors’ remuneration for 
2006. Shares held pending release on 16 April 2009 

16 April 2004 

652.0p 

50% on 16 April 2007 

17 April 2003 

19 April 2002 

100% on 16 April 2009 

Outstanding subject to 2003 to 2008 performance 

541.0p 

100% on 17 April 2008 

892.0p 

100% on 19 April 2007 

Performance condition met. Increase in adjusted earnings 
per share for 2002 to 2007 of 84.6% against target of 33.2%. 
Shares held pending release on 17 April 2008 

Target met as reported in report on directors’ remuneration 
for 2006. Shares released on 17 May 2007 

All of the executive directors hold or held awards under this plan. 
Details are set out in table 4 on pages 46 and 47 and itemised as a or a*. 

Long-term incentives 
At the annual general meeting in April 2006, shareholders approved 
the renewal of the long-term incentive plan first introduced in 2001. 

Executive directors, senior executives and other managers are eligible 
to participate in the plan which can deliver restricted stock and/or 
stock options. The aim is to give the committee a range of tools with 
which to link corporate performance to management’s long-term 
reward in a flexible way. It is not the committee’s intention to grant 
stock options in 2008. 

Restricted stock granted to executive directors vests only when 
stretching corporate performance targets over a specified period have 
been met. Awards vest on a sliding scale based on performance over 
the period. There is no retesting. 

The committee determines the performance measures and targets
governing an award of restricted stock prior to grant. 

Share price is averaged over 20 days at the start and end of the 
performance period, commencing on the date of Pearson’s results’ 
announcement in the year of grant and the year of vesting. Dividends 
are treated as reinvested on the ex-dividend date, in line with the 
Datastream methodology.  

Return on invested capital is adjusted operating profit less cash tax 
expressed as a percentage of gross invested capital (net operating assets 
plus gross goodwill). 

Earnings per share is calculated by dividing the profit attributable to 
equity shareholders of Pearson by the weighted average number of 
ordinary shares in issue during the year, excluding ordinary shares 
purchased by Pearson and held as treasury shares.  

For 2008 and subsequent awards, earnings per share growth is 
calculated using the point-to-point method. This method compares 
the adjusted earnings per share in the company’s accounts for the 
financial year ended prior to the grant date with the adjusted earnings 
per share for the financial year ending three years later and calculates 
the implicit compound annual growth rate over the period.  

The performance measures that have applied since 2006 and that  
will apply for 2008 and subsequent awards for the executive directors 
are focused on delivering and improving returns to shareholders. 
These are relative total shareholder return (TSR), return on invested 
capital (ROIC) and earnings per share (EPS) growth. 

For awards prior to 2008, earnings per share growth is calculated using 
the aggregate method that sums the results for each year and calculates 
the compound aggregate average annual growth assuming a constant 
increase on the base year through the period. Sales growth – relevant to 
awards prior to 2006 – was also calculated using the aggregate method. 

Total shareholder return is the return to shareholders from any  
growth in Pearson’s share price and reinvested dividends over the 
performance period. For long-term incentive awards, TSR is measured 
relative to the constituents of the FTSE World Media Index over a 
three-year period. Companies that drop out of the index are excluded 
i.e. only companies in the index for the entire period are counted.  

Pearson’s reported financial results for the relevant periods are used  
to measure performance. The committee has discretion to make 
adjustments taking into account exceptional factors that distort 
underlying business performance. In exercising such discretion, the 
committee is guided by the principle of aligning shareholder and 
management interests. 

39    Pearson Annual Report and Accounts 2007 

 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
Report on Directors’ Remuneration continued 

The vesting of shares based on relative total shareholder return is 
subject to the committee satisfying itself that the recorded total 
shareholder return is a genuine reflection of the underlying financial 
performance of the business. 

Restricted stock may be granted without performance conditions to 
satisfy recruitment and retention objectives. Restricted stock awards 
that are not subject to performance conditions will not be granted to 
any of the current executive directors. 

The committee chose total shareholder return relative to the 
constituents of the FTSE World Media Index because, in line  
with many of our shareholders, it felt that part of executive  
directors’ rewards should be linked to performance relative to  
the company’s peers. 

We chose return on invested capital because, over the past few years, 
the transformation of Pearson has significantly increased the capital 
invested in the business (mostly in the form of goodwill associated 
with acquisitions) and required substantial cash investment to 
integrate those acquisitions. 

Earnings per share growth was chosen because strong bottom-line 
growth is imperative if we are to improve our total shareholder return 
and our return on invested capital. 

Pearson wishes to encourage executives and managers to build up a 
long-term holding of shares so as to demonstrate their commitment  
to the company. 

To achieve this, for awards of restricted stock that are subject to 
performance conditions over a three-year period, 75% of the award 
vests at the end of the three-year period. The remaining 25% of the 
award only vests if the participant retains the after-tax number of 
shares that vest at year three for a further two years. 

Where shares vest, participants receive additional shares representing 
the gross value of dividends that would have been paid on these shares 
during the performance period and reinvested. The expected value of 
awards made on this basis takes this into account. 

The committee’s independent advisers calculate each year the  
expected value of awards i.e. their net present value after taking into 
account the vesting schedule, risk of forfeiture and the probability  
that any performance targets will be met. In the case of return on 
invested capital and earnings per share growth, these probabilities  
take into account the company’s strategic objectives over the 
performance period. 

The committee establishes each year the expected value of individual 
awards taking into account these values and assessments by the 
committee’s independent advisers of market practice for comparable 
companies and of directors’ total remuneration relative to the market. 

In establishing the expected value of individual awards, the committee 
also has regard to the face value of the awards and their potential value 
should the performance targets be met in full. 

The committee will set stretching targets for the 2008 awards that are 
consistent with the company’s strategic objectives over the period to 
2010. It is the committee’s intention that these targets will be no less 
demanding than the targets for the 2007 awards. Full details of the 
targets and individual awards will be set out in the report on directors’ 
remuneration for 2008. 

40    Pearson Annual Report and Accounts 2007 

 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
–  Outstanding 

–  Outstanding 

–  Outstanding 

– 

Remain held 
because the 
performance 
period ends 
after the date of 
this report 

 Vested and 
remain held 
pending release 

Vested and 
remain held 
pending release 

79.97% of 
shares vested. 
Three-
quarters were 
released on 
21 December 
2007. If after-
tax number of 
share are 
retained for a 
further two 
years, the 
remaining 
quarter will 
be released on 
21 December 
2009

Details of awards made, vested or released under the long-term incentive plan in 2007 are as follows (subject to audit): 

Share 
price on  
date of 
award 

Vesting date 

Date of award 

30 July 2007 

778p 

30 July 2010 

Performance 
measures (award  
split equally across 
three measures) 

Relative 
TSR 

ROIC 

EPS growth 

Performance
period 

2007 to 2010 

Payout at threshold  Payout at maximum 

30% at 
median 

100% at upper 
quartile 

2009  25% for ROIC 
of 8.5% 

100% for 
ROIC of 
10.5% 

2007, 2008 
and 2009 
compared to 
2006 base year 

30% for 
EPS growth 
of 6.0% 

100% for 
EPS growth 
of 12.0% 

23 September 
2005 

655p  23 September 
2008 

Relative TSR 

2005 to 2008  40% at median  100% at upper 
quartile 

– 

– 

– 

– 

Actual 
performance 

Proportion of 
award vested 

Status of award 

ROIC 

2007  25% for ROIC 
of 7.5% 

100% for 
ROIC of 9.0% 

8.2% 

60% 

EPS growth 
and sales 
growth matrix 

2005, 2006 
and 2007 
compared to 
2004 base year 

30% for real 
growth in both 
sales and EPS 

100% 

EPS growth 
20.4%  
Sales growth 
5.0% 

100% for 10% 
growth in 
either sales or 
EPS, or 
between real 
and 10% 
growth 
in both 

21 December 
2004 

613p 

21 December 
2007 

Relative TSR 

2004 to 2007 40% at median 100% at upper 
quartile

ROIC 

2006 25% for ROIC 
of 6.5%

100% for 
ROIC of 8.0%

EPS growth 
and sales 
growth matrix 

2004, 2005 and 
2006 compared 
to 2003 base 
year

30% for real 
growth in both 
sales and EPS

100% 
for 10% 
growth in 
either sales or 
EPS, or 
between real 
and 10% 
growth 
in both

71st percentile 
(31 out of 104 
companies) 

89.92%

8.0% 

100%

EPS growth 
10.7%  
Sales growth 
1.5% 

50% (for 
details see 
report on 
directors’ 
remuneration 
for 2006)

Awards of restricted shares made on 16 December 2002, 26 September 
2003 and 13 October 2006 remain outstanding. The original terms  
of the awards were disclosed in detail in the reports on directors’ 
remuneration for the years in which the awards were made. We will 
disclose at the relevant time performance against targets and the  
extent to which these awards vest or lapse. All of the executive directors 
hold or held awards under this plan. Details are set out in table 4 on 
pages 46 and 47 and itemised as b or b*. 

All-employee share plans 
Executive directors are eligible to participate in the company’s  
all-employee share plans on the same terms as other employees.  
These plans comprise share acquisition savings programmes in  
the UK and the US. 

These plans operate within specific tax legislation (including a 
requirement to finance acquisition of shares using the proceeds of  
a monthly savings contract) and the acquisition of shares under  
these plans is not subject to the satisfaction of a performance target. 

Dilution and use of equity 
Awards under the company’s various stock plans may be satisfied 
using existing shares bought in the market, treasury shares or  
newly-issued shares. 

In the case of restricted stock awards under the long-term incentive 
plan and matching share awards under the annual bonus share 
matching plan, the company would normally expect to use  
existing shares. 

41    Pearson Annual Report and Accounts 2007 

 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
Report on Directors’ Remuneration continued 

In any rolling ten-year period, no more than 10% of Pearson equity 
will be issued, or be capable of being issued, under all Pearson’s share 
plans, and no more than 5% of Pearson equity will be issued, or be 
capable of being issued, under executive or discretionary plans. 

At 31 December 2007, stock awards to be satisfied by new-issue equity 
granted in the last ten years under all employee share plans amounted 
to 4.0% of the company’s issued share capital and under executive or 
discretionary plans amounted to 2.7%. 

The headroom available for all employee plans and executive or 
discretionary plans is as follows: 

Headroom for all employee plans 

Headroom for executive or  
discretionary plans 

2007 

6.0% 

2006 

6.6% 

2005 

6.4% 

2.3% 

2.7% 

2.5% 

In addition, no more than 5% of Pearson equity may be held in trust  
at any time. Against this limit, shares held in trust amount to 1.6% 
(1.5% in 2006) of the company’s issued share capital and the available 
headroom is 3.4%. 

Shareholding of executive directors 
As previously noted, in line with the policy of encouraging widespread 
employee ownership, the company encourages executive directors to 
build up a substantial shareholding in the company. 

Given the share retention features of the annual bonus share matching 
and long-term incentive plans and the volatility of the stock market, 
we do not think it is appropriate to specify a particular relationship  
of shareholding to salary. However, we describe separately here both 
the number of shares that the executive directors hold and the value 
expressed as a percentage of base salary.  

No executive director sold shares during the year other than to cover 
the cost of exercising share options or to satisfy income tax liability  
on the exercise of share options or the release of restricted shares. 

The current value of the executive directors’ own shares based on the 
middle market value of Pearson shares of 666p on 29 February 2008 
against the annual base salary set out in this report is as follows: 

Own shares 

Marjorie Scardino 

David Bell 

Rona Fairhead 

Robin Freestone 

John Makinson 

Number of 
shares 

400,886 

172,896 

121,556 

7,930 

306,592 

Value (% of 
base salary) 

297% 

261% 

166% 

13% 

403% 

In addition, the executive directors have prospective holdings as a 
result of restricted shares that have vested and are held pending release. 
The current value of these shares before any withholdings is as follows: 
Value (% of 
base salary) 

Number of 
shares 

Restricted shares 

Marjorie Scardino 

David Bell 

Rona Fairhead 

Robin Freestone 

John Makinson 

323,197 

132,024 

167,217 

– 

239% 

199% 

229% 

– 

141,212 

185% 

Service agreements 
In accordance with long established policy, all continuing executive 
directors have rolling service agreements under which, other than  
by termination in accordance with the terms of these agreements, 
employment continues until retirement. These service agreements 
provide that the company may terminate these agreements by  
giving 12 months’ notice, and in some instances they specify the 
compensation payable by way of liquidated damages in circumstances 
where the company terminates the agreements without notice or 
cause. We feel that these notice periods and provisions for liquidated 
damages are adequate compensation for loss of office and in line with 
the market. 

We summarise the service agreements that applied during 2007 and that continue to apply for 2008 as follows: 

Name  

Glen Moreno 

Marjorie Scardino 

David Bell 

Rona Fairhead 

Robin Freestone 

John Makinson 

Date of agreement 

29 July 2005 

27 February 2004 

Notice periods  

12 months from the director; 
12 months from the company 

Six months from the director; 
12 months from the company 

15 March 1996 

Six months from the director; 
12 months from the company 

24 January 2003 

Six months from the director; 
12 months from the company 

5 June 2006 

24 January 2003 

Six months from the director; 
12 months from the company 

Six months from the director; 
12 months from the company 

Compensation on termination by the 
company without notice or cause 

100% of annual fees at the date 
of termination 

100% of annual salary at the date of 
termination, the annual cost of pension 
and all other benefits and 50% of 
potential annual incentive 

100% of annual salary at the date of 
termination, the annual cost of pension 
and all other benefits and 50% of 
potential annual incentive 

100% of annual salary at the date of 
termination, the annual cost of pension 
and all other benefits and 50% of 
potential annual incentive 

No contractual provisions 

100% of annual salary at the date of 
termination, the annual cost of pension 
and all other benefits and 50% of 
potential annual incentive 

42    Pearson Annual Report and Accounts 2007 

 
 
Retirement benefits 
We describe the retirement benefits for each of the executive directors. 
Details of directors’ pension arrangements are set out in table 2 on 
page 45 of this report. 

Executive directors participate in the pension arrangements set up for 
Pearson employees. 

Marjorie Scardino, John Makinson, Rona Fairhead and Robin 
Freestone will also have other retirement arrangements because of the 
cap on the amount of benefits that can be provided from the pension 
arrangements in the US and the UK. 

The pension arrangements for all the executive directors include life 
insurance cover while in employment, and entitlement to a pension in 
the event of ill-health or disability. A pension for their spouse and/or 
dependants is also available on death. 

In the US, the defined benefit arrangement is the Pearson Inc. Pension 
Plan. This plan provides a lump sum convertible to a pension on 
retirement. The lump sum accrued at 6% of capped compensation 
until 31 December 2001 when further benefit accruals ceased. Normal 
retirement age is 65 although early retirement is possible subject to a 
reduction for early payment. No increases are guaranteed for pensions 
in payment. There is a spouse’s pension on death in service and the 
option to provide a death in retirement pension by reducing the 
member’s pension. 

The defined contribution arrangement in the US is a 401(k) plan.  
At retirement, the account balances will be used to provide benefits.  
In the event of death before retirement, the account balances will be 
used to provide benefits for dependants. 

In the UK, the pension plan is the Pearson Group Pension Plan and 
executive directors participate in either the Final Pay or the Money 
Purchase 2003 section. Normal retirement age is 62, but, subject  
to company consent, retirement is currently possible after age 50.  
The accrued pension is reduced on retirement prior to age 60. 
Pensions in payment are guaranteed to increase each year at 5%  
or the increase in the Index of Retail Prices, if lower. Pensions for a 
member’s spouse, dependant children and/or nominated financial 
dependant are payable in the event of death. 

Members of the Pearson Group Pension Plan who joined after May 
1989 are subject to an upper limit of earnings that can be used for 
pension purposes, known as the earnings cap. This limit, £108,600 as 
at 6 April 2006, was abolished by the Finance Act 2004. However the 
Pearson Group Pension Plan has retained its own ‘cap’, which will 
increase annually in line with the UK Government’s Index of Retail 
Prices (All Items). The cap was £112,800 as at 6 April 2007. 

In response to the UK Government’s plans for pensions simplification 
and so-called ‘A-Day’ effective from April 2006, UK executive directors 
and other members of the Pearson Group Pension Plan who are,  
or become, affected by the lifetime allowance were offered a cash 
supplement as an alternative to further accrual of pension benefits  
on a basis that is broadly cost neutral to the company. 

Marjorie Scardino 
Marjorie Scardino participates in the Pearson Inc. Pension Plan and 
the approved 401(k) plan. 

Additional pension benefits are provided through an unfunded 
unapproved defined contribution plan and a funded defined 
contribution plan approved by HM Revenue and Customs as a 
corresponding plan to replace part of the unfunded plan. The account 
balance of the unfunded unapproved defined contribution plan is 
determined by reference to the value of a notional cash account that 
increases annually by a specified notional interest rate. This plan 
provides the opportunity to convert a proportion of this notional cash 
account into a notional share account reflecting the value of a number 
of Pearson ordinary shares. The number of shares in the notional share 
account is determined by reference to the market value of Pearson 
shares at the date of conversion. 

David Bell 
David Bell is a member of the Pearson Group Pension Plan. He is 
eligible for a pension of two-thirds of his final base salary at age 62  
due to his long service but early retirement before that date is possible, 
subject to company consent. 

Rona Fairhead 
Rona Fairhead is a member of the Pearson Group Pension Plan.  
Her pension accrual rate is 1/30th of pensionable salary per annum, 
restricted to the plan earnings cap. 

Until April 2006, the company also contributed to a Funded 
Unapproved Retirement Benefits Scheme (FURBS) on her behalf. 
Since April 2006, she has received a taxable and non-pensionable  
cash supplement in replacement of the FURBS. 

Robin Freestone 
Robin Freestone is a member of the Money Purchase 2003 section of 
the Pearson Group Pension Plan. Company contributions are 16%  
of pensionable salary per annum, restricted to the plan earnings cap. 

Until April 2006, the company also contributed to a Funded 
Unapproved Retirement Benefits Scheme (FURBS) on his behalf. 
Since April 2006, he has received a taxable and non-pensionable cash 
supplement in replacement of the FURBS. 

John Makinson 
John Makinson is a member of the Pearson Group Pension Plan  
under which his pensionable salary is restricted to the plan earnings 
cap. The company ceased contributions on 31 December 2001 to his 
FURBS arrangement. During 2002 it set up an Unfunded Unapproved 
Retirement Benefits Scheme (UURBS) for him. The UURBS tops up 
the pension payable from the Pearson Group Pension Plan and the 
closed FURBS to target a pension of two-thirds of a revalued base 
salary on retirement at age 62. The revalued base salary is defined as 
£450,000 effective at 1 June 2002, increased at 1 January each year  
by reference to the increase in the UK Government’s Index of Retail 
Prices (All Items). In the event of his death a pension from the Pearson 
Group Pension Plan, the FURBS and the UURBS will be paid to his 
spouse or nominated financial dependant. Early retirement is possible 
from age 50, with company consent. 

The pension is reduced to reflect the shorter service, and before age 60, 
further reduced for early payment. 

43    Pearson Annual Report and Accounts 2007 

Report on Directors’ Remuneration continued 

Executive directors’ non-executive directorships 
Our policy is that executive directors may, by agreement with the 
board, serve as non-executives of other companies and retain any fees 
payable for their services. 

The following executive directors served as non-executive directors 
elsewhere and received fees or other benefits for the period covered by 
this report as follows: 

Marjorie Scardino 

David Bell 

Rona Fairhead 

Robin Freestone 

John Makinson 

Company 

Fees/benefits 

Nokia Corporation  €150,000 

MacArthur Foundation 

$20,000 

VITEC Group plc 

£12,283 

HSBC Holdings plc 

£102,501 

eChem 

£3,115 

George Weston 

Limited  C$34,625 

Chairman’s remuneration 
Our policy is that the chairman’s pay should be set at a level that is 
competitive with those of chairmen in similar positions in comparable 
companies. He is not entitled to any annual or long-term incentive, 
retirement or other benefits. 

In accordance with the terms of his appointment, the committee 
reviewed the chairman’s remuneration in 2007. In the light of this 
review, including a market assessment by Towers Perrin, the board 
approved the committee’s recommendation that the chairman’s 
remuneration be increased to £450,000 per year with effect from  
1 January 2007. 

Non-executive directors 
Fees for non-executive directors are determined by the full board 
having regard to market practice and within the restrictions contained 
in the company’s articles of association. Non-executive directors 
receive no other pay or benefits (other than reimbursement for 
expenses incurred in connection with their directorship of the 
company) and do not participate in the company’s equity-based 
incentive plans. 

The report on directors’ remuneration for 2006 noted that the board 
intended to review the level and structure of non-executive directors’ 
fees in 2007 which had been last reviewed with effect from 1 January 
2005. In the light of this review, which included a market assessment 
by Towers Perrin, the board agreed an increase in the basic fee, an 
increase in the fees for committee chairmanship, audit committee 
membership, and the senior independent director and the removal  
of the previous separate fee for overseas meetings. 

The level and structure of non-executive directors’ fees effective from  
1 July 2007 is as follows: 

A minimum of 25% of the basic fee is paid in Pearson shares that the 
non-executive directors have committed to retain for the period of 
their directorships. 

Patrick Cescau’s fee is paid directly to his employer. 

Non-executive directors serve Pearson under letters of appointment 
and do not have service contracts. There is no entitlement to 
compensation on the termination of their directorships. 

Total shareholder return performance 
Below we set out Pearson’s total shareholder return on three bases. 
Pearson is a constituent of all the indices shown. 

First, we set out Pearson’s total shareholder return performance 
relative to the FTSE All-Share index on an annual basis over the  
five-year period 2002 to 2007. We have chosen this index, and used  
it consistently in each report on directors’ remuneration since 2002,  
on the basis that it is a recognisable reference point and an appropriate 
comparator for the majority of our investors. 
Total shareholder return

Pearson

FTSE All-Share

250

200

150

100

50

02

03

04

05

06

07  

Secondly, to illustrate performance against our sector, we show 
Pearson’s total shareholder return relative to the FTSE Media index 
over the same five-year period. 

And thirdly, we show Pearson’s total shareholder return relative to the 
FTSE All-Share and Media indices on a monthly basis over 2007, the 
period to which this report relates. 

Fees 
payable from 
1 July 
2007 

£60,000 

Total shareholder return

Pearson

FTSE All-Share

FTSE Media

130

£20,000 

120

£15,000 

£10,000 

110

£5,000 

£15,000 

100

Dec

Mar

Jun

Sep

Dec  

Non-executive director 

Chairmanship of audit committee 

Chairmanship of personnel committee 

Membership of audit committee 

Membership of personnel committee 

Senior independent director 

44    Pearson Annual Report and Accounts 2007 

 
 
 
 
Items subject to audit 
The following tables form the auditable part of the remuneration report. 

Table 1: Remuneration of the directors 
Excluding contributions to pension funds and related benefits set out in table 2, directors’ remuneration was as follows: 
2007 

2007 

2007 

2007 

2007 

All figures in £000s 

Chairman 

Glen Moreno  

Executive directors 

Marjorie Scardino 

David Bell 

Rona Fairhead 

Robin Freestone 

John Makinson 

Non-executive directors 

David Arculus 

Terry Burns 

Patrick Cescau 

Susan Fuhrman 

Ken Hydon 

Rana Talwar (resigned 27 April 2007) 

Total 

Total 2006 (including former directors) 

Salaries/fees 

Annual 
incentive 

Allowances 

Benefits 

Total 

2006 

Total 

450 

900 

442 

487 

405 

507 

76 

76 

64 

64 

71 

19 

– 

1,341 

650 

693 

597 

743 

– 

– 

– 

– 

– 

– 

– 

52 

0 

0 

0 

169 

– 

– 

– 

– 

– 

– 

– 

39 

19 

27 

15 

29 

– 

– 

– 

– 

– 

– 

450 

425 

2,332 

1,111 

1,207 

1,017 

1,448 

76 

76 

64 

64 

71 

19 

1,962 

954 

1,062 

460 

1,326 

51 

67 

53 

61 

48 

53 

3,561 

3,219 

4,024 

3,022 

221 

233 

129 

85 

7,935 

– 

6,522 

6,559 

Note 1 Allowances for Marjorie Scardino include £41,760 in respect of housing costs and a US payroll supplement of £10,446. John Makinson is entitled to a location and market premium in relation to the 
management of the business of the Penguin Group in the US and received £168,545 for 2007. 

Note 2 Benefits include company car, car allowance and health care and, for Marjorie Scardino, pension planning and financial advice. Marjorie Scardino, Rona Fairhead, David Bell and John Makinson have  
the use of a chauffeur. 

Note 3 No amounts as compensation for loss of office and no expense allowances chargeable to UK income tax were paid during the year. 

Note 4 Patrick Cescau’s fee is paid over to his employer. 

Note 5 The company provided benefits to Vernon Sankey after he stepped down from the board to the value of £3,600. 

Table 2: Directors’ pensions and other pension-related items 

Increase/ 
(decrease) 
in accrued 
pension 
over the 
period 
£000 

(0.1) 

21.2 

4.1 

– 

23.7 

Accrued 
pension at 
31 Dec 07 
£000(1) 

3.6 

304.5 

22.6 

– 

Transfer
value at
31 Dec 06
£000  

31.7 

Transfer
value at
31 Dec 07
£000(2)  

32.7 

5,022.6 

5,623.7 

138.6 

214.8 

– 

– 

Increase/
(decrease)
in transfer
value*
over the
period
£000 

1.0 

579.0 

70.8 

– 

211.8 

2,095.3 

2,799.6 

698.9 

Increase/
(decrease)
in accrued
pension†
over the
period
£000  

Transfer 
value* of the  
increase/ 
(decrease) 
in accrued 
pension† at 
31 Dec 07 
£000 

Other 
pension 
costs to the 
company 
over the 
period 
£000(3) 

(0.2)

10.1 

3.4 

– 

16.4 

(1.8) 

582.7 

164.6 

27.1 

– 

211.4 

– 

– 

17.4 

– 

Other
allowances
in lieu of
pension
£000(4) 

– 

– 

123.7 

104.8 

– 

Other
pension
related
benefit
costs
£000(5) 

42.2 

– 

2.8 

0.5 

4.2 

Age at 
31 Dec 07 

60 

61 

46 

49 

53 

Directors’ pensions 

Marjorie Scardino 

David Bell 

Rona Fairhead 

Robin Freestone 

John Makinson 

*Less directors’ contributions. 

†Net of inflation. 

Note 1 The accrued pension at 31 December 2007 is that which would become payable from normal retirement age if the member left service at 31 December 2007. For Marjorie Scardino it relates only to the 
pension from the US Plan and there is a decrease because of exchange rate changes over the year. For David Bell and Rona Fairhead it relates to the pension payable from the UK Plan. For John Makinson it 
relates to the pension from the UK Plan, the FURBS and the UURBS in aggregate. 

Note 2 The UK transfer values at 31 December 2007 are calculated using the assumptions for cash equivalents payable from the UK Plan and are based on the accrued pension at that date. For the US SERP, 
transfer values are calculated using a discount rate equivalent to current US government long-term bond yields. The US Plan is a lump sum plan and the accrued balance is shown. 

Note 3 For UK benefits, this column comprises employer contributions to the Money Purchase 2003 section of the Pearson Group Pension Plan. For US benefits, it includes company contributions to funded 
defined contribution plans and notional contributions to unfunded defined contribution plans. 

Note 4 This column comprises cash allowances paid in lieu of pension benefits above the plan earnings cap. 

Note 5 This column comprises life cover and long-term disability insurance not covered by the retirement plans. 

45    Pearson Annual Report and Accounts 2007 

 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
Report on Directors’ Remuneration continued 

Table 3: Interests of directors 

Glen Moreno 

Marjorie Scardino 

David Arculus  

David Bell 

Terry Burns 

Patrick Cescau 

Rona Fairhead 

Robin Freestone  

Susan Fuhrman 

Ken Hydon  

John Makinson 

Rana Talwar (resigned 27 April 2007) 

Ordinary
shares at
31 Dec 07
(or date of
leaving 
if earlier)  

Ordinary
shares at 
1 Jan 07 

110,000 

170,000 

216,777 

400,886 

1,065 

2,223 

122,962 

172,896 

7,097 

2,758 

8,471 

2,758 

62,593 

121,556 

2,089 

3,830 

6,065 

7,930 

5,301 

7,172 

172,872 

306,592 

17,728 

18,683 

Note 1 Ordinary shares include both ordinary shares listed on the London Stock Exchange and American Depositary Receipts (ADRs) listed on the New York Stock Exchange. The figures include both shares  
and ADRs acquired by individuals investing part of their own after-tax annual bonus in Pearson shares under the annual bonus share matching plan. 

Note 2 At 31 December 2007 and 29 February 2008, 11,760,626 Pearson ordinary shares of 25p each were held in the Pearson Employee Share Ownership Trust.  

No director sold shares during the year other than to cover the cost of exercising share options or to satisfy income tax liability on the exercise of share options or the release of restricted shares. 

Note 3 At 31 December 2007, John Makinson held 1,000 shares in Interactive Data Corporation. 

Note 4 From 2004, Marjorie Scardino is also deemed to be interested in a further number of shares under her unfunded pension arrangement described in this report, which provides the opportunity to convert  
a proportion of her notional cash account into a notional share account reflecting the value of a number of Pearson shares. 

Note 5 The register of directors’ interests (which is open to inspection during normal office hours) contains full details of directors’ shareholdings and options to subscribe for shares. The market price on  
31 December 2007 was 732.0p per share and the range during the year was 694.5p to 914.5p. 

Table 4: Movements in directors’ interests in restricted shares 
Restricted shares designated as: a annual bonus share matching plan; b long-term incentive plan; and * where shares at 31 December 2007 have 
vested and are held pending release. 

Date of award 

Marjorie Scardino 

a 

b 

b 

b* 

b* 

b* 

b 

b 

b 

22/5/07 

16/12/02 

26/9/03 

21/12/04 

21/12/04 

23/9/05 

23/9/05 

13/10/06 

30/7/07 

Total 

David Bell 
a* 

17/4/03 

a* 
a 

b 

b 

b* 

b* 

b* 

b 

b 

b 

16/4/04 
16/4/04 

16/12/02 

26/9/03 

21/12/04 

21/12/04 

23/9/05 

23/9/05 

13/10/06 

30/7/07 

1 Jan 07 

Awarded 

Released 

Lapsed 

31 Dec 07 

Market value  
at date  
of award 

Earliest  
release  
date 

Date of
release 

Market value
at date
of release 

0 

60,287 

301,700 

120,200 

208,065 

138,710 

300,000 

150,000 

450,000 

0 

420,000 

156,049 

93,546 

13,983 

60,000 

60,287 

301,700 

120,200 

52,016 

31,181 

240,000 

150,000 

450,000 

420,000 

1,668,675 

480,287 

249,595 

73,983  1,825,384 

6,105 

2,251 
2,252 

133,065 

82,400 

82,531 

55,021 

113,333 

56,667 

125,000 

0 

100,000 

61,898 

37,107 

5,545 

22,667 

6,105 

2,251 
2,252 

133,065 

82,400 

20,633 

12,369 

90,666 

56,667 

125,000 

100,000 

899.9p 

638.5p 

582.0p 

22/5/10 

28/6/05 

26/9/06 

613.0p 

21/12/07 

21/12/07 

613.0p 

21/12/07 

21/12/07 

735.0p 

735.0p 

655.0p 

655.0p 

23/9/08 

23/9/08 

767.5p 

13/10/09 

778.0p 

30/7/10 

541.0p 

652.0p 
652.0p 

638.5p 

582.0p 

17/4/08 

16/4/07 
16/4/09 

28/6/05 

26/9/06 

613.0p 

21/12/07 

21/12/07 

613.0p 

21/12/07 

21/12/07 

735.0p 

735.0p 

655.0p 

655.0p 

23/9/08 

23/9/08 

767.5p 

13/10/09 

778.0p 

30/7/10 

Total 

658,625 

100,000 

99,005 

28,212 

631,408 

46    Pearson Annual Report and Accounts 2007 

 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
Table 4: Movements in directors’ interests in restricted shares continued 
Restricted shares designated as: a annual bonus share matching plan; b long-term incentive plan; and * where shares at 31 December 2007 have 
vested and are held pending release. 

Date of award 

Rona Fairhead 

a 

a* 

a* 

a 

a* 

a 

a 

b 

b 

b* 

b* 

b* 

b 

b 

b 

19/4/02 

17/4/03 

16/4/04 

16/4/04 

15/4/05 

15/4/05 

12/4/06 

16/12/02 

26/9/03 

21/12/04 

21/12/04 

23/9/05 

23/9/05 

13/10/06 

30/7/07 

Total 

Robin Freestone 
12/4/06 
a 

a 

b 

b 

b 

b 

22/5/07 

24/9/04 

23/9/05 

13/10/06 

30/7/07 

Total 

John Makinson 

17/4/03 

16/12/02 

26/9/03 

21/12/04 

21/12/04 

23/9/05 
23/9/05 

13/10/06 

30/7/07 

a* 

b 

b 

b* 

b* 

b* 
b 

b 

b 

Total 

Total 

1 Jan 07 

Awarded 

Released 

Lapsed 

31 Dec 07 

Market value 
at date  
of award  

Earliest  
release  
date 

Date of
release 

Market value
at date
of release 

933 

15,103 

2,573 

2,573 

9,873 

9,873 

16,101 

133,065 

82,400 

82,531 

55,021 

133,333 

66,667 

140,000 

0 

125,000 

933 

61,898 

37,107 

5,545 

0 

15,103 

2,573 

2,573 

9,873 

9,873 

16,101 

133,065 

82,400 

20,633 

12,369 

17/5/07 

901.5p 

892.0p 

541.0p 

652.0p 

652.0p 

631.0p 

631.0p 

776.2p 

638.5p 

582.0p 

19/4/07 

17/4/08 

16/4/07 

16/4/09 

15/4/08 

15/4/10 

12/4/09 

28/6/05 

26/9/06 

613.0p 

21/12/07 

21/12/07 

613.0p 

21/12/07 

21/12/07 

735.0p 

735.0p 

26,667 

106,666 

66,667 

140,000 

125,000 

655.0p 

655.0p 

23/9/08 

23/9/08 

767.5p 

13/10/09 

778.0p 

30/7/10 

750,046 

125,000 

99,938 

32,212 

742,896 

3,435 

0 

4,708 

5,000 

20,000 

125,000 

0 

125,000 

5,000 

3,435 

4,708 

0 

20,000 

125,000 

125,000 

776.2p 

899.9p 

609.0p 

655.0p 

12/4/09 

22/5/10 

24/9/07 

23/9/08 

767.5p 

13/10/09 

778.0p 

30/7/10 

153,435 

129,708 

5,000 

0 

278,143 

24/9/07 

750.0p 

12,210 

172,400 

82,400 

82,531 

55,021 

120,000 
60,000 

140,000 

0 

100,000 

61,898 

37,107 

5,545 

24,000 

12,210 

172,400 

82,400 

20,633 

12,369 

96,000 
60,000 

140,000 

100,000 

541.0p 

638.5p 

582.0p 

17/4/08 

28/6/05 

26/9/06 

613.0p 

21/12/07 

21/12/07 

613.0p 

21/12/07 

21/12/07 

735.0p 

735.0p 

655.0p 
655.0p 

23/9/08 
23/9/08 

767.5p 

13/10/09 

778.0p 

30/7/10 

724,562 

100,000 

99,005 

29,545 

696,012 

3,955,343 

934,995 

552,543 

163,952  4,173,843 

Note 1 The number of shares shown represents the maximum number of shares that may vest, subject to any performance conditions being met. 

Note 2 No variations to the terms and conditions of plan interests were made during the year. 

Note 3 The performance and other conditions that apply to outstanding awards under the annual bonus share matching plan and the long-term incentive plan and that have yet to be met were set out in the 
reports on directors’ remuneration for the years in which they were granted. 

Note 4 In the case of the long-term incentive plan awards made on 21 December 2004 and 23 September 2005, we detail separately the part of the award based on ROIC and EPS growth (two thirds of total 
award) and that part based on relative TSR (one third of total award), because vesting of that part of the awards based on TSR was not known at the date of the 2006 and 2007 reports. 

47    Pearson Annual Report and Accounts 2007 

 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
Report on Directors’ Remuneration continued 

Table 5: Movements in directors’ interests in share options 
Shares under option are designated as: a executive; b worldwide save for shares; c premium priced; d long-term incentive; and * where options 
are exercisable. 

Date of grant 

1 Jan 07 

Granted 

Exercised 

Lapsed 

31 Dec 07 

Option price 

Earliest 
exercise date 

Expiry  date 

Date of 
exercise 

Price on
exercise 

Gain on
exercise 

Marjorie Scardino 

a* 

a* 

c* 

c* 

c 

d* 

d* 

d* 

d* 

14/9/98 

14/9/98 

8/6/99 

8/6/99 

3/5/00 

9/5/01 

9/5/01 

9/5/01 

9/5/01 

176,556 

5,660 

37,583 

37,583 

36,983 

41,550 

41,550 

41,550 

41,550 

176,556 

973.3p 

5,660 

1090.0p 

37,583 

37,583 

1372.4p 

1647.5p 

36,983 

0 

3224.3p 

41,550 

41,550 

41,550 

41,550 

1421.0p 

1421.0p 

1421.0p 

1421.0p 

14/9/01 

14/9/01 

14/9/08 

14/9/08 

8/6/02 

8/6/02 

3/5/03 

9/5/02 

9/5/03 

9/5/04 

9/5/05 

8/6/09 

8/6/09 

3/5/10 

9/5/11 

9/5/11 

9/5/11 

9/5/11 

Total 

460,565 

0 

0 

36,983 

423,582 

£0 

David Bell 
a* 

14/9/98 

b* 

b 

b 

b 

c* 

c* 

c 

d* 

d* 

d* 

d* 

30/4/04 

6/5/05 

5/5/06 

4/5/07 

8/6/99 

8/6/99 

3/5/00 

9/5/01 

9/5/01 

9/5/01 

9/5/01 

Total 

Rona Fairhead 

30/4/04 

4/5/07 

1/11/01 

1/11/01 

1/11/01 

b* 

b 

d* 

d* 

d* 

Total 

1/8/07 

789.0p 

£3,360 

20,496 

1,142 

373 

297 

0 

18,705 

18,705 

18,686 

16,350 

16,350 

16,350 

16,350 

1,142 

821 

20,496 

0 

373 

297 

821 

973.3p 

494.8p 

507.6p 

629.6p 

690.4p 

18,705 

18,705 

1372.4p 

1647.5p 

18,686 

0 

3224.3p 

16,350 

16,350 

16,350 

16,350 

1421.0p 

1421.0p 

1421.0p 

1421.0p 

14/9/01 

14/9/08 

1/8/07 

1/8/08 

1/8/09 

1/8/10 

8/6/02 

8/6/02 

3/5/03 

9/5/02 

9/5/03 

9/5/04 

9/5/05 

1/2/08 

1/2/09 

1/2/10 

1/2/11 

8/6/09 

8/6/09 

3/5/10 

9/5/11 

9/5/11 

9/5/11 

9/5/11 

143,804 

821 

1,142 

18,686 

124,797 

£3,360 

1,904 

0 

2,371 

20,000 

20,000 

20,000 

61,904 

2,371 

0 

0 

1,904 

2,371 

20,000 

20,000 

20,000 

64,275 

494.8p 

690.4p 

822.0p 

822.0p 

822.0p 

1/8/07 

1/8/12 

1/11/02 

1/11/03 

1/11/04 

1/2/08 

1/2/13 

1/11/11 

1/11/11 

1/11/11 

£0 

48    Pearson Annual Report and Accounts 2007 

 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
Table 5: Movements in directors’ interests in share options continued 
Shares under option are designated as: a executive; b worldwide save for shares; c premium priced; d long-term incentive; and * where options 
are exercisable. 

Date of grant 

1 Jan 07 

Granted 

Exercised 

Lapsed 

31 Dec 07 

Option price 

Earliest
exercise date 

Expiry  date 

Date of 
exercise 

Price on
exercise 

Gain on
exercise 

Robin Freestone 

6/5/05 

b 

Total 

John Makinson 
a* 

12/9/97 

14/9/98 

9/5/03 

8/6/99 

8/6/99 

3/5/00 

9/5/01 

9/5/01 

9/5/01 

9/5/01 

a* 

b  

c* 

c* 

c 

d* 

d* 

d* 

d* 

Total 

Total 

1,866 

1,866 

73,920 

30,576 

4,178 

21,477 

21,477 

21,356 

19,785 

19,785 

19,785 

19,785 

0 

0 

0 

73,920 

1,866 

1,866 

0 

30,576 

4,178 

21,477 

21,477 

676.4p 

973.3p 

424.8p 

1372.4p 

1647.5p 

21,356 

0 

3224.3p 

19,785 

19,785 

19,785 

19,785 

1421.0p 

1421.0p 

1421.0p 

1421.0p 

507.6p 

1/8/08 

1/2/09 

£0 

12/9/00 

14/9/01 

12/9/07 

14/9/08 

25/6/07 

836.5p 

£118,346 

1/8/10 

8/6/02 

8/6/02 

3/5/03 

9/5/02 

9/5/03 

9/5/04 

9/5/05 

1/2/11 

8/6/09 

8/6/09 

3/5/10 

9/5/11 

9/5/11 

9/5/11 

9/5/11 

252,124 

920,263 

0 

3,192 

73,920 

75,062 

21,356 

156,848 

77,025 

771,368 

£118,346 

£121,706 

Note 1 No variations to the terms and conditions of share options were made during the year. 

Note 2 Each plan is described below. 

a Executive – The plans under which these options were granted were replaced with the introduction of the long-term incentive plan in 2001. No executive options have been granted to the directors since 1998. 

All options that remain outstanding are exercisable (all performance conditions having already been met prior to 2007) and lapse if they remain unexercised at the tenth anniversary of the date of grant. 

Marjorie Scardino, David Bell, and John Makinson hold options under this plan. Details of these awards are itemised as a. 

b Worldwide save for shares – The acquisition of shares under the worldwide save for shares plan is not subject to the satisfaction of a performance target. 

David Bell, Rona Fairhead, Robin Freestone and John Makinson hold options under this plan. Details of these holdings are itemised as b. 

c Premium priced – The plan under which these options were granted was replaced with the introduction of the long-term incentive plan in 2001. No Premium Priced Options (PPOs) have been granted to the 
directors since 1999. 

The share price targets for the three-year and five-year tranches of PPOs granted in 1999 have already been met prior to 2007. The share price target for the seven-year tranche of PPOs granted in 2000 was not 
met in 2007 and the options lapsed. The secondary real growth in earnings per share target for any PPOs to become exercisable has already been met prior to 2007. 

All PPOs that remain outstanding lapse if they remain unexercised at the tenth anniversary of the date of grant. 

Marjorie Scardino, David Bell, and John Makinson hold PPOs under this plan. Details of these awards are itemised as c. 

d Long-term incentive – All options that remain outstanding are exercisable and lapse if they remain unexercised at the tenth anniversary of the date of grant. 

Details of the option grants under this plan for Marjorie Scardino, David Bell, Rona Fairhead, and John Makinson are itemised as d. 

Note 3 In addition, Marjorie Scardino contributes US$1,000 per month (the maximum allowed) to the US employee stock purchase plan. The terms of this plan allow participants to make monthly contributions 
for one year and to acquire shares at the end of that period at a price that is the lower of the market price at the beginning or the end of the period, both less 15%. 

Note 4 The market price on 31 December 2007 was 732.0p per share and the range during the year was 694.5p to 914.5p. 

Approved by the board and signed on its behalf by 

David Arculus, Director, 13 March 2008 

49    Pearson Annual Report and Accounts 2007 

 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
Consolidated Income Statement 
Year ended 31 December 2007 

All figures in £ millions 

Continuing operations 

Sales 

Cost of goods sold 

Gross profit 
Operating expenses 

Share of results of joint ventures and associates 

Operating profit 
Finance costs 

Finance income  

Profit before tax 

Income tax 

Profit for the year from continuing operations 
(Loss)/profit for the year from discontinued operations 

Profit for the year 

Attributable to: 

Equity holders of the Company 

Minority interest 

Earnings per share for profit from continuing and discontinued operations attributable to the equity holders of the 
Company during the year (expressed in pence per share) 
– basic 

– diluted 

Earnings per share for profit from continuing operations attributable to the equity holders of the Company during the 
year (expressed in pence per share) 

– basic 

– diluted 

Consolidated Statement of Recognised Income and Expense 
Year ended 31 December 2007 

All figures in £ millions 

Net exchange differences on translation of foreign operations 

Actuarial gains on retirement benefit obligations 

Taxation on items charged to equity 

Net income/(expense) recognised directly in equity 
Profit for the year 

Total recognised income and expense for the year 

Attributable to: 

Equity holders of the Company 

Minority interest 

50    Pearson Annual Report and Accounts 2007 

Notes 

2007 

2006 

2 

4 

4 

12 

2 

6 

6 

7 

3 

8 

8 

8 

8 

Notes 

28 

24 

7 

4,162 

(1,910)

2,252 
(1,701)

23 

574 
(150)

44 

468 

(131)

337 
(27)

310 

284 

26 

3,990 

(1,841)

2,149 
(1,651)

24 

522 
(133)

59 

448 

(4)

444 
25 

469 

446 

23 

35.6p 

35.6p 

55.9p 

55.8p 

39.0p 

39.0p 

52.7p 

52.6p 

2007 

25 

80 

29 

134 
310 

444 

418 

26 

2006 

(417)

107 

12 

(298)
469 

171 

148 

23 

 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
Consolidated Balance Sheet 
As at 31 December 2007 

All figures in £ millions 

Assets 

Non-current assets 

Property, plant and equipment 

Intangible assets 

Investments in joint ventures and associates 

Deferred income tax assets 

Financial assets – Derivative financial instruments 

Retirement benefit assets 

Other financial assets  

Other receivables 

Current assets 

Intangible assets – Pre-publication 

Inventories 

Trade and other receivables 

Financial assets – Derivative financial instruments 

Financial assets – Marketable securities 

Cash and cash equivalents (excluding overdrafts) 

Non-current assets classified as held for sale 

Total assets 

Liabilities 
Non-current liabilities 

Financial liabilities – Borrowings 

Financial liabilities – Derivative financial instruments 

Deferred income tax liabilities 

Retirement benefit obligations 

Provisions for other liabilities and charges 
Other liabilities 

Current liabilities 

Trade and other liabilities 

Financial liabilities – Borrowings 

Current income tax liabilities 

Provisions for other liabilities and charges 

Liabilities directly associated with non-current assets classified as held for sale 

Total liabilities 

Net assets 

Equity 
Share capital 

Share premium 

Treasury shares 

Other reserves 

Retained earnings 

Total equity attributable to equity holders of the Company 
Minority interest 

Total equity 

Notes 

2007 

2006 

10 

11 

12 

13 

16 

24 

15 

19 

17 

18 

19 

16 

20 

30 

21 

16 

13 

24 

22 

23 

23 

21 

22 

30 

26 

26 

27 

28 

28 

355 

3,814 

20 

328 

23 

62 

52 

129 

4,783 

450 

368 

946 

28 

40 

560 

2,392 
117 

2,509 

7,292 

348 

3,581 

20 

417 

36 

– 

17 

124 

4,543 

402 

354 

953 

50 

25 

592 

2,376 
294 

2,670 

7,213 

(1,049)

(1,148)

(16)

(287)

(95)

(44)
(190)

(19)

(245)

(250)

(29)
(162)

(1,681)

(1,853)

(1,050)

(559)

(96)

(23)

(1,728)
(9)

(3,418)

3,874 

202 

2,499 

(216)

(514)

1,724 

3,695 
179 

3,874 

(998)

(595)

(74)

(23)

(1,690)
(26)

(3,569)

3,644 

202 

2,487 

(189)

(592)

1,568 

3,476 
168 

3,644 

These financial statements have been approved for issue by the board of directors on 13 March 2008 and signed on its behalf by 

Robin Freestone, Chief financial officer

51    Pearson Annual Report and Accounts 2007 

 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
Notes 

2007 

2006 

32 

659 

(109)

(87)

463 

621 

(106)

(59)

456 

29 

(472)

(363)

(4)

(86)

14 

(33)

469 

19 

32 

(61)

12 

(72)

272 

(15)

(391)

(2)

(238)

(10)

(444)

3 

(39)

531 

492 

(4)

(68)

8 

(29)

10 

24 

45 

(377)

11 

(36)

84 

(24)

(145)

(3)

(220)

(15)

(348)

(44)

(313)

844 

531 

32 

31 

26 

9 

20 

Consolidated Cash Flow Statement 
Year ended 31 December 2007 

All figures in £ millions 

Cash flows from operating activities 

Net cash generated from operations 

Interest paid 

Tax paid 

Net cash generated from operating activities 
Cash flows from investing activities 

Acquisition of subsidiaries, net of cash acquired 

Acquisition of joint ventures and associates 

Purchase of property, plant and equipment (PPE) 

Proceeds from sale of PPE 

Purchase of intangible assets 

Disposal of subsidiaries, net of cash disposed 

Interest received 

Dividends received from joint ventures and associates 

Net cash used in investing activities 
Cash flows from financing activities 

Proceeds from issue of ordinary shares 

Purchase of treasury shares 

Proceeds from borrowings 

Liquid resources acquired 

Repayment of borrowings 

Finance lease principal payments 

Dividends paid to Company’s shareholders 

Dividends paid to minority interests 

Net cash used in financing activities 

Effects of exchange rate changes on cash and cash equivalents 

Net decrease in cash and cash equivalents 

Cash and cash equivalents at beginning of year 

Cash and cash equivalents at end of year 

52    Pearson Annual Report and Accounts 2007 

 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
Independent Auditors’ Report to the Members of Pearson plc 

We have audited the Group and Company Financial Statements 
(together the ‘Financial Statements’) of Pearson plc for the year ended 
31 December 2007. The Group Financial Statements comprise the 
Consolidated Income Statement, the Consolidated Balance Sheet,  
the Consolidated Statement of Recognised Income and Expense,  
the Consolidated Cash Flow Statement and the related Notes to  
the Consolidated Financial Statements. The Company Financial 
Statements comprise the Company Statement of Recognised Income 
and Expense, the Company Balance Sheet, the Company Cash Flow 
Statement and the related Notes to the Company Financial Statements. 
These Financial Statements have been prepared under the accounting 
policies set out therein. We have also audited the information in  
the Report on Directors’ Remuneration that is described as having 
been audited. 

Respective responsibilities of directors and auditors 
The directors’ responsibilities for preparing the Annual Report  
and Accounts in accordance with applicable law and International 
Financial Reporting Standards (IFRSs) as adopted by the European 
Union are set out in the Statement of Directors’ Responsibilities. 

Our responsibility is to audit the Financial Statements and the part of 
the Report on Directors’ Remuneration to be audited in accordance 
with relevant legal and regulatory requirements and International 
Standards on Auditing (UK and Ireland). This report, including the 
opinion, has been prepared for and only for the Company’s members 
as a body in accordance with section 235 of the Companies Act 1985 
and for no other purpose. We do not, in giving this opinion, accept  
or assume responsibility for any other purpose or to any other person 
to whom this report is shown or into whose hands it may come save 
where expressly agreed by our prior consent in writing. 

We report to you our opinion as to whether the Financial Statements 
give a true and fair view and whether the Financial Statements and  
the part of the Report on Directors’ Remuneration to be audited  
have been properly prepared in accordance with the Companies Act 
1985 and, as regards the Group Financial Statements, Article 4 of the 
IAS Regulation. We also report to you whether in our opinion the 
information given in the Directors’ Report is consistent with the 
Financial Statements. The information given in the Directors’ Report 
includes that specific information presented in the Business Review 
that is cross referred from the Directors’ Report. 

In addition we report to you if, in our opinion, the Company has  
not kept proper accounting records, if we have not received all  
the information and explanations we require for our audit, or if 
information specified by law regarding directors’ remuneration  
and other transactions is not disclosed. 

We review whether the Corporate Governance Statement reflects the 
Company’s compliance with the nine provisions of the Combined 
Code (2006) specified for our review by the Listing Rules of the 
Financial Services Authority, and we report if it does not. We are  
not required to consider whether the Board’s statements on internal 
control cover all risks and controls, or form an opinion on the 
effectiveness of the Group’s Corporate Governance procedures  
or its risk and control procedures. 

We read other information contained in the Annual Report and 
Accounts and consider whether it is consistent with the audited 
Financial Statements. The other information comprises the Business 
Review, the Directors’ Report, the unaudited part of the Report on 
Directors’ Remuneration, and all other information referred to on  
the contents page. We consider the implications for our report if  
we become aware of any apparent misstatements or material 
inconsistencies with the Financial Statements. Our responsibilities  
do not extend to any other information. 

Basis of audit opinion 
We conducted our audit in accordance with International Standards 
on Auditing (UK and Ireland) issued by the Auditing Practices Board. 
An audit includes examination, on a test basis, of evidence relevant  
to the amounts and disclosures in the Financial Statements and the 
part of the Report on Directors’ Remuneration to be audited. It also 
includes an assessment of the significant estimates and judgments 
made by the directors in the preparation of the Financial Statements, 
and of whether the accounting policies are appropriate to the  
Group’s and Company’s circumstances, consistently applied and 
adequately disclosed. 

We planned and performed our audit so as to obtain all the 
information and explanations which we considered necessary in order 
to provide us with sufficient evidence to give reasonable assurance  
that the Financial Statements and the part of the Report on Directors’ 
Remuneration to be audited are free from material misstatement, 
whether caused by fraud or other irregularity or error. In forming our 
opinion we also evaluated the overall adequacy of the presentation of 
information in the Financial Statements and the part of the Report on 
Directors’ Remuneration to be audited. 

Opinion 
In our opinion: 

–  The Group Financial Statements give a true and fair view, in 

accordance with IFRSs as adopted by the European Union, of the 
state of the Group’s affairs as at 31 December 2007 and of its profit 
and cash flows for the year then ended; 

–  The Company Financial Statements give a true and fair view, in 
accordance with IFRSs as adopted by the European Union as 
applied in accordance with the provisions of the Companies Act 
1985, of the state of the Company’s affairs as at 31 December 2007 
and cash flows for the year then ended; 

–  The Financial Statements and the part of the Report on Directors’ 
Remuneration to be audited have been properly prepared in 
accordance with the Companies Act 1985 and, as regards the  
Group Financial Statements, Article 4 of the IAS Regulation; and 

–  The information given in the Directors’ Report is consistent with 

the Financial Statements. 

PricewaterhouseCoopers LLP 
Chartered Accountants and Registered Auditors, London 

13 March 2008 

53    Pearson Annual Report and Accounts 2007 

Notes to the Consolidated Financial Statements 

General information 
Pearson plc (the Company) and its subsidiaries (together the Group) 
are involved in the provision of information for the educational sector, 
consumer publishing and business information. 

The Company is a limited liability company incorporated and 
domiciled in England. The address of its registered office is 80 Strand, 
London WC2R 0RL. 

The Company has its primary listing on the London Stock Exchange 
but is also listed on the New York Stock Exchange. 

These consolidated financial statements were approved for issue  
by the board of directors on 13 March 2008. 

1. Accounting policies 
The principal accounting policies applied in the preparation of these 
consolidated financial statements are set out below. 

a. Basis of preparation  
These consolidated financial statements have been prepared in 
accordance with International Financial Reporting Standards (IFRS) 
and International Financial Reporting Interpretations Committee 
(IFRIC) interpretations as adopted by the European Union (EU) and 
with those parts of the Companies Act 1985 and/or the Companies  
Act 2006 (as applicable) applicable to companies reporting under 
IFRS. These consolidated financial statements are also prepared  
in accordance with IFRS as issued by the International Accounting 
Standards Board (IASB). In respect of the accounting standards 
applicable to the Group there is no difference between EU-adopted 
and IASB-adopted IFRS. The Group transitioned from UK GAAP  
to IFRS on 1 January 2003. 

These consolidated financial statements have been prepared under the 
historical cost convention as modified by the revaluation of financial 
assets and liabilities (including derivative financial instruments) at  
fair value. 

(1) Interpretations and amendments to published standards effective  
in 2007 – The Group has adopted IFRS 7 ‘Financial Instruments: 
Disclosures’ from 1 January 2007. The impact of the standard has  
been to expand the disclosures provided in these financial statements 
regarding the Group’s financial instruments (see notes 14, 16, 19 and 
21). The Group has also adopted Amendments to IAS 1 ‘Presentation 
of Financial Statements – Capital Disclosures’ which resulted in the 
presentation of its objectives, policies and processes for managing 
capital as set out in note 26. 

In addition, IFRIC 10 ‘Interim Financial Reporting and Impairment’  
is mandatory for the Group’s accounting periods beginning on or  
after 1 January 2007. Management assessed the relevance of this 
interpretation with respect to the Group’s operations and concluded 
that it is not relevant to the Group. 

(2) Standards, interpretations and amendments to published standards 
that are not yet effective – The Group has decided to adopt IFRIC 14 
‘IAS 19 – The Limit on a Defined Benefit Asset, Minimum Funding 
Requirements and their Interaction’ before its effective date  
(1 January 2008). IFRIC 14 resulted in no change to the full 
recognition of the pension asset as disclosed in note 24. 

The Group has not early adopted the following new pronouncements 
that are not yet effective: 

– IFRS 8 ‘Operating Segments’ (effective for annual reporting periods 
beginning on or after 1 January 2009). IFRS 8 requires an entity  
to adopt the ‘management approach’ to reporting on the financial 
performance of its operating segments, revise explanations of the  
basis on which the segment information is prepared and provide 
reconciliations to the amounts recognised in the income statement 
and balance sheet; 

– Amendment to IAS 23 ‘Borrowing Costs’ (effective for annual 
reporting periods beginning on or after 1 January 2009).  
The amendment to IAS 23 requires capitalisation of borrowing costs 
that relate to assets that take a substantial period of time to get ready 
for use or sale, with the exception of assets measured at fair value  
or inventories manufactured or produced in large quantities on  
a repetitive basis; 

– IFRIC 11 ‘Group and Treasury Share Transactions’ (effective  
for annual reporting periods beginning on or after 1 March 2007).  
IFRIC 11 addresses how to apply IFRS 2 Share-based Payment to 
share-based payment arrangements involving an entity’s own equity 
instruments or equity instruments of another entity in the same group. 

Management is currently assessing the impact of these new standards 
and interpretations on the Group’s financial statements. 

In addition, management has assessed the relevance of the  
following amendments and interpretations with respect to the  
Group’s operations: 

– IFRIC 13 ‘Customer Loyalty Programmes’ (effective for annual 
reporting periods beginning on or after 1 July 2008). IFRIC 13 explains 
how entities that grant loyalty award credits to customers should 
account for their obligations to provide free or discounted goods  
or services to customers who redeem award credits. As none of the  
Group entities operate a customer loyalty programme, IFRIC 13  
is not relevant to the Group’s operations; 

– IFRIC 12 ‘Service Concession Arrangements’ (effective for annual 
reporting periods beginning on or after 1 January 2008). IFRIC 12 
addresses the accounting by private-sector entities that, by contract 
with a government, participate in developing, financing, operating, 
and maintaining infrastructure assets relating to public services 
traditionally provided by governments. As none of the Group entities 
participate in these activities, IFRIC 12 is not relevant to the Group. 

(3) Critical accounting assumptions and judgements – The preparation 
of financial statements in conformity with IFRS requires the use of 
certain critical accounting assumptions. It also requires management 
to exercise its judgement in the process of applying the Group’s 
accounting policies. The areas requiring a higher degree of judgement 
or complexity, or areas where assumptions and estimates are 
significant to the consolidated financial statements, are discussed  
in the relevant accounting policies under the following headings: 

– Intangible assets:  
– Intangible assets:  
– Royalty advances  
– Taxation 
– Employee benefits:  
– Revenue recognition. 

Goodwill 
Pre-publication assets 

Pension obligations 

54    Pearson Annual Report and Accounts 2007 

 
1. Accounting policies continued 
b. Consolidation 
(1) Business combinations – The purchase method of accounting  
is used to account for the acquisition of subsidiaries by the Group.  
The cost of an acquisition is measured as the fair value of the assets 
given, equity instruments issued and liabilities incurred or assumed at 
the date of exchange, plus costs directly attributable to the acquisition. 

Where the settlement of consideration payable is deferred, or 
contingent on future events, the fair value of the deferred component 
is determined by discounting the amount payable or probable to be 
paid to its present value using an appropriate discount rate.  

Identifiable assets and contingent assets acquired and identifiable 
liabilities and contingent liabilities assumed in a business combination 
are measured initially at their fair values at the acquisition date.  
For material acquisitions, the fair value of the acquired intangible 
assets is determined by an external, independent valuer. The excess  
of the cost of acquisition over the fair value of the Group’s share of the 
identifiable net assets acquired is recorded as goodwill. See note 1e(1) 
for the accounting policy on goodwill. 

(2) Subsidiaries – Subsidiaries are entities over which the Group has  
the power to govern the financial and operating policies generally 
accompanying a shareholding of more than one half of the voting 
rights. Subsidiaries are fully consolidated from the date on which 
control is transferred to the Group and are de-consolidated from  
the date that control ceases. 

(3) Joint ventures and associates – Joint ventures are entities in which 
the Group holds an interest on a long-term basis and which are jointly 
controlled, with one or more other venturers, under a contractual 
arrangement. Associates are entities over which the Group has 
significant influence but not the power to control the financial and 
operating policies, generally accompanying a shareholding of between 
20% and 50% of the voting rights. Investments in joint ventures and 
associates are accounted for by the equity method and are initially 
recognised at cost. 

The Group’s share of its joint ventures’ and associates’ post-acquisition 
profits or losses is recognised in the income statement, and its share  
of post-acquisition movements in reserves is recognised in reserves. 
The Group’s share of its joint ventures’ and associates’ results is 
recognised as a component of operating profit as these operations 
form part of the core publishing business of the Group and an integral 
part of existing wholly owned businesses. The cumulative post-
acquisition movements are adjusted against the carrying amount of 
the investment. When the Group’s share of losses in a joint venture or 
associate equals or exceeds its interest in the joint venture or associate, 
the Group does not recognise further losses, unless the Group has 
incurred obligations or made payments on behalf of the joint venture 
or associate. 

c. Foreign currency translation 
(1) Functional and presentation currency – Items included in the 
financial statements of each of the Group’s entities are measured  
using the currency of the primary economic environment in which  
the entity operates (the ‘functional currency’). The consolidated 
financial statements are presented in sterling, which is the Company’s 
functional and presentation currency. 

(2) Transactions and balances – Foreign currency transactions are 
translated into the functional currency using the exchange rates 
prevailing at the dates of the transactions. Foreign exchange gains  
and losses resulting from the settlement of such transactions and  
from the translation at year end exchange rates of monetary assets  
and liabilities denominated in foreign currencies, are recognised  
in the income statement, except when deferred in equity as qualifying 
net investment hedges. 

Translation differences on other non-monetary items such as  
equities held at fair value are reported as part of the fair value gain  
or loss through the income statement. Fair value adjustments on  
non-monetary items such as equities classified as available for sale 
financial assets, are included in the fair value reserve in equity. 

(3) Group companies – The results and financial position of all  
Group companies that have a functional currency different from the 
presentation currency are translated into the presentation currency  
as follows: 

i) assets and liabilities are translated at the closing rate at the date  
of the balance sheet; 

ii) income and expenses are translated at average exchange rates; 

iii) all resulting exchange differences are recognised as a separate 
component of equity. 

On consolidation, exchange differences arising from the translation  
of the net investment in foreign entities, and of borrowings and other 
currency instruments designated as hedges of such investments, are 
taken to shareholders’ equity. The Group treats specific inter-company 
loan balances, which are not intended to be repaid in the foreseeable 
future, as part of its net investment. When a foreign entity is sold, such 
exchange differences are recognised in the income statement as part of 
the gain or loss on sale.  

At the date of transition to IFRS the cumulative translation differences 
in respect of foreign operations have been deemed to be zero.  
Any gains and losses on disposals of foreign operations will exclude 
translation differences that arose prior to the transition date. 

The principal overseas currency for the Group is the US dollar.  
The average rate for the year against sterling was $2.00 (2006: $1.84) 
and the year end rate was $1.99 (2006: $1.96). 

d. Property, plant and equipment 
Property, plant and equipment is stated at historical cost less 
depreciation.  Land is not depreciated. Depreciation on other assets  
is calculated using the straight-line method to allocate their cost to 
their residual values over their estimated useful lives as follows: 

Buildings (freehold):  20–50 years 

Buildings (leasehold):  50 years (or over the period of the  

lease if shorter) 

Plant and equipment:  3–20 years 

The assets’ residual values and useful lives are reviewed, and adjusted  
if appropriate, at each balance sheet date. 

The carrying value of an asset is written down to its recoverable 
amount if the carrying value of the asset is greater than its estimated 
recoverable amount. 

55    Pearson Annual Report and Accounts 2007 

 
 
Notes to the Consolidated Financial Statements continued 

1. Accounting policies continued 
e. Intangible assets 
(1) Goodwill – Goodwill represents the excess of the cost of an 
acquisition over the fair value of the Group’s share of the net 
identifiable assets of the acquired subsidiary or associate at the date  
of acquisition. Goodwill on acquisitions of subsidiaries is included  
in intangible assets. Goodwill on acquisitions of associates and joint 
ventures is included in investments in associates and joint ventures.  

Goodwill is tested annually for impairment and carried at cost  
less accumulated impairment losses. The recoverable amounts of  
cash-generating units have been determined based on value in use 
calculations. These calculations require the use of estimates (see note 
11). Goodwill is allocated to cash-generating units for the purpose of 
impairment testing. The allocation is made to those cash-generating 
units that are expected to benefit from the business combination in 
which the goodwill arose.  

Gains and losses on the disposal of an entity include the carrying 
amount of goodwill relating to the entity sold.  

IFRS 3 ‘Business Combinations’ has not been applied retrospectively to 
business combinations before the date of transition to IFRS. Subject to 
the transition adjustments to IFRS required by IFRS 1, the accounting 
for business combinations before the date of transition has been 
grandfathered. 

(2) Acquired software – Software separately acquired for internal  
use is capitalised at cost. Software acquired in material business 
combinations is capitalised at its fair value as determined by an 
independent valuer. Acquired software is amortised on a straight-line 
basis over its estimated useful life of between three and five years. 

(3) Internally developed software – Internal and external costs incurred 
during the preliminary stage of developing computer software for 
internal use are expensed as incurred. Internal and external costs 
incurred to develop computer software for internal use during the 
application development stage are capitalised if the Group expects 
economic benefits from the development. Capitalisation in the 
application development stage begins once the Group can reliably 
measure the expenditure attributable to the software development  
and has demonstrated its intention to complete and use the software. 
Internally developed software is amortised on a straight-line basis  
over its estimated useful life of between three and five years. 

(4) Acquired intangible assets – Acquired intangible assets comprise 
publishing rights, customer lists and relationships, technology, trade 
names and trademarks. These assets are capitalised on acquisition at 
cost and included in intangible assets. Intangible assets acquired in 
material business combinations are capitalised at their fair value as 
determined by an independent valuer. Intangible assets are amortised 
over their estimated useful lives of between two and 20 years, using a 
depreciation method that reflects the pattern of their consumption. 

(5) Pre-publication assets – Pre-publication costs represent direct  
costs incurred in the development of educational programmes and 
titles prior to their publication. These costs are recognised as current 
intangible assets where the title will generate probable future economic 
benefits and costs can be measured reliably. Pre-publication assets are 
amortised upon publication of the title over estimated economic lives 
of five years or less, being an estimate of the expected operating life 
cycle of the title, with a higher proportion of the amortisation taken  
in the earlier years. The investment in pre-publication assets has been 
disclosed as part of cash generated from operations in the cash flow 
statement (see note 32). 

The assessment of the recoverability of pre-publication assets and the 
determination of the amortisation profile involve a significant degree 
of judgement based on historical trends and management estimation 
of future potential sales. An incorrect amortisation profile could result 
in excess amounts being carried forward as intangible assets that would 
otherwise have been written off to the income statement in an earlier 
period. Reviews are performed regularly to estimate recoverability of 
pre-publication assets. The carrying amount of pre-publication assets 
is set out in note 17. 

f. Other financial assets 
Other financial assets, designated as available for sale investments,  
are non-derivative financial assets measured at estimated fair value. 
Changes in the fair value are recorded in equity in the fair value 
reserve. On the subsequent disposal of the asset, the net fair value  
gains or losses are taken through the income statement. 

g. Inventories 
Inventories are stated at the lower of cost and net realisable value.  
Cost is determined using the first in first out (FIFO) method.  
The cost of finished goods and work in progress comprises raw 
materials, direct labour, other direct costs and related production 
overheads. Net realisable value is the estimated selling price in the 
ordinary course of business, less estimated costs necessary to make  
the sale. Provisions are made for slow moving and obsolete stock. 

h. Royalty advances 
Advances of royalties to authors are included within trade and other 
receivables when the advance is paid less any provision required to 
adjust the advance to its net realisable value. The realisable value of 
royalty advances relies on a degree of management judgement in 
determining the profitability of individual author contracts. If the 
estimated realisable value of author contracts is overstated then this 
will have an adverse effect on operating profits as these excess amounts 
will be written off.  

The recoverability of royalty advances is based upon an annual  
detailed management review of the age of the advance, the future sales 
projections for new authors and prior sales history of repeat authors. 
The royalty advance is expensed at the contracted or effective royalty 
rate as the related revenues are earned. Royalty advances which will be 
consumed within one year are held in current assets. Royalty advances 
which will be consumed after one year are held in non-current assets. 

i. Newspaper development costs 
Investment in the development of newspaper titles consists of 
measures to increase the volume and geographical spread of 
circulation. The measures include additional and enhanced editorial 
content, extended distribution and remote printing. These costs are 
expensed as incurred as they do not meet the criteria under IAS 38  
to be capitalised as intangible assets. 

j. Cash and cash equivalents  
Cash and cash equivalents in the cash flow statement include cash in 
hand, deposits held at call with banks, other short-term highly liquid 
investments with original maturities of three months or less, and bank 
overdrafts. Bank overdrafts are included in borrowings in current 
liabilities in the balance sheet. 

Short-term deposits and marketable securities with maturities of 
greater than three months do not qualify as cash and cash equivalents. 
Movements on these financial instruments are classified as cash flows 
from financing activities in the cash flow statement as these amounts 
are used to offset the borrowings of the Group. 

56    Pearson Annual Report and Accounts 2007 

 
1. Accounting policies continued 
k. Share capital 
Ordinary shares are classified as equity. 

Incremental costs directly attributable to the issue of new shares  
or options are shown in equity as a deduction, net of tax, from  
the proceeds. 

Where any Group company purchases the Company’s equity share 
capital (Treasury shares) the consideration paid, including any directly 
attributable incremental costs (net of income taxes) is deducted from 
equity attributable to the Company’s equity holders until the shares are 
cancelled, reissued or disposed of. Where such shares are subsequently 
sold or reissued, any consideration received, net of any directly 
attributable transaction costs and the related income tax effects,  
is included in equity attributable to the Company’s equity holders. 

l. Borrowings 
Borrowings are recognised initially at fair value, which is proceeds 
received net of transaction costs incurred. Borrowings are 
subsequently stated at amortised cost with any difference between the 
proceeds (net of transaction costs) and the redemption value being 
recognised in the income statement over the period of the borrowings 
using the effective interest method. Accrued interest is included as  
part of borrowings. Where a debt instrument is in a fair value hedging 
relationship, an adjustment is made to its carrying value to reflect the 
hedged risk. Interest on borrowings is expensed as incurred. 

m. Derivative financial instruments 
Derivatives are recognised at fair value and remeasured at each  
balance sheet date. The fair value of derivatives is determined by using 
market data and the use of established estimation techniques such  
as discounted cash flow and option valuation models. The Group 
designates certain of the derivative instruments within its portfolio to 
be hedges of the fair value of its bonds (fair value hedges) or hedges  
of net investments in foreign operations (net investment hedges). 

Changes in the fair value of derivatives that are designated and qualify 
as fair value hedges are recorded in the income statement, together 
with any changes in the fair value of the hedged asset or liability that 
are attributable to the hedged risk. 

The effective portion of changes in the fair value of derivatives that  
are designated and qualify as net investment hedges are recognised  
in equity. Gains and losses accumulated in equity are included in  
the income statement when the corresponding foreign operation  
is disposed of. Gains or losses relating to the ineffective portion are 
recognised immediately in finance income or finance costs in the 
income statement. 

Certain derivatives do not qualify or are not designated as hedging 
instruments. Such derivatives are classified at fair value and any 
movement in their fair value is recognised immediately in finance 
income or finance costs in the income statement. 

n. Taxation 
Current tax is recognised on the amounts expected to be paid or 
recovered under the tax rates and laws that have been enacted or 
substantively enacted at the balance sheet date.  

Deferred income tax is provided, using the liability method, on 
temporary differences arising between the tax bases of assets and 
liabilities and their carrying amounts. Deferred income tax is 
determined using tax rates and laws that have been enacted or  

substantively enacted by the balance sheet date and are expected to 
apply when the related deferred tax asset is realised or the deferred 
income tax liability is settled. 

Deferred tax assets are recognised to the extent that it is probable that 
future taxable profit will be available against which the temporary 
differences can be utilised. 

Deferred income tax is provided in respect of the undistributed 
earnings of subsidiaries other than where it is intended that those 
undistributed earnings will not be remitted in the foreseeable future. 

Current and deferred tax are recognised in the income statement, 
except when the tax relates to items charged or credited directly to 
equity, in which case the tax is also recognised in equity. 

The Group is subject to income taxes in numerous jurisdictions. 
Significant judgement is required in determining the estimates in 
relation to the worldwide provision for income taxes. There are many 
transactions and calculations for which the ultimate tax determination 
is uncertain during the ordinary course of business. The Group 
recognises liabilities for anticipated tax audit issues based on estimates 
of whether additional taxes will be due. Where the final tax outcome  
of these matters is different from the amounts that were initially 
recorded, such differences will impact the income tax and deferred  
tax provisions in the period in which such determination is made. 

Deferred tax assets and liabilities require management judgement in 
determining the amounts to be recognised. In particular, significant 
judgement is used when assessing the extent to which deferred tax 
assets should be recognised with consideration given to the timing  
and level of future taxable income together with any future tax 
planning strategies. 

o. Employee benefits 
(1) Pension obligations – The retirement benefit asset/obligation 
recognised in the balance sheet represents the present value of the 
defined benefit obligation, less the fair value of plan assets at the 
balance sheet date. The defined benefit obligation is calculated 
annually by independent actuaries using the projected unit credit 
method. The present value of the defined benefit obligation is 
determined by discounting estimated future cash flows using yields  
on high quality corporate bonds which have terms to maturity 
approximating the terms of the related liability. 

The determination of the pension cost and defined benefit obligation 
of the Group’s defined benefit pension schemes depends on the 
selection of certain assumptions, which include the discount rate, 
inflation rate, salary growth, longevity and expected return on  
scheme assets. 

Actuarial gains and losses arising from differences between actual and 
expected returns on plan assets, experience adjustments on liabilities 
and changes in actuarial assumptions are recognised immediately in 
the statement of recognised income and expense. 

The service cost, representing benefits accruing over the year, is 
included in the income statement as an operating cost. The unwinding 
of the discount rate on the scheme liabilities and the expected return 
on scheme assets are presented as finance costs or finance income. 

Obligations for contributions to defined contribution pension plans 
are recognised as an operating expense in the income statement  
as incurred. 

57    Pearson Annual Report and Accounts 2007 

Notes to the Consolidated Financial Statements continued 

1. Accounting policies continued 
(2) Other post-retirement obligations – The expected costs of post-
retirement healthcare and life assurance benefits are accrued over the 
period of employment, using a similar accounting methodology as for 
defined benefit pension obligations. The liabilities and costs relating to 
material other post-retirement obligations are assessed annually by 
independent qualified actuaries. 

(3) Share-based payments –The fair value of options or shares  
granted under the Group’s share and option plans is recognised as an 
employee expense after taking into account the Group’s best estimate 
of the number of awards expected to vest. Fair value is measured at  
the date of grant and is spread over the vesting period of the option  
or share. The fair value of the options granted is measured using an 
option model that is most appropriate to the award. The fair value of 
shares awarded is measured using the share price at the date of grant 
unless another method is more appropriate. Any proceeds received  
are credited to share capital and share premium when the options  
are exercised. The Group has applied IFRS 2 ‘Share-based Payment’ 
retrospectively to all options granted but not fully vested at the date  
of transition to IFRS. 

p. Provisions 
Provisions are recognised if the Group has a present legal or 
constructive obligation as a result of past events, it is more likely than 
not that an outflow of resources will be required to settle the obligation 
and the amount can be reliably estimated. Provisions are discounted to 
present value where the effect is material. 

The Group recognises a provision for deferred consideration in the 
period in which the payment of the deferred consideration is probable. 

The Group recognises a provision for onerous lease contracts when  
the expected benefits to be derived from a contract are less than the 
unavoidable costs of meeting the obligations under the contract.  
The provision is based on the present value of future payments for 
surplus leased properties under non-cancellable operating leases,  
net of estimated sub-leasing revenue. 

q. Revenue recognition 
Revenue comprises the fair value of the consideration received or 
receivable for the sale of goods and services net of value-added tax  
and other sales taxes, rebates and discounts, and after eliminating  
sales within the Group. 

Revenue from the sale of books is recognised when title passes.  
A provision for anticipated returns is made based primarily on 
historical return rates. If these estimates do not reflect actual returns  
in future periods then revenues could be understated or overstated  
for a particular period.  

Circulation and advertising revenue is recognised when the newspaper 
or other publication is published. Subscription revenue is recognised 
on a straight-line basis over the life of the subscription. 

Where a contractual arrangement consists of two or more separate 
elements that can be provided to customers either on a stand-alone 
basis or as an optional extra, such as the provision of supplementary 
materials with textbooks, revenue is recognised for each element as  
if it were an individual contractual arrangement. 

Revenue from multi-year contractual arrangements, such as contracts 
to process qualifying tests for individual professions and government 
departments, is recognised as performance occurs. The assumptions, 
risks, and uncertainties inherent in long-term contract accounting  
can affect the amounts and timing of revenue and related expenses 
reported. Certain of these arrangements, either as a result of a single 
service spanning more than one reporting period or where the 
contract requires the provision of a number of services that together 
constitute a single project, are treated as long-term contracts with 
revenue recognised on a percentage of completion basis. Losses on 
contracts are recognised in the period in which the loss first becomes 
foreseeable. Contract losses are determined to be the amount by  
which estimated total costs of the contract exceed the estimated total 
revenues that will be generated by the contract. 

On certain contracts, where the Group acts as agent, only commissions 
and fees receivable for services rendered are recognised as revenue. 
Any third party costs incurred on behalf of the principal that are 
rechargeable under the contractual arrangement are not included  
in revenue. 

Income from recharges of freight and other activities which are 
incidental to the normal revenue generating activities is included  
in other income. 

r. Leases 
Leases of property, plant and equipment where the Group has 
substantially all the risks and rewards of ownership are classified as 
finance leases. Finance leases are capitalised at the commencement  
of the lease at the lower of the fair value of the leased property and the 
present value of the minimum lease payments. Each lease payment  
is allocated between the liability and finance charges to achieve a 
constant rate on the finance balance outstanding. The corresponding 
rental obligations, net of finance charges, are included in financial 
liabilities – borrowings. The interest element of the finance cost is 
charged to the income statement over the lease period to produce  
a constant periodic rate of interest on the remaining balance of the 
liability for each period. The property, plant and equipment acquired 
under finance leases is depreciated over the shorter of the useful life  
of the asset or the lease term. 

Leases where a significant portion of the risks and rewards of 
ownership are retained by the lessor are classified as operating leases  
by the lessee. Payments made under operating leases (net of any 
incentives received from the lessor) are charged to the income 
statement on a straight-line basis over the period of the lease. 

s. Dividends 
Dividends are recorded in the Group’s financial statements in the 
period in which they are approved by the Company’s shareholders. 
Interim dividends are recorded in the period in which they are 
approved and paid. 

t. Non-current assets held for sale and discontinued operations 
Non-current assets are classified as assets held for sale and stated  
at the lower of carrying amount and fair value less costs to sell if it is 
intended to recover their carrying amount principally through a sale 
transaction rather than through continuing use. No depreciation  
is charged in respect of non-current assets classified as held for sale. 
Amounts relating to non-current assets held for sale are classified as 
discontinued operations in the income statement where appropriate. 

u. Trade receivables 
Trade receivables are stated at fair value less provision for bad and 
doubtful debts and anticipated future sales returns (see also note 1q). 

58    Pearson Annual Report and Accounts 2007 

 
2. Segment information 
Due to the differing risks and rewards associated with each business segment and the different customer focus of each segment, the Group’s 
primary segment reporting format is by business. The Group is organised into the following five business segments: 

School –  publisher of textbooks and web-based learning tools, provider of testing and software services for primary and secondary schools;  

Higher Education –  publisher of textbooks and related course materials for colleges and universities; 

Penguin – publisher with brand imprints such as Penguin, Putnam, Berkley, Viking, Dorling Kindersley; 

FT Publishing – publisher of the Financial Times, other business newspapers, magazines and specialist information; 

Interactive Data – provider of financial and business information to financial institutions and retail investors. 

The remaining business group, Professional, brings together a number of education publishing, testing and services businesses that publish 
texts, reference and interactive products for industry professionals and does not meet the criteria for classification as a ‘segment’ under IFRS. 
For more detail on the services and products included in each business segment refer to the Business Review. 

Primary reporting format – business segments 

All figures in £ millions 

Continuing operations 

Sales (external) 

Sales (inter-segment) 

Operating profit before joint ventures and 
associates 
Share of results of joint ventures and 
associates 

Operating profit 

Finance costs 

Finance income 

Profit before tax 

Income tax  

Profit for the year from continuing 
operations 

Reconciliation to adjusted operating profit 
Operating profit 

Amortisation of acquired intangibles 

Adjusted operating profit – continuing 
operations 

Segment assets 
Joint ventures 

Associates 

Assets – continuing operations 

Assets – discontinued operations 

Total assets 

Total liabilities 

Other segment items 

Capital expenditure  

Depreciation  

Amortisation  

Notes 

School 

Higher 
Education 

Professional 

FT 
Publishing 

Interactive  
Data 

Penguin 

Corporate 

Group 

2007 

1,537 

1 

169 

6 

175 

793 

– 

159 

– 

159 

298 

– 

26 

1 

27 

344 

– 

34 

16 

50 

175 

28 

203 

2,780 
5 

3 

159 

2 

161 

1,742 
– 

1 

2,788 

1,743 

– 

2,788 

(798)

147 

22 

124 

– 

1,743 

(266)

98 

11 

80 

27 

1 

28 

318 
– 

– 

318 

117 

435 

(130)

20 

9 

11 

50 

6 

56 

397 
4 

5 

406 

– 

406 

(251)

28 

9 

9 

344 

– 

90 

– 

90 

90 

7 

97 

330 
– 

– 

330 

– 

330 

846 

19 

73 

– 

73 

73 

1 

74 

937 
2 

– 

939 

– 

939 

– 

– 

– 

– 

– 

– 

– 

– 

651 
– 

– 

651 

– 

651 

4,162 

20 

551 

23 

574 

(150)

44 

468 

(131)

337 

574 

45 

619 

7,155 
11 

9 

7,175 

117 

7,292 

(129) 

(220) 

(1,624)

(3,418)

19 

10 

8 

44 

7 

30 

– 

– 

– 

356 

68 

262 

6 

6 

7 

12 

12 

10, 11, 17 

10 

11, 17 

59    Pearson Annual Report and Accounts 2007 

 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
Notes to the Consolidated Financial Statements continued 

2. Segment information continued 

All figures in £ millions 

Continuing operations 

Sales (external) 

Sales (inter-segment) 

Operating profit before joint ventures and 
associates 
Share of results of joint ventures and 
associates 

Operating profit 

Finance costs 

Finance income 

Profit before tax 

Income tax  

Profit for the year from continuing 
operations 

Reconciliation to adjusted operating profit 
Operating profit 

Adjustment to goodwill on recognition of 
pre-acquisition deferred tax 

Amortisation of acquired intangibles 

Other net gains and losses of associates 

Other net finance costs of associates 

Adjusted operating profit – continuing 
operations 

Segment assets 
Joint ventures 

Associates 

Assets – continuing operations 

Assets – discontinued operations 

Total assets 

Total liabilities 

Other segment items 

Capital expenditure 

Depreciation  

Amortisation  

Notes 

School 

Higher
Education 

Professional 

FT
Publishing 

Interactive 
Data 

Penguin 

Corporate 

Group 

2006 

1,455 

1 

161 

6 

167 

795 

– 

161 

– 

161 

280 

– 

23 

1 

24 

280 

– 

13 

17 

30 

332 

– 

82 

– 

82 

848 

18 

58 

– 

58 

– 

– 

– 

– 

– 

– 

– 

– 

– 

– 

– 

703 
– 

– 

703 

– 

703 

3,990 

19 

498 

24 

522 

(133)

59 

448 

(4)

444 

522 

7 

28 

(4)

(1)

552 

6,899 
12 

8 

6,919 

294 

7,213 

82 

58 

– 

7 

– 

– 

89 

314 
– 

– 

314 

– 

314 

7 

1 

– 

– 

66 

954 
3 

– 

957 

– 

957 

(131) 

(269) 

(1,762)

(3,569)

20 

13 

7 

38 

7 

34 

– 

– 

– 

319 

77 

261 

6 

6 

7 

12 

12 

10, 11, 17 

10 

11, 17 

167 

161 

24 

– 

17 

– 

– 

– 

– 

– 

– 

184 

161 

2,684 
5 

4 

1,347 
– 

– 

2,693 

1,347 

– 

2,693 

(662)

124 

21 

117 

– 

1,347 

(268)

88 

8 

78 

– 

1 

– 

– 

25 

580 
– 

– 

580 

294 

874 

(177)

30 

19 

21 

30 

– 

2 

(4)

(1)

27 

317 
4 

4 

325 

– 

325 

(300)

19 

9 

4 

In 2007, sales from the provision of goods were £3,086m (2006: £3,031m) and sales from the provision of services were £1,076m (2006: 
£959m). Sales from the Group’s educational publishing, consumer publishing and newspaper business are classified as being from the 
provision of goods and sales from its assessment and testing, market pricing, corporate training and management service businesses are 
classified as being from the provision of services. 

Corporate costs are allocated to business segments on an appropriate basis depending on the nature of the cost and therefore the segment result 
is equal to the Group operating profit. Inter-segment pricing is determined on an arm’s length basis. Segment assets consist of property, plant 
and equipment, intangible assets, inventories, receivables, retirement benefit assets and deferred taxation and exclude cash and cash equivalents 
and derivative assets. Segment liabilities comprise operating liabilities and retirement benefit obligations and exclude borrowings and derivative 
liabilities. Corporate assets and liabilities comprise cash and cash equivalents, marketable securities, borrowings and derivative financial 
instruments. Capital expenditure comprises additions to property, plant and equipment and intangible assets, including pre-publication but 
excluding goodwill (see notes 10, 11 and 17).  

Property, plant and equipment and intangible assets acquired through business combination were £226m (2006: £173m) (see note 29).  
Capital expenditure, depreciation and amortisation include amounts relating to discontinued operations. Discontinued operations relate  
to Government Solutions, Datamark, Les Echos and the Data Management business (see note 3). 

60    Pearson Annual Report and Accounts 2007 

 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
2. Segment information continued 
Secondary reporting format – geographic segments 
The Group’s business segments are managed on a worldwide basis and operate in the following main geographic areas: 

All figures in £ millions 

Continuing operations 

European countries 

North America 

Asia Pacific 

Other countries 

Total 
Discontinued operations  

European countries 

North America 

Other countries 

Total 
Joint ventures and associates 

Total 

Sales 

Total assets 

Capital expenditure 

2007 

2006 

2007 

2006   

2007 

2006 

1,102 

2,591 

351 

118 

1,003 

2,585 

295 

107 

1,827 

4,867 

365 

96 

1,608   

4,908   

327   

56   

4,162 

3,990 

7,155 

6,899   

83 

78 

6 

167 
– 

103 

314 

16 

433 
– 

– 

117 

– 

117 
20 

9   

281   

4   

294   
20   

90 

248 

14 

2 

354 

1 

1 

– 

2 
– 

70 

231 

12 

2 

315 

1 

2 

1 

4 
– 

4,329 

4,423 

7,292 

7,213   

356 

319 

Sales are allocated based on the country in which the customer is located. This does not differ materially from the location where the order  
is received.  

3. Discontinued operations 
Discontinued operations relate to the following disposals made in the year (see note 31): 

–  Government Solutions (sold 15 February 2007) 

–  Datamark (acquired with eCollege and subsequently sold on 31 July 2007) 

–  Les Echos (sold 24 December 2007) 

The results of Government Solutions (previously included in the Professional segment) and Les Echos (previously included in the FT 
Publishing segment) have been included in discontinued operations for both 2006 and 2007 and have been consolidated up to the date of sale.  
Datamark was sold immediately following its acquisition as part of the eCollege transaction and consequently none of the results for this 
business have been consolidated. 

On 22 February 2008 the Group completed the sale of its Data Management business (previously included in the Professional segment)  
and this business has been included in discontinued operations for the full year in both 2006 and 2007. In anticipation of the loss on sale,  
an impairment to held for sale goodwill has been charged to the income statement in 2007. 

The assets and liabilities of the Data Management business have been reported as held for sale in the 31 December 2007 balance sheet.  
At 31 December 2006 held for sale assets and liabilities relate to Government Solutions (see note 30). 

An analysis of the results and cash flows of discontinued operations are as follows: 

All figures in £ millions 

Sales 

Operating profit 

Goodwill impairment 

(Loss)/profit before tax 

Attributable tax expense 

(Loss)/profit after tax 

Profit/(loss) on disposal of discontinued operations before tax 

Attributable tax (expense)/benefit 

(Loss)/profit for the year from discontinued operations 

Operating cash flows 
Investing cash flows 

Financing cash flows 

Total cash flows 

61    Pearson Annual Report and Accounts 2007 

Government
Solutions 

Data 
Management 

Les Echos 

Datamark 

29 

56 

82 

2 

– 

2 

(1)

1 

(19)

(93)

(111)

(8)
– 

(4)

(12)

12 

(97) 

(85) 

(4) 

(89) 

– 

– 

(89) 

11 
(1) 

(10) 

– 

1 

– 

1 

– 

1 

165 

– 

166 

4 
4 

(7) 

1 

– 

– 

– 

– 

– 

– 

– 

7 

7 

– 
– 

– 

– 

2007 

Total 

167 

15 

(97)

(82)

(5)

(87)

146 

(86)

(27)

7 
3 

(21)

(11)

 
 
 
 
   
 
 
 
 
 
   
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
Notes to the Consolidated Financial Statements continued 

3. Discontinued operations continued 

All figures in £ millions 

Sales 

Operating profit 

Profit before tax 

Attributable tax expense 

Profit after tax 

Profit/(loss) on disposal of discontinued operations before tax 
Attributable tax expense 

Profit for the year from discontinued operations 

Operating cash flows 

Investing cash flows 

Financing cash flows 

Total cash flows 

4. Operating expenses 
All figures in £ millions 

By function: 

Cost of goods sold 

Operating expenses 

Distribution costs 

Administrative and other expenses 

Other income 

Total operating expenses 

Total 

All figures in £ millions 

By nature: 

Utilisation of inventory  

Depreciation of property, plant and equipment  

Amortisation of intangible assets – Pre-publication  

Amortisation of intangible assets – Other  

Employee benefit expense  

Operating lease rentals 

Other property costs 

Royalties expensed 

Advertising, promotion and marketing 

Information technology costs 

Other costs 

Other income 

Total 

62    Pearson Annual Report and Accounts 2007 

Government 
Solutions 

Data 
Management 

Les Echos 

286 

22 

22 

(8) 

14 

– 
– 

14 

20 

(8) 

(1) 

11 

61 

13 

13 

(5) 

8 

– 
– 

8 

9 

(2) 

(7) 

– 

86 

5 

5 

(2)

3 

– 
– 

3 

4 

– 

(7)

(3)

2006 

Total 

433 

40 

40 

(15)

25 

– 
– 

25 

33 

(10)

(15)

8 

2007 

2006 

1,910 

1,841 

264 

1,538 

(101)

1,701 

3,611 

288 

1,462 

(99)

1,651 

3,492 

Notes 

2007 

2006 

18 

10 

17 

11 

5 

732 

65 

192 

70 

702 

68 

210 

48 

1,288 

1,225 

129 

122 

365 

195 

70 

484 

(101)

3,611 

122 

121 

360 

190 

71 

474 

(99)

3,492 

 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
4. Operating expenses continued 
During the year the Group obtained the following services from the Group’s auditor: 
All figures in £ millions 

Fees payable to the Company’s auditor for the audit of parent company and consolidated accounts 

The audit of the Company’s subsidiaries pursuant to legislation 

Other services pursuant to legislation 

Tax services 

Other services 

Total 

Reconciliation between audit and non-audit service fees is shown below: 
All figures in £ millions 

Group audit fees including fees for attestation under section 404 of the Sarbanes-Oxley Act 

Non-audit fees 

Total audit fees 

2007 

2006 

1 

2 

1 

2 

1 

7 

1 

4 

4 

1 

1 

11 

2007 

2006 

4 

3 

7 

9 

2 

11 

Other services pursuant to legislation represent fees payable for services in relation to other statutory filings or engagements that are required  
to be carried out by the appointed auditor. In particular, this includes fees for attestation under section 404 of the Sarbanes-Oxley Act.  

Tax services include services related to tax planning and various other tax advisory services. 

Other services include services related to the disposal of the Data Management business, due diligence on acquisitions and advisory services  
in relation to information technology and section 404. 

5. Employee information 
All figures in £ millions 

Employee benefit expense 

Wages and salaries (including termination benefits and restructuring costs) 

Social security costs 

Share-based payment costs  

Pension costs – defined contribution plans  

Pension costs – defined benefit plans  

Other post-retirement benefits  

The details of the emoluments of the directors of Pearson plc are shown on pages 35 to 49.  
Average number employed 

Employee numbers 

School 

Higher Education 

Professional 

Penguin 

FT Publishing 

Interactive Data 

Other 

Continuing operations 

Discontinued operations 

63    Pearson Annual Report and Accounts 2007 

Notes 

2007 

2006 

25 

24 

24 

24 

1,087 

100 

1,035 

101 

30 

39 

31 

1 

25 

36 

29 

(1)

1,288 

1,225 

2007 

2006 

12,906 

11,064 

5,098 

3,458 

4,163 

2,083 

2,300 

1,614 

31,622 

1,070 

32,692 

4,368 

3,204 

3,943 

1,766 

2,200 

1,669 

28,214 

6,127 

34,341 

 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
Notes to the Consolidated Financial Statements continued 

6. Net finance costs 
All figures in £ millions 

Interest payable 

Net foreign exchange losses 

Other losses on financial instruments in a hedging relationship: 

– fair value hedges 

– net investment hedges 

Other losses on financial instruments not in a hedging relationship: 

– derivatives 

Finance costs 

Interest receivable 
Finance income in respect of employee benefits 

Net foreign exchange gains 

Other gains on financial instruments in a hedging relationship: 

– fair value hedges 

– net investment hedges 

Other gains on financial instruments not in a hedging relationship: 

– amortisation of transitional adjustment on bonds 

– derivatives 

Finance income 

Net finance costs 

Analysed as: 
Net interest payable 

Finance income in respect of employee benefits 

Net finance costs reflected in adjusted earnings  

Other net finance (costs)/income 

Total net finance costs 

Notes 

24 

24 

2007 

(114)

(25)

(1)

(1)

(9)

(150)

19 
10 

8 

– 

– 

1 

6 

44 

(106)

(95)

10 

(85)

(21)

(106)

2006 

(117)

(2)

– 

(2)

(12)

(133)

23 
4 

21 

– 

– 

8 

3 

59 

(74)

(94)

4 

(90)

16 

(74)

The £1m net loss on fair value hedges comprises a £20m loss on the underlying bonds offset by a £19m gain on the related derivative  
financial instruments. 

7. Income tax 
All figures in £ millions 

Current tax 

Charge in respect of current year 

Recognition of previously unrecognised trading losses 

Other adjustments in respect of prior years 

Total current tax charge 

Deferred tax 

In respect of timing differences 

Recognition of previously unrecognised capital losses 

Recognition of previously unrecognised trading losses 

Other adjustments in respect of prior years 

Total deferred tax (charge)/benefit 

Total tax charge 

64    Pearson Annual Report and Accounts 2007 

Notes 

2007 

2006 

(71)

– 

27 

(44)

(96)

– 

– 

9 

(87)

(131)

(81)

23 

35 

(23)

(73)

76 

37 

(21)

19 

(4)

13 

 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
7. Income tax continued 
The tax on the Group’s profit before tax differs from the theoretical amount that would arise using the UK tax rate as follows: 
All figures in £ millions 

Profit before tax 

Tax calculated at UK rate 

Effect of overseas tax rates 

Joint venture and associate income reported net of tax 

Income not subject to tax 

Expenses not deductible for tax purposes 

Utilisation of previously unrecognised tax losses 

Recognition of previously unrecognised tax losses 

Unutilised tax losses 

Prior year adjustments 

Total tax charge 

UK 
Overseas 

Total tax charge 

Add back: tax benefit on other net gains and losses  
Add back: tax benefit on amortisation of acquired intangibles 

Add back: tax (benefit)/charge on other finance income  

Tax amortisation benefit on goodwill and intangibles 

Recognition of tax losses 

Adjusted income tax charge – continuing operations 
Adjusted income tax charge – discontinued operations 

Total adjusted income tax charge 

Tax rate reflected in adjusted earnings 

The tax benefit on items charged to equity is as follows: 
All figures in £ millions 

Share-based payments 

Pension contributions and actuarial gains and losses 

Net investment hedges and other foreign exchange gains and losses 

2007 

468 

(141)

(25)

7 

3 

(12)

3 

– 

(2)

36 

(131)

(42)
(89)

(131)

(9)
(19)

(6)

25 

– 

(140)
(5)

(145)

2006 

448 

(135)

(17)

7 

5 

(18)

7 

136 

(3)

14 

(4)

(15)
11 

(4)

(4)
(10)

5 

25 

(127)

(115)
(15)

(130)

26.4% 

25.9% 

2007 

2006 

7 

28 

(6)

29 

2 

9 

1 

12 

8. Earnings per share 
Basic 
Basic earnings per share is calculated by dividing the profit attributable to equity shareholders of the Company by the weighted average number 
of ordinary shares in issue during the year, excluding ordinary shares purchased by the Company and held as treasury shares. 

Diluted 
Diluted earnings per share is calculated by adjusting the weighted average number of ordinary shares to take account of all dilutive potential 
ordinary shares and adjusting the profit attributable, if applicable, to account for any tax consequences that might arise from conversion of 
those shares. 

65    Pearson Annual Report and Accounts 2007 

 
 
Notes to the Consolidated Financial Statements continued 

8. Earnings per share continued 
All figures in £ millions 

Profit for the year from continuing operations 

Minority interest 

Earnings from continuing operations 
(Loss)/profit for the year from discontinued operations 

Earnings 

Weighted average number of shares (millions) 
Effect of dilutive share options (millions) 

Weighted average number of shares (millions) for diluted earnings 

Earnings per share from continuing and discontinued operations 
Basic 

Diluted 

Earnings per share from continuing operations 
Basic 

Diluted 

Earnings per share from discontinued operations 

Basic 

Notes 

3 

2007 

337 

(26)

311 
(27)

284 

796.8 

1.3 

798.1 

35.6p 

35.6p 

39.0p 

39.0p 

2006 

444 

(23)

421 
25 

446 

798.4 

1.5 

799.9 

55.9p 

55.8p 

52.7p 

52.6p 

(3.4p)

3.2p 

Adjusted 
In order to show results from operating activities on a consistent basis, an adjusted earnings per share is presented. The Company’s definition  
of adjusted earnings per share may not be comparable to other similarly titled measures reported by other companies. 

The following items are excluded in the calculation of adjusted earnings: 

Amortisation of acquired intangibles is the amortisation of intangible assets acquired through business combinations. The amortisation charge  
is not considered to be fully reflective of the underlying performance of the Group.   

Other net gains and losses represent profits and losses on the sale of subsidiaries, joint ventures, associates and other financial assets that are 
included within continuing or discontinued operations but which distort the performance of the Group. 

Other net finance income/costs are foreign exchange and other gains and losses that represent short-term fluctuations in market value and 
foreign exchange movements on transactions and balances that are no longer in a hedge relationship. These gains and losses are subject to 
significant volatility and may not be realised in due course as it is normally the intention to hold these instruments to maturity. Other net 
finance costs of Group companies are included in finance costs or finance income as appropriate. Other net finance costs of joint ventures  
and associates are included within the share of results of joint ventures and associates within operating profit. 

Tax on the above items is excluded from adjusted earnings. From 2007 the Group has also added the benefit of tax amortisation of goodwill 
and intangibles as this benefit more accurately aligns the adjusted tax charge with the expected medium-term rate of cash tax payments.  
The 2006 comparative has been restated accordingly. In 2006, the Company excluded tax benefits from the recognition of its tax losses  
which due to their size and non-recurring nature were not considered to be fully reflective of the underlying tax rate of the Group. 

Minority interest for the above items is excluded from adjusted earnings.  

66    Pearson Annual Report and Accounts 2007 

 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
8. Earnings per share continued 
The following tables reconcile statutory earnings to adjusted earnings. 

All figures in £ millions 

Operating profit 

Net finance costs 

Profit before tax 

Income tax 

Profit for the year from continuing operations 

Profit for the year from discontinued operations 

Profit for the year 

Minorities 

Earnings 

Weighted average number of shares (millions) 

Adjusted earnings per share 

All figures in £ millions 

Operating profit 

Net finance costs 

Profit before tax 

Income tax 

Profit for the year from continuing operations 

Profit for the year from discontinued operations 

Profit for the year 

Minorities 

Earnings 

Weighted average number of shares (millions) 
Adjusted earnings per share 

9. Dividends 
All figures in £ millions 

Final paid in respect of prior year 18.8p (2006: 17p) 

Interim paid in respect of current year 11.1p (2006: 10.5p) 

Statutory 
income 
statement 

Re-analyse 
discontinued 
operations 

Other 
net gains and 
losses 

Amortisation of 
acquired 
intangibles 

Other net 
finance 
costs/income 

Tax 
amortisation 
benefit 

Recognition 
of 
tax losses 

574 

(106)

468 

(131)

337 

(27)

310 

(26)

284 

15 

– 

15 

(5)

10 

(10)

– 

– 

– 

– 

– 

– 

(9)

(9)

37 

28 

– 

28 

45 

– 

45 

(19)

26 

– 

26 

(4)

22 

– 

21 

21 

(6) 

15 

– 

15 

– 

15 

– 

– 

– 

25 

25 

– 

25 

(2) 

23 

– 

– 

– 

– 

– 

– 

– 

– 

– 

Statutory 
income 
statement 

Re-analyse 
discontinued 
operations 

Other 
net gains and 
losses 

Amortisation of 
acquired 
intangibles 

Other net 
finance 
costs/income 

Tax 
amortisation 
benefit 

Recognition 
of 
tax losses 

522 

(74)

448 

(4)

444 

25 

469 

(23)

446 

40 

– 

40 

(15)

25 

(25)

– 

– 

– 

(4)

– 

(4)

(4)

(8)

– 

(8)

– 

(8)

35 

– 

35 

(10)

25 

– 

25 

(3)

22 

(1) 

(16) 

(17) 

5 

(12) 

– 

(12) 

– 

(12) 

– 

– 

– 

25 

25 

– 

25 

(2) 

23 

– 

– 

– 

(127)

(127)

– 

(127)

– 

(127)

2007 

150 

88 

238 

2007 

Adjusted 
income 
statement 

634 

(85)

549 

(145)

404 

– 

404 

(32)

372 

796.8 

46.7p 

2006 

Adjusted 
income 
statement 

592 

(90)

502 

(130)

372 

– 

372 

(28)

344 

798.4 
43.1p 

2006 

136 

84 

220 

The directors are proposing a final dividend in respect of the financial year ended 31 December 2007 of 20.5p per share which will absorb an 
estimated £164m of shareholders’ funds. It will be paid on 9 May 2008 to shareholders who are on the register of members on 11 April 2008. 
These financial statements do not reflect this dividend. 

67    Pearson Annual Report and Accounts 2007 

 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
Notes to the Consolidated Financial Statements continued 

10. Property, plant and equipment 

All figures in £ millions 

Cost 

At 1 January 2006 

Exchange differences 

Transfers 

Additions 

Disposals 

Acquisition through business combination 

Reclassifications 

Transfer to non-current assets held for sale 

At 31 December 2006 

Exchange differences 
Additions 

Disposals 

Acquisition through business combination 

Disposal through business disposal 

Reclassifications 

Transfer to non-current assets held for sale 

At 31 December 2007 

All figures in £ millions 

Depreciation 

At 1 January 2006 

Exchange differences 

Transfers 

Charge for the year 

Disposals 
Acquisition through business combination 

Transfer to non-current assets held for sale 

At 31 December 2006 

Exchange differences 
Charge for the year 

Disposals 

Acquisition through business combination 

Disposal through business disposal 

Transfer to non-current assets held for sale 

At 31 December 2007 

Carrying amounts 

At 1 January 2006 

At 31 December 2006 

At 31 December 2007 

Land and 
buildings 

Plant and 
equipment 

Assets in 
course of
construction 

328 

(20) 

– 

12 

(9) 

9 

– 

(7) 

313 

(2) 
20 

(24) 

– 

(1) 

– 

(8) 

298 

683 

(54) 

(11) 

52 

(32) 

12 

8 

(27) 

631 

– 
62 

(65) 

27 

(25) 

6 

 (14) 

622 

7 

– 

(1)

13 

– 

– 

(8)

– 

11 

– 
11 

– 

– 

– 

(6)

– 

16 

Land and 
buildings 

Plant and 
equipment 

Assets in
course of 
construction 

(130) 

(504) 

10 

– 

(17) 

4 
– 

5 

41 

5 

(60) 

27 
(8) 

20 

(128) 

(479) 

– 
(14) 

11 

– 

– 

5 

1 
(54) 

63 

(16) 

20 

10 

(126) 

(455) 

198 

185 

172 

179 

152 

167 

– 

– 

– 

– 

– 
– 

– 

– 

– 
– 

– 

– 

– 

– 

– 

7 

11 

16 

Total 

1,018 

(74)

(12)

77 

(41)

21 

– 

(34)

955 

(2)
93 

(89)

27 

(26)

– 

 (22)

936 

Total 

(634)

51 

5 

(77)

31 
(8)

25 

(607)

1 
(68)

74 

(16)

20 

15 

(581)

384 

348 

355 

Depreciation expense of £13m (2006: £18m) has been included in the income statement in cost of goods sold, £5m (2006: £6m) in distribution 
expenses and £50m (2006: £53m) in administrative and other expenses. In 2007 £3m (2006: £9m) relates to discontinued operations. 

The Group leases certain equipment under a number of finance lease agreements. The net carrying amount of leased plant and equipment 
included within property, plant and equipment was £6m (2006: £4m). 

68    Pearson Annual Report and Accounts 2007 

 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
11. Intangible assets 

All figures in £ millions 

Cost 

At 1 January 2006 

Exchange differences 

Transfers 

Additions 

Disposals 

Acquisition through business combination 

Adjustment on recognition of pre-acquisition deferred tax 

Transfer to non-current assets held for sale 

At 31 December 2006 

Exchange differences 
Additions 

Disposals 

Acquisition through business combination 

Transfer to non-current assets held for sale 

At 31 December 2007 

All figures in £ millions 

Amortisation 

At 1 January 2006 

Exchange differences 

Transfers 

Charge for the year 

Disposals 

Acquisition through business combination 

Transfer to non-current assets held for sale 

At 31 December 2006 

Exchange differences 
Charge for the year 

Disposals 

Acquisition through business combination 

Transfer to non-current assets held for sale 

At 31 December 2007 

Carrying amounts 

At 1 January 2006 

At 31 December 2006 

At 31 December 2007 

Goodwill 

Software 

Acquired 
publishing 
rights 

Other  
intangibles 
acquired 

Total
intangibles 
acquired 

3,654 

(396)

– 

– 

(5)

246 

(7)

(221)

3,271 

(4)
– 

(34)

304 

(194)

3,343 

197 

(17)

6 

29 

(2)

4 

– 

(16)

201 

(2)
33 

(19)

4 

– 

217 

68 

(8) 

– 

– 

– 

36 

– 

– 

96 

3 
– 

(3) 

40 

– 

136 

83 

(8) 

– 

– 

– 

117 

– 

– 

192 

1 
– 

– 

155 

– 

348 

151 

(16)

– 

– 

– 

153 

– 

– 

288 

4 
– 

(3) 

195 

– 

484 

Total 

4,002 

(429)

6 

29 

(7)

403 

(7)

(237)

3,760 

(2)
33 

(56)

503 

(194)

4,044 

Goodwill 

Software 

Acquired 
publishing 
rights 

Other  
intangibles 
acquired 

Total
intangibles 
acquired 

Total 

– 

– 

– 

– 

– 

– 

– 

– 

– 
– 

– 

– 

– 

– 

(129)

13 

(5)

(23)

1 

(1)

9 

(135)

1 
(25)

19 

(2)

– 

(5) 

1 

– 

(11) 

– 

– 

– 

(15) 

– 
(17) 

– 

– 

– 

(14) 

(19)

(148)

2 

– 

3 

– 

(17) 

(28)

– 

– 

– 

(29) 

1 
(28) 

– 

– 

– 

– 

– 

– 

(44)

1 
(45)

– 

– 

– 

16 

(5)

(51)

1 

(1)

9 

(179)

2 
(70)

19 

(2)

– 

(142)

(32) 

(56) 

(88)

(230)

3,654 

3,271 

3,343 

68 

66 

75 

63 

81 

104 

69 

163 

292 

132 

244 

396 

3,854 

3,581 

3,814 

Other intangibles acquired include customer lists and relationships, software rights, technology, trade names and trademarks. Amortisation  
of £3m (2006: £4m) is included in the income statement in cost of goods sold and £67m (2006: £47m) in administrative and other expenses.  
In 2007 £nil (2006: £3m) of software amortisation relates to discontinued operations. 

69    Pearson Annual Report and Accounts 2007 

 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
Notes to the Consolidated Financial Statements continued 

11. Intangible assets continued 
Impairment tests for cash-generating units containing goodwill 
Impairment tests have been carried out where appropriate as described below. The recoverable amount for each unit tested exceeds its  
carrying value. 

Goodwill is allocated to the Group’s cash-generating units identified according to the business segment. Goodwill has been allocated as follows: 
2006 
All figures in £ millions 

Notes 

2007 

Higher Education 

School Curriculum (2006: School Book) 

School Assessment and Information (2006: School Assessment and Testing) 

School Technology 

Other Assessment and Testing 

Technology and Business Publishing (2006: Other Book) 

Pearson Education total 

Penguin US 

Penguin UK 

Pearson Australia 

Penguin total 

Financial Times 

Mergermarket 

Interactive Data 

FT Group total 

Total goodwill – continuing operations 

Goodwill held for sale  

Total goodwill 

1,031 

867 

540 

– 

247 

55 

780 

683 

342 

356 

490 

56 

2,740 

2,707 

155 

111 

52 

318 

12 

126 

147 

285 

3,343 

96 

3,439 

156 

114 

44 

314 

4 

97 

149 

250 

3,271 

221 

3,492 

30 

Goodwill has been allocated for impairment purposes to 11 cash-generating units (CGUs). During 2007, three CGUs, School Book, School 
Assessment and Testing and Other Book were renamed following the reorganisation of the School segment. The reorganisation resulted in  
the School Technology CGU being allocated between School Assessment and Information (formerly School Assessment and Testing) and 
School Curriculum (formerly School Book). The recoverable amount of each CGU is based on value in use calculations. Goodwill is tested  
for impairment annually. Other than goodwill there are no intangible assets with indefinite lives. 

Key assumptions 
The value in use calculations use cash flow projections based on financial budgets approved by management covering a five year period.  
The key assumptions used by management in the value in use calculations were: 

Discount rate – The discount rate is based on the risk-free rate for government bonds, adjusted for a risk premium to reflect the increased risk  
in investing in equities. The risk premium adjustment is assessed for each specific cash-generating unit. The average pre-tax discount rates used 
are in the range of 10.5% to 12.0% for the Pearson Education businesses, 8.9% to 11.7% for the Penguin businesses and 10.4% to 17.2% for the 
FT Group businesses. 

Perpetuity growth rates – The cash flows subsequent to the approved budget period are based upon the long-term historic growth rates of  
the underlying territories in which the CGU operates and reflect the long-term growth prospects of the sectors in which the CGU operates.  
The perpetuity growth rates used vary between 2.5% and 3.5%. The perpetuity growth rates are consistent with appropriate external sources  
for the relevant markets. 

Cash flow growth rates – The cash flow growth rates are derived from forecast sales growth taking into consideration past experience of 
operating margins achieved in the cash-generating unit. Historically, such forecasts have been reasonably accurate. 

Sensitivities 
The Group’s impairment review is sensitive to a change in the key assumptions used, most notably the discount rates and the perpetuity rates. 
Based on the Group’s sensitivity analysis, a reasonable possible change in a single factor will not cause impairment in any of the Group’s CGUs. 

However, a significant adverse change in our key assumptions could result in an impairment in our School Curriculum and/or Penguin UK 
CGUs as their fair value currently exceeds their carrying value only by between 10% and 20%. 

70    Pearson Annual Report and Accounts 2007 

 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
12. Investments in joint ventures and associates 
Joint ventures 
All figures in £ millions 

At beginning of year 

Exchange differences 

Share of profit after tax 

Dividends 

Additions and further investment 

At end of year 

2007 

12 

– 

4 

(8)

3 

11 

2006 

12 

(3)

3 

(4)

4 

12 

Investments in joint ventures are accounted for using the equity method of accounting and are initially recognised at cost. 

The aggregate of the Group’s share in its joint ventures, none of which are individually significant, are as follows: 
All figures in £ millions 

2007 

2006 

Assets 

Non-current assets 

Current assets 

Liabilities 
Current liabilities 

Net assets 

Income 

Expenses 

Profit after income tax 

Associates 
All figures in £ millions 

At beginning of year 

Exchange differences 

Share of profit after tax 

Dividends 

Additions 

Distribution from associate in excess of carrying value 

At end of year 

3 

23 

(15)

11 

61 

(57)

4 

2007 

8 

(1)

19 

(24)

1 

6 

9 

3 

24 

(15)

12 

52 

(49)

3 

2006 

24 

(1)

21 

(41)

– 

5 

8 

Investments in associates are accounted for using the equity method of accounting. There is no acquisition goodwill relating to the Group’s 
investments in associates. 

The Group’s interests in its principal associates, all of which are unlisted, were as follows: 
2007 
All figures in £ millions 

Country of 
incorporation 

% 
Interest held 

The Economist Newspaper Ltd 
Other 

Total 

2006 
All figures in £ millions 

The Economist Newspaper Ltd 

Other 

Total 

The interest held in associates is equivalent to voting rights. 

England 

50 

 Country of 
incorporation 

% 
Interest held 

England 

50 

Assets 

Liabilities 

Revenues 

Profit 

63 
30 

93 

(63) 
(21) 

(84) 

131 
56 

187 

15 
4 

19 

Assets 

Liabilities 

Revenues 

Profit 

64 

28 

92 

(64) 

(20) 

(84) 

122 

48 

170 

18 

3 

21 

71    Pearson Annual Report and Accounts 2007 

 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
Notes to the Consolidated Financial Statements continued 

13. Deferred income tax 
All figures in £ millions 

Deferred income tax assets 

Deferred income tax assets to be recovered after more than 12 months 

Deferred income tax assets to be recovered within 12 months 

Deferred income tax liabilities 
Deferred income tax liabilities to be settled after more than 12 months 

Deferred income tax liabilities to be settled within 12 months 

Net deferred income tax 

2007 

2006 

262 

66 

328 

(287)

– 

(287)

41 

288 

129 

417 

(245)

– 

(245)

172 

Deferred income tax assets to be recovered within 12 months relate to the utilisation of losses in the US.  

Deferred income tax assets and liabilities may be offset when there is a legally enforceable right to offset current tax assets against current 
income tax liabilities and when the deferred income taxes relate to the same fiscal authority. The Group has unrecognised deferred income  
tax assets at 31 December 2007 in respect of UK losses of £34m (2006: £35m). None of these unrecognised deferred income tax assets have 
expiry dates associated with them. 

The recognition of the deferred income tax assets is supported by management’s forecasts of the future profitability of the relevant  
business units.  

The movement on the net deferred income tax account is as follows: 
All figures in £ millions 

At beginning of year 

Exchange differences 

Income statement (charge)/benefit 

Acquisition through business combination 

Disposal through business disposal 

Tax benefit to equity  

At end of year 

The movement in deferred income tax assets and liabilities during the year is as follows: 

Notes 

7 

29 

31 

2007 

172 

(4)

(87)

(45)

2 

3 

41 

2006 

181 

(16)

19 

(26)

– 

14 

172 

All figures in £ millions 

Deferred income tax asset 

At 1 January 2006  

Exchange differences 

Income statement benefit/(charge) 

Tax benefit to equity 

At 31 December 2006 

Exchange differences 
Acquisition through business combination 

Income statement (charge)/benefit 

Tax benefit to equity 

At 31 December 2007 

Capital
losses 

Trading 
losses 

Goodwill and 
intangibles 

Returns 
provisions 

Other 

Total 

– 

– 

76 

– 

76 

– 
– 

(76)

– 

– 

134 

(17)

12 

– 

129 

(5)
10 

(47)

– 

87 

35 

(4) 

(6) 

– 

25 

– 
– 

(5) 

– 

20 

83 

(10) 

(7) 

– 

66 

(1) 
– 

14 

– 

79 

133 

(11)

(12)

11 

121 

(2)
1 

19 

3 

142 

385 

(42)

63 

11 

417 

(8)
11 

(95)

3 

328 

Other deferred income tax assets include temporary differences on share-based payments, inventory, retirement benefit obligations and  
other provisions. 

72    Pearson Annual Report and Accounts 2007 

 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
13. Deferred income tax continued 

All figures in £ millions 

Deferred income tax liabilities 

At 1 January 2006  

Exchange differences 

Acquisition through business combination 

Income statement charge 

Tax benefit to equity 

At 31 December 2006 

Exchange differences 
Acquisition through business combination 

Disposal through business disposal 

Income statement (charge)/benefit 

Tax benefit to equity 

At 31 December 2007 

Goodwill and  
intangibles 

Other  

Total 

(117) 

15 

(20) 

(27) 

– 

(149) 

3 
(56) 

– 

(12) 

– 

(87)

11 

(6)

(17)

3 

(96)

1 
– 

2 

20 

– 

(204)

26 

(26)

(44)

3 

(245)

4 
(56)

2 

8 

– 

(214) 

(73) 

(287)

Other deferred tax liabilities include temporary differences in respect of depreciation and royalty advances. 

14. Financial instruments and risk management 
The Group’s approach to the management of financial risks together with sensitivity analysis is set out on pages 22 to 24. The accounting 
classification of each class of the Group’s financial assets and financial liabilities, together with their fair values, is as follows: 

Notes 

Available 
for sale 

Fair value 

Derivatives 
deemed held 
for trading 

Derivatives 
in hedging 
relationships 

Amortised cost 

Loans and  
receivables 

Other  
liabilities 

15 

16 

19 

20 

16 

23 

21 

21 

21 

52 

40 

– 

– 

– 

92 

– 
– 

– 

– 

– 

– 

– 

– 

16 

– 

– 

16 

(8)
– 

– 

– 

– 

(8)

– 

– 

35 

– 

– 

35 

(8)
– 

– 

– 

– 

(8)

–  

–  

–  

750 

560  

1,310 

–  
–  

–  

–  

–  

–  

2007 

Total 
market
value 

52 

40 

51 

750 

560 

Total 
carrying 
value 

52 

40 

51 

750 

560 

1,453 

1,453 

–  

–  

–  

–  

–  

–  

–  
(342) 

(444) 

(115) 

(1,049) 

(1,950) 

(16)
(342)

(444)

(115)

(1,049)

(1,966)

(16)
(342)

(444)

(112)

(1,046)

(1,960)

All figures in £ millions 

Investments in unlisted securities 

Marketable securities 

Derivative financial instruments 

Trade receivables 

Cash and cash equivalents 

Total financial assets 

Derivative financial instruments 
Trade payables 

Bank loans and overdrafts 

Borrowings due within one year 

Borrowings due after more than one year 

Total financial liabilities 

73    Pearson Annual Report and Accounts 2007 

 
 
 
 
 
 
 
Notes to the Consolidated Financial Statements continued 

14. Financial instruments and risk management continued 

All figures in £ millions 

Investments in unlisted securities 

Marketable securities 

Derivative financial instruments 

Trade receivables 

Cash and cash equivalents 

Total financial assets 

Derivative financial instruments 
Trade payables 

Bank loans and overdrafts 

Borrowings due within one year 
Borrowings due after more than one year 

Total financial liabilities 

Notes 

Available 
for sale 

Fair value 

Derivatives 
deemed held 
for trading 

Derivatives 
in hedging 
relationships 

Amortised cost 

Loans and 
receivables 

Other  
liabilities 

15 

16 

19 

20 

16 

23 

21 

21 

21 

17 

25 

– 

– 

– 

42 

– 
– 

– 

– 
– 

– 

– 

– 

25 

– 

– 

25 

(2)
– 

– 

– 
– 

(2)

– 

– 

61 

– 

– 

61 

(17)
– 

– 

– 
– 

(17)

– 

– 

– 

768 

592 

1,360 

– 
– 

– 

– 
– 

– 

–  

–  

–  

–  

–  

–  

–  
(343) 

(173) 

(422) 
(1,148) 

(2,086) 

2006 

Total 
market
value 

17 

25 

86 

768 

592 

1,488 

(19)
(343)

(173)

(400)
(1,157)

(2,092)

Total 
carrying 
value 

17 

25 

86 

768 

592 

1,488 

(19)
(343)

(173)

(422)
(1,148)

(2,105)

Certain of the Group’s derivative financial instruments are deemed to be held for trading either as they do not meet the hedge accounting 
criteria specified in IAS 39 or the Group has chosen not to seek hedge accounting for these instruments. None of these derivatives are held for 
speculative trading purposes. Transactions in derivative financial instruments are only undertaken to manage risks arising from underlying 
business activity, in accordance with the Group’s treasury policy (see page 22). 

The Group designates certain qualifying derivative financial instruments as hedges of the fair value of its bonds (fair value hedges). Changes in 
the fair value of these derivative financial instruments are recorded in the income statement, together with any change in the fair value of the 
hedged liability attributable to the hedged risk. 

The Group also designates certain of its borrowings and derivative financial instruments as hedges of its investments in foreign operations  
(net investment hedges). Movements in the fair value of these financial instruments (to the extent they are effective) are recognised in equity. 

None of the Group’s financial assets or liabilities are designated at fair value through the profit & loss account upon initial recognition. 

More detail on the Group’s accounting for financial instruments is included in the Group’s accounting policies on page 57. 

The maturity of contracted cash flows on the Group’s borrowings and all of its derivative financial instruments are as follows: 

USD 

153 

966 

420 

1,539 

429 

1,017 

(268) 

361 

1,539 

GBP 

(30) 

70 

285 

325 

– 

483 

(160) 

2 

325 

EUR 

– 

– 

– 

– 

– 

– 

– 

– 

– 

2007 

Total 

123 

1,036 

705 

1,864 

429 

1,500 

(428)

363 

1,864 

All figures in £ millions 

Not later than one year 

Later than one year and not later than five years 

Later than five years 

Total 

Analysed as: 
Revolving credit facilities and commercial paper 

Bonds 

Rate derivatives – inflows 

Rate derivatives – outflows 

Total 

74    Pearson Annual Report and Accounts 2007 

 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
14. Financial instruments and risk management continued 

All figures in £ millions 

Not later than one year 

Later than one year and not later than five years 

Later than five years 

Total 

Analysed as: 
Revolving credit facilities and commercial paper 

Bonds 

Rate derivatives – inflows 

Rate derivatives – outflows 

Total 

USD 

166 

758 

478 

1,402 

99 

1,045 

(318) 

576 

1,402 

GBP 

18 

60 

242 

320 

– 

511 

(329) 

138 

320 

EUR 

265 

– 

– 

2006 

Total 

449 

818 

720 

265 

1,987 

– 

423 

(192)

34 

265 

99 

1,979 

(839)

748 

1,987 

All cash flow projections shown above are on an undiscounted basis. Any cash flows based on a floating rate are calculated using interest rates as 
set at the date of the last rate reset. Where this is not possible, floating rates are based on interest rates prevailing at 31 December in the relevant 
year. All derivative amounts are shown gross, although the company net settles these amounts wherever possible. 

Amounts drawn under revolving credit facilities and commercial paper are assumed to mature at the maturity date of the relevant facility, with 
interest calculated as payable in each calendar year up to and including the date of maturity of the facility. 

15. Other financial assets 
All figures in £ millions 

At beginning of year 

Exchange differences 

Equity interest received on sale of Government Solutions 

At end of year 

Other financial assets comprise non-current unlisted securities. 

Notes 

2007 

2006 

17 

– 

35 

52 

18 

(1)

– 

17 

31 

16. Derivative financial instruments 
The Group’s approach to the management of financial risks is set out on pages 22 to 24. The Group’s outstanding derivative financial 
instruments are as follows: 

All figures in £ millions 

Interest rate derivatives – in a fair value hedge relationship 

Interest rate derivatives – not in a hedge relationship 

Cross currency rate derivatives – in a net investment hedge relationship 

Cross currency rate derivatives – not in a hedge relationship 

Total 

Analysed as expiring: 
In less than one year 

Later than one year and not later than five years 

Later than five years 

Total 

Gross  notional 
amounts 

Assets 

Liabilities   

Gross notional 
amounts 

Assets 

Liabilities 

2007   

2006 

522 

796 

100 

50 

1,468 

320 

796 

352 

1,468 

18 

7 

17 

9 

51 

28 

13 

10 

51 

(8)  

(8)  

–   

–   

953 

1,026 

230 

180 

(16)  

2,389 

–   

(8)  

(8)  

(16)  

976 

1,005 

408 

2,389 

20 

9 

40 

17 

86 

50 

26 

10 

86 

(17)

(2)

– 

– 

(19)

– 

(4)

(15)

(19)

The carrying value of the above derivative financial instruments equals their fair value. Fair values are determined by using market data and the 
use of established estimation techniques such as discounted cash flow and option valuation models. 

At the end of 2007, the currency split of the mark-to-market values of rate derivatives, including the exchange of principal on cross currency 
rate derivatives, was US dollar £(119)m, and sterling £154m (2006: US dollar £(247)m, euro £157m and sterling £157m).  

The fixed interest rates on outstanding rate derivative contracts at the end of 2007 range from 4.45% to 7.00% (2006: 3.02% to 7.00%) and the 
floating rates are based on LIBOR in US dollar and sterling. 

75    Pearson Annual Report and Accounts 2007 

 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
   
 
 
 
 
Notes to the Consolidated Financial Statements continued 

16. Derivative financial instruments continued 
The Group’s portfolio of rate derivatives is diversified by maturity, counterparty and type. Natural offsets between transactions within the 
portfolio and the designation of certain derivatives as hedges significantly reduce the risk of income statement volatility. 

Counterparty exposure from all derivatives is managed, together with that from deposits and bank account balances, within credit limits that 
reflect published credit ratings to ensure that there is no significant risk to any one counterparty. No single derivative transaction had a market 
value (positive or negative) at the balance sheet date that exceeded 3% of the Group’s consolidated total equity. 

At the end of 2006, the Group held an amount of £29m as collateral under a mark-to-market agreement. This reflected the amount, at market 
rates prevailing at the end of October 2006, owed to the Group by a counterparty for a set of three related rate derivatives. The amount was 
settled at the beginning of February 2007, along with repayment of the €591m bond. 

In accordance with IAS 39 ‘Financial Instruments: Recognition and Measurement’, the Group has reviewed all of its material contracts for 
embedded derivatives that are required to be separately accounted for if they do not meet certain requirements, and has concluded that there 
are no material embedded derivatives. 

17. Intangible assets – Pre-publication 
All figures in £ millions 

Cost  

At beginning of year 

Exchange differences 

Transfers 

Additions 

Disposals 

Acquisition through business combination 

Transfer to non-current assets held for sale 

At end of year 

Amortisation  
At beginning of year 

Exchange differences 

Charge for the year 

Disposals 

Acquisition through business combination 

Transfer to non-current assets held for sale 

At end of year 

Carrying amounts  

At end of year 

2007 

2006 

1,152 

(7)

– 

230 

(125)

19 

(5)

1,357 

(148)

6 

213 

(280)

4 

– 

1,264 

1,152 

(750)

1 

(192)

125 

(1)

3 

(931)

111 

(210)

280 

– 

– 

(814)

(750)

450 

402 

Included in the above are pre-publication assets amounting to £292m (2006: £243m) which will be realised in more than 12 months. 

Amortisation is included in the income statement in cost of goods sold. There was no amortisation relating to discontinued operations in 2007 
and 2006. 

18. Inventories 
All figures in £ millions 

Raw materials 

Work in progress 

Finished goods 

2007 

24 

30 

314 

368 

2006 

26 

28 

300 

354 

The cost of inventories relating to continuing operations recognised as an expense and included in the income statement in cost of goods sold 
amounted to £732m (2006: £702m). In 2007 £47m (2006: £46m) of inventory provisions was charged in the income statement. None of the 
inventory is pledged as security. 

76    Pearson Annual Report and Accounts 2007 

 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
19. Trade and other receivables 
All figures in £ millions 

Current  

Trade receivables 

Royalty advances 

Prepayments and accrued income 

Other receivables 

Receivables from related parties 

Non-current  
Royalty advances 

Prepayments and accrued income 

Other receivables 

2007 

2006 

750 

768 

84 

48 

59 

5 

91 

34 

58 

2 

946 

953 

68 

4 

57 

129 

80 

4 

40 

124 

Trade receivables are stated at fair value, net of provisions for bad and doubtful debts and anticipated future sales returns. The movements on 
the provision for bad and doubtful debts are as follows: 
All figures in £ millions 

2007 

2006 

At beginning of year 

Exchange differences 

Income statement movements 

Utilised 

Acquisition through business combination 

Disposal through business disposal 

At end of year 

(46)

(1)

(19)

15 

(3)

2 

 (52)

Concentrations of credit risk with respect to trade receivables are limited due to the Group’s large number of customers, who are 
internationally dispersed.  

The ageing of the Group’s trade receivables is as follows: 
All figures in £ millions 

Within due date 

Up to three months past due date 
Three to six months past due date 
Six to nine months past due date 

Nine to 12 months past due date 

More that 12 months past due date 

Total trade receivables 

Less: provision for sales returns 
Transfer to non-current assets held for sale 

Net trade receivables 

The Group’s provision for bad and doubtful debts is specific to individual debts identified during the bad debt review process. Consequently 
the ageing analysis above is presented after deducting the associated specific bad debt provision. The Group reviews its bad debt provision  
at least twice a year following a detailed review of receivable balances and historic payment profiles. Management believe all the remaining 
receivable balances are fully recoverable. 

77    Pearson Annual Report and Accounts 2007 

(45)

3 

(23)

21 

(2)

– 

(46)

2006 

810 

177 
62 
6 

8 

1 

2007 

811 

161 
43 
7 

13 

4 

1,039 

1,064 

(281)
(8)

750 

(243)
(53)

768 

 
 
 
 
 
 
Notes to the Consolidated Financial Statements continued 

20. Cash and cash equivalents (excluding overdrafts) 
All figures in £ millions 

Cash at bank and in hand 

Short-term bank deposits 

2007 

439 

121 

560 

2006 

421 

171 

592 

Short-term bank deposits are invested with banks and earn interest at the prevailing short-term deposit rates.  

At the end of 2007 the currency split of cash and cash equivalents is US dollars 37% (2006: 31%), sterling 29% (2006: 35%), euros 16%  
(2006: 21%) and other 18% (2006: 13%). 

Cash and cash equivalents have fair values that approximate to their carrying amounts due to their short-term nature. 

Cash and cash equivalents include the following for the purpose of the cash flow statement: 
All figures in £ millions 

Cash and cash equivalents 

Bank overdrafts  

21. Financial liabilities – Borrowings 
The Group’s current and non-current borrowings are as follows: 
All figures in £ millions 

Non-current  

10.5% Sterling Bonds 2008 (nominal amount £100m) 

4.7% US Dollar Bonds 2009 (nominal amount $350m) 

7% Global Dollar Bonds 2011 (nominal amount $500m) 

7% Sterling Bonds 2014 (nominal amount £250m) 

5.7% US Dollar Bonds 2014 (nominal amount $400m) 

4.625% US Dollar notes 2018 (nominal amount $300m) 

Finance lease liabilities 

Current  
Due within one year or on demand: 

Bank loans and overdrafts 
6.125% Euro Bonds 2007 (nominal amount €591m) 
10.5% Sterling Bonds 2008 (nominal amount £100m) 

Loan notes 

Finance lease liabilities 

Total borrowings 

2007 

560 

(68)

492 

2006 

592 

(61)

531 

2007 

2006 

– 

176 

264 

251 

211 

143 

4 

105 

178 

266 

251 

206 

139 

3 

1,049 

1,148 

444 

– 
105 

8 

2 

559 

1,608 

173 

421 
– 

– 

1 

595 

1,743 

Included in the non-current borrowings above is £6m of accrued interest (2006: £12m). Included in the current borrowings above is £7m of 
accrued interest (2006: £22m). 

The maturity of the Group’s non-current borrowing is as follows: 
All figures in £ millions 

Between one and two years 

Between two and five years 

Over five years 

2007 

178 

266 

605 

2006 

107 

445 

596 

1,049 

1,148 

As at 31 December 2007 the exposure of the borrowings of the Group to interest rate changes when the borrowings re-price is as follows: 

All figures in £ millions 

Carrying value of borrowings 

Effect of rate derivatives 

78    Pearson Annual Report and Accounts 2007 

Less than 
one year 

One to  
five years 

More than 
five years 

559 

359 

918 

444 

(7) 

437 

605 

(352)

253 

Total 

1,608 

– 

1,608 

 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
21. Financial liabilities – Borrowings continued 
The carrying amounts and market values of non-current borrowings are as follows: 

All figures in £ millions 

10.5% Sterling Bonds 2008 

4.7% US Dollar Bonds 2009 

7% Global Dollar Bonds 2011 

7% Sterling Bonds 2014 

5.7% US Dollar Bonds 2014 

4.625% US Dollar notes 2018 

Finance lease liabilities 

Effective
interest rate 

10.53% 

4.86% 

7.16% 

7.20% 

5.88% 

4.69% 

n/a 

Carrying 
amount  
2007 

Market value 
2007 

Carrying 
amount
2006 

Market value
2006 

– 

176 

264 

251 

211 

143 

4 

– 

176 

267 

261 

203 

135 

4 

105 

178 

266 

251 

206 

139 

3 

106 

176 

269 

265 

203 

135 

3 

1,049 

1,046 

1,148 

1,157 

The market values are based on clean market prices at the year end or, where these are not available, on the quoted market prices of comparable 
debt issued by other companies. The effective interest rates above relate to the underlying debt instruments.  

The carrying amounts of the Group’s borrowings are denominated in the following currencies: 
All figures in £ millions 

US dollar 

Sterling 

Euro 

The Group has the following undrawn committed borrowing facilities as at 31 December: 
All figures in £ millions 

Floating rate 

– expiring within one year 

– expiring beyond one year 

2007 

1,251 

357 

– 

2006 

966 

356 

421 

1,608 

1,743 

2007 

2006 

– 

1,007 

1,007 

– 

894 

894 

During the year, the Group extended the maturity date of its main revolving credit facility by one year, and also entered into a short-term 
bridge financing facility. 

In addition to the above facilities, there are a number of short-term facilities that are utilised in the normal course of business. 

All of the Group’s borrowings are unsecured. In respect of finance lease obligations, the rights to the leased asset revert to the lessor in the  
event of default. 

The maturity of the Group’s finance lease obligations is as follows: 
All figures in £ millions 

Finance lease liabilities – minimum lease payments 

Not later than one year 

Later than one year and not later than two years 
Later than two years and not later than three years 

Later than three years and not later than four years 

Later than four years and not later than five years 

Later than five years 

Future finance charges on finance leases 

Present value of finance lease liabilities 

The present value of finance lease liabilities is as follows: 
All figures in £ millions 

Not later than one year 

Later than one year and not later than five years 

Later than five years 

The carrying amounts of the Group’s lease obligations approximate their fair value. 

79    Pearson Annual Report and Accounts 2007 

2007 

2006 

2 

2 
1 

1 

– 

– 

– 

6 

1 

3 
– 

– 

– 

– 

– 

4 

2007 

2006 

2 

4 

– 

6 

1 

3 

– 

4 

 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
Notes to the Consolidated Financial Statements continued 

22. Provisions for other liabilities and charges 

All figures in £ millions 

At 1 January 2007 

Exchange differences 

Charged to consolidated income statement 

– Additional provisions: interest 

– Additional provisions: prior year adjustments 

– Additional provisions: other 

– Unused amounts reversed 

Acquisition through business combination 

Disposal through business disposal 

Utilised  

At 31 December 2007  

All figures in £ millions 

Analysis of provisions 

Non-current 

Current 

Deferred  
consideration 

Leases 

Other 

25 

(1) 

2 

3 

– 

– 

12 

– 

(4) 

37 

12 

– 

– 

– 

– 

(1) 

– 

– 

(2) 

9 

15 

(1)

– 

– 

12 

(1)

2 

(1)

(5)

21 

Total 

52 

(2)

2 

3 

12 

(2)

14 

(1)

(11)

67 

2007 

2006 

44 

23 

67 

29 

23 

52 

Deferred consideration, including interest and prior year adjustments, primarily relates to the acquisition of Mergermarket in 2006.  
These amounts are payable in March 2009. Additional amounts incurred relate to the Group’s smaller acquisitions during the year  
(see note 29). 

Lease commitments relate primarily to onerous lease contracts, acquired through business combinations, which have various expiry dates  
up to 2017. The provision is based on current occupancy estimates. 

2007 

342 

23 

402 
290 

12 

171 

2006 

343 

18 

345 
276 

– 

178 

1,240 

1,160 

30 

58 

102 

190 

1,050 

24 

47 

91 

162 

998 

23. Trade and other liabilities 
All figures in £ millions 

Trade payables 

Social security and other taxes 

Accruals 
Deferred income 

Dividends payable to minority 

Other liabilities 

Less: non-current portion 

Accruals 

Deferred income 

Other liabilities 

Current portion 

The carrying value of the Group’s trade and other liabilities approximates its fair value. 

The deferred income balances comprise: 

–  multi-year obligations to deliver workbooks to adoption customers in school businesses; 
–  advance payments in contracting businesses; 
–  subscription income in school, newspaper and market pricing businesses;  
–  advertising income relating to future publishing days in newspaper businesses; and 
–  obligations to deliver digital content in future periods. 

80    Pearson Annual Report and Accounts 2007 

 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
24. Retirement benefit and other post-retirement obligations 
Background  
The Group operates a number of defined benefit and defined contribution retirement plans throughout the world. For the defined benefit 
plans, benefits are based on employees’ length of service and final pensionable pay. Defined contribution benefits are based on the amount  
of contributions paid in respect of an individual member, the investment returns earned and the amount of pension this money will buy  
when a member retires. 

The largest plan is the Pearson Group Pension Plan (‘UK Group plan’) with both defined benefit and defined contribution sections.  
From 1 November 2006, all sections of the UK Group plan were closed to new members with the exception of a defined contribution section 
that was opened in 2003. This section is available to all new employees of participating companies. The other major defined benefit plans are 
based in the US. 

Other defined contribution plans are operated principally overseas with the largest plan being in the US. The specific features of these plans  
vary in accordance with the regulations of the country in which employees are located. 

Pearson also has several post-retirement medical benefit plans (PRMBs), principally in the US. PRMBs are unfunded but are accounted for  
and valued similarly to defined benefit pension plans. 

Assumptions  
The principal assumptions used for the UK Group plan and the US PRMB are shown below. Weighted average assumptions have been shown 
for the other plans, which primarily relate to US pension plans.  

% 

Inflation 

Rate used to discount plan liabilities 

Expected return on assets 

Expected rate of increase in salaries 

UK Group
plan 

3.30 

5.80 

6.50 

5.00 

Expected rate of increase for pensions in payment and deferred pensions 

2.50 to 4.30 

Initial rate of increase in healthcare rate 

Ultimate rate of increase in healthcare rate 

– 

– 

Other
plans 

2.93 

6.01 

7.27 

4.36 

– 

– 

– 

2007   

PRMB   

3.00   

6.05   

–   

–   

UK Group 
plan 

3.00 

5.20 

6.40 

4.70 

–    2.10 to 4.60 

9.50   

5.00   

– 

– 

Other
plans 

2.91 

5.70 

7.18 

4.37 

– 

– 

– 

2006 

PRMB 

3.00 

5.85 

– 

– 

– 

10.00 

5.00 

The UK discount rate is based on the annualised yield on the iBoxx over 15-year AA-rated corporate bond index. The US discount rate is set by 
reference to a US bond portfolio matching model. The expected return on assets is based on market expectations of long-term asset returns for 
the defined portfolio at the end of the year. 

The expected rates of return on categories of plan assets are determined by reference to relevant indices. The overall expected rate of return is 
calculated by weighting the individual rates in accordance with the anticipated balance in the plan’s investment portfolio. 

The UK mortality assumptions have been derived by adjusting standard mortality tables (PMFA 92 tables projected forward with medium 
cohort improvement factors). The Group changed its mortality assumptions in the UK in 2007 to reflect an assumed increased life expectancy 
of pensioners by adding a 1% floor to the medium cohort projections. 

For the US plans, the assumptions used were based on standard US mortality tables (GAM94). 

Using the above tables, the remaining average life expectancy in years of a pensioner retiring at age 65 on the balance sheet date for the UK and 
US Group plans is as follows: 

Male 

Female 

2007 

21.3 

21.6 

UK   

2006   

20.9   

21.3   

2007 

17.9 

21.3 

US 

2006 

17.9 

21.3 

The remaining average life expectancy in years of a pensioner retiring at age 65, 20 years after the balance sheet date, for the UK and US Group 
plans is as follows: 

Male 

Female 

2007 

23.1 

23.6 

UK   

2006   

22.2   

22.5   

2007 

17.9 

21.3 

US 

2006 

17.9 

21.3 

81    Pearson Annual Report and Accounts 2007 

 
 
 
 
 
 
Notes to the Consolidated Financial Statements continued 

24. Retirement benefit and other post-retirement obligations continued 
Financial statement information  
The amounts recognised in the income statement are as follows: 

All figures in £ millions 

Current service cost 

Total operating expense 
Expected return on plan assets 

Interest on plan liabilities 

Net finance (income)/expense 

Net income statement charge 

Actual return on plan assets 

All figures in £ millions 

Current service cost 

Past service cost 

Total operating expense/(income) 

Expected return on plan assets 

Interest on plan liabilities 

Net finance (income)/expense 

Net income statement charge 

UK Group
plan 

Defined
benefit
other 

Sub total 

Defined  
contribution 

PRMB 

29 

29 
(96)

84 

(12)

17 

128 

2 

2 
(7)

7 

– 

2 

4 

31 

31 
(103) 

91 

(12) 

19 

132 

39 

39 
– 

– 

– 

39 

– 

1 

1 
– 

2 

2 

3 

– 

2007 

Total 

71 

71 
(103)

93 

(10)

61 

132 

2006 

UK Group
plan 

Defined
benefit
other 

Sub total 

Defined  
contribution 

PRMB 

Total 

27 

– 

27 

(85)

78 

(7)

20 

2 

– 

2 

(7)

7 

– 

2 

29 

– 

29 

(92) 

85 

(7) 

22 

36 

– 

36 

– 

– 

– 

36 

– 

1 

(2)

(1)

– 

3 

3 

2 

– 

66 

(2)

64 

(92)

88 

(4)

60 

166 

2006 

Total 

1,633 

(1,810)

(177)

(48)
(25)

(250)

– 

(250)

2006 

102 

5 

107 

44 

Actual return on plan assets 

153 

13 

166 

The total operating charge is included in administrative and other expenses. 

The amounts recognised in the balance sheet are as follows: 

All figures in £ millions 

Fair value of plan assets 

Present value of defined benefit obligation 

Net pension asset/(liability) 

Other post-retirement medical benefit obligation 
Other pension accruals 

Net retirement benefit obligations 

Analysed as: 

Retirement benefit asset 

Retirement benefit obligations 

UK Group
plan 

1,744 

(1,682)

62 

Other
funded
plans 

109 

(117)

(8)

Other
unfunded
plans 

– 

(12)

(12)

UK Group 
plan 

1,528 

(1,683) 

(155) 

Other 
funded 
plans 

105 

(115) 

(10) 

Other
unfunded
plans 

– 

(12)

(12)

2007 

Total 

1,853 

(1,811)

42 

(47)
(28)

(33)

62 

(95)

The following gains have been recognised in the statement of recognised income and expense: 
All figures in £ millions 

Amounts recognised for defined benefit plans 

Amounts recognised for post-retirement medical benefit plans 

Total recognised in year 

Cumulative amounts recognised 

2007 

79 

1 

80 

124 

82    Pearson Annual Report and Accounts 2007 

 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
24. Retirement benefit and other post-retirement obligations continued 
The fair value of plan assets comprises the following: 

% 

Equities 

Bonds 

Properties 

Other 

UK Group
plan 

34.3 

34.9 

7.7 

17.2 

Other
funded
plans 

3.4 

2.0 

– 

0.5 

2007   

Total   

37.7   

36.9   

7.7   

17.7   

UK Group 
plan 

46.6 

23.8 

9.2 

14.0 

Other
funded
plans 

3.9 

2.1 

– 

0.4 

The plan assets do not include any of the Group’s own financial instruments, or any property occupied by the Group. 

Changes in the values of plan assets and liabilities of the retirement benefit plans are as follows: 

2006 

Total 

50.5 

25.9 

9.2 

14.4 

2006 

Total 

UK Group
  plan 

Other
plans 

2007   

Total   

UK Group  
plan 

Other
plans 

1,528 

105 

1,633   

1,390 

– 

96 

32 

152 

8 

(72)

1,744 

1 

7 

(3)

5 

– 

(6)

109 

1   

103   

29   

157   

8   

(78)  

– 

85 

68 

43 

7 

(65) 

1,853   

1,528 

110 

(12)

1,500 

(12)

7 

6 

2 

– 

92 

74 

45 

7 

(8)

105 

(73)

1,633 

(1,683)

(127)

(1,810)  

(1,661) 

(142)

(1,803)

– 

(29)

(84)

50 

(8)

72 

– 

1 

(2)

(7)

– 

– 

6 

– 

1   

(31)  

(91)  

50   

(8)  

78   

–   

– 

(27) 

(78) 

25 

(7) 

65 

– 

15 

(2)

(7)

3 

– 

8 

(2)

15 

(29)

(85)

28 

(7)

73 

(2)

(1,682)

(129)

(1,811)  

(1,683) 

(127)

(1,810)

2007 

(48)

– 

(1)

– 

(2)

1 

3 

– 

(47)

2006 

(60)

8 

(1)

2 

(3)

5 

4 

(3)

(48)

All figures in £ millions 

Fair value of plan assets 

Opening fair value of plan assets 

Exchange differences 

Expected return on plan assets 

Actuarial gains and losses 

Contributions by employer 

Contributions by employee 

Benefits paid 

Closing fair value of plan assets 

Present value of defined benefit obligation 
Opening defined benefit obligation 

Exchange differences 

Current service cost 

Interest cost 

Actuarial gains and losses 

Contributions by employee 

Benefits paid 

Acquisition through business combination 

Closing defined benefit obligation 

Changes in the value of the US PRMB are as follows: 
All figures in £ millions 

Opening defined benefit obligation 

Exchange differences 

Current service cost 

Past service cost 

Interest cost 

Actuarial gains and losses 

Benefits paid 

Reclassifications 

Closing defined benefit obligation 

83    Pearson Annual Report and Accounts 2007 

 
 
 
 
   
 
 
 
 
 
   
 
 
Notes to the Consolidated Financial Statements continued 

24. Retirement benefit and other post-retirement obligations continued 
The history of the defined benefit plans is as follows: 
All figures in £ millions 

Fair value of plan assets 

Present value of defined benefit obligation 

Net pension asset/(liability) 

Experience adjustments on plan assets 
Experience adjustments on plan liabilities 

2007 

1,853 

2006 

1,633 

2005 

1,500 

2004 

1,280 

2003 

1,164 

(1,811)

(1,810) 

(1,803) 

(1,615)

(1,454)

42 

29 
50 

(177) 

74 
28 

(303) 

140 
(119) 

(335)

67 
(127)

(290)

88 
(113)

Funding 
The UK Group plan is self-administered with the plans’ assets being held independently of the Group. The trustees of the plan are required to 
act in the best interest of the plan’s beneficiaries. The most recently completed triennial actuarial valuation for funding purposes was completed 
as at 1 January 2006 and revealed a funding shortfall. The Group has agreed that the funding shortfall will be eliminated by 31 December 2014. 
In 2007 the Group contributed £121m (including a special contribution of £100m) and has agreed to contribute £21m in 2008 and £21.9m per 
annum thereafter in excess of an estimated £30m of regular contributions. 

The Group expects to contribute $70m in 2008 and $73m in 2009 to its US pension plans. 

Sensitivities  
The net retirement benefit obligations are calculated using a number of assumptions, the most significant being the discount rate used to 
calculate the defined benefit obligation. The effect of a one percentage point increase and decrease in the discount rate on the defined benefit 
obligation and the total pension expense is as follows: 

All figures in £ millions 

Effect on: 

(Decrease)/increase in defined benefit obligation – UK Group plan 

(Decrease)/increase of aggregate of service cost and interest cost – UK Group plan 

(Decrease)/increase in defined benefit obligation – US plan 

The effect of a one percentage point increase and decrease in the assumed medical cost trend rates is as follows: 

All figures in £ millions 

Effect on: 

(Decrease)/increase in post-retirement medical benefit obligation 

Increase/(decrease) of aggregate of service cost and interest cost 

2007 

1% increase 

1% decrease 

(222)

(4.6)

(6.7)

275 

5.8 

7.3 

2007 

1% increase 

1% decrease 

(3.7)

0.1 

4.1 

(0.1)

25. Share-based payments 
The Group recognised the following charges in the income statement in respect of its equity-settled share-based payment plans: 
All figures in £ millions 

Pearson plans 

Interactive Data plans 

Total share-based payment costs 

2007 

2006 

23 

7 

30 

18 

7 

25 

The Group operates the following equity-settled employee option and share plans: 

Worldwide Save for Shares Plan – Since 1994, the Group has operated a Save-As-You-Earn plan for UK employees. In 1998, the Group 
introduced a Worldwide Save for Shares Plan. Under these plans, employees can save a portion of their monthly salary over periods of three, 
five or seven years. At the end of this period, the employee has the option to purchase ordinary shares with the accumulated funds at a purchase 
price equal to 80% of the market price prevailing at the time of the commencement of the employee’s participation in the plan. Options that 
are not exercised within six months of the third, fifth or seventh anniversary after grant lapse unconditionally. 

Employee Stock Purchase Plan – In 2000, the Group established an Employee Stock Purchase Plan which allows all employees in the US to save  
a portion of their monthly salary over six month periods. At the end of the period, the employee has the option to purchase ADRs with their 
accumulated funds at a purchase price equal to 85% of the lower of the market price prevailing at the beginning or end of the period. 

84    Pearson Annual Report and Accounts 2007 

 
 
 
 
 
 
 
25. Share-based payments continued 
Long-Term Incentive Plan – This plan was introduced in 2001 and renewed in 2006 and consists of two parts: share options and/or  
restricted shares.  

Options were granted under this plan in 2001 based on a pre-grant earnings per share growth test and are not subject to further performance 
conditions on exercise. The options became exercisable in tranches and lapse if they remain unexercised at the tenth anniversary of the date  
of grant.  

The vesting of restricted shares is normally dependent on continuing service and/or upon the satisfaction of corporate performance targets  
over a three-year period. These targets may be based on market and/or non-market performance criteria. Restricted shares awarded to senior 
management in October 2006 and July 2007 vest dependent on relative shareholder return, return on invested capital and earnings per share 
growth. The award was split equally across all three measures. Other restricted shares awarded in 2006 and 2007 vest depending on continuing 
service over a three-year period. 

Annual Bonus Share Matching Plan – This plan permits executive directors and senior executives around the Group to invest up to 50% of any 
after tax annual bonus in Pearson shares. If these shares are held and the Group meets an earnings per share growth target, the Company will 
match them on a gross basis of up to one share for every one held. 

In addition to the above, share options remain outstanding under Executive Share Option, Reward and Special Share Option Plans. These are 
legacy plans which were replaced with the introduction of the Long-Term Incentive Plan in 2001. 

The number and weighted average exercise prices of share options granted under the Group’s plans are as follows: 

Outstanding at beginning of year 

Granted during the year 

Exercised during the year 

Forfeited during the year 

Expired during the year 

Outstanding at end of year 

Options exercisable at end of year 

2007   

Weighted  
average  
exercise  
price 

£   

Number of
share 
options
000s 

13.36   

21,677 

6.90   

5.80   

19.63   

7.68   

13.15   

14.63   

837 

(1,396)

(1,828)

(429)

18,861 

15,595 

2006 

Weighted
average
exercise
price
£ 

13.15 

6.30 

5.36 

15.39 

6.72 

13.36 

14.14 

Number of 
share  
options 
000s 

18,861 

773 

(1,326) 

(1,434) 

(93) 

16,781 

13,999 

Options were exercised regularly throughout the year. The weighted average share price during the year was £8.02 (2006: £7.45). Early exercises 
arising from redundancy, retirement or death are treated as an acceleration of vesting and the Group therefore recognises in the income 
statement the amount that otherwise would have been recognised for services received over the remainder of the original vesting period. 

The options outstanding at the end of the year have weighted average remaining contractual lives and exercise prices as follows: 

Range of exercise prices 
£ 

0 – 5 

5 – 10 

10 – 15 

15 – 20 

20 – 25 

>25 

2007   

Weighted 
average   
contractual  
life 
Years   

1.56   

3.22   

2.62   

1.85   

2.19   

2.19   

2.62   

Number of
share 
options
000s 

1,649 

5,254 

7,638 

1,050 

424 

2,846 

18,861 

2006 

Weighted
average
contractual
life
Years 

1.94 

3.85 

3.63 

2.88 

3.19 

3.22 

3.42 

Number of  
share 
options 
000s 

930 

4,909 

7,257 

980 

400 

2,305 

16,781 

In 2007 and 2006 options were granted under the Worldwide Save for Shares Plan. The weighted average estimated fair value for the options 
granted was calculated using a Black-Scholes option pricing model.  

85    Pearson Annual Report and Accounts 2007 

 
 
Notes to the Consolidated Financial Statements continued 

25. Share-based payments continued 
The weighted average estimated fair values and the inputs into the Black-Scholes model are as follows: 

Fair value 

Weighted average share price 
Weighted average exercise price 

Expected volatility 

Expected life 

Risk free rate 

Expected dividend yield 

Forfeiture rate 

2007
Weighted
average 

£2.53 

£8.91 
£6.90 

2006
Weighted
average 

£1.92 

£7.66 
£6.30 

19.72% 

23.12% 

4.0 years 

4.0 years 

5.34% 

3.29% 

3.5% 

4.42% 

3.52% 

5.0% 

The expected volatility is based on the historic volatility of the Company’s share price over the previous three to seven years depending on the 
vesting term of the options. 

The following shares were granted under restricted share arrangements: 

Annual Bonus Share Matching Plan 

Long-Term Incentive Plan 

2007   

Weighted  
average 
fair value 

£   

7.67   

7.12   

2006 

Weighted
average
fair value
£ 

6.27 

6.96 

Number
of shares
000s 

90 

3,585 

Number 
of shares 
000s 

143 

3,377 

Restricted shares granted under the Annual Bonus Share Matching Plan are valued using the share price at the date of grant discounted by the 
dividend yield (2007: 3.26%; 2006: 3.66%) to take into account any dividends foregone. The fair value of shares granted under the Long-Term 
Incentive Plan that vest unconditionally is determined using the share price at the date of grant. Participants of the Long-Term Incentive Plan 
are entitled to dividends during the vesting period. The number of shares to vest has been adjusted, based on historical experience, to account 
for any potential forfeitures. Restricted shares with a market performance condition were valued by an independent actuary using a Monte 
Carlo model. Restricted shares with a non-market performance condition were fair valued based on the share price at the date of grant.  
Non-market performance conditions were considered by adjusting the number of shares expected to vest based on the most likely outcome  
of the relevant performance criteria. 

Subsidiary share option plans 
Interactive Data, a 62% subsidiary of the Group, operates the following share-based payment plans: 

2001 Employee Stock Purchase Plan  
The 2001 Employee Stock Purchase Plan allows all eligible employees worldwide to purchase stock at a discounted price at specific times. 

2000 Long-Term Incentive Plan  
Under this plan, the Compensation Committee of the Board of Directors can grant share-based awards representing up to 20% of the total 
number of shares of common stock outstanding at the date of grant. The plan provides for the discretionary issuance of share-based awards  
to directors, officers and employees of Interactive Data, as well as persons who provide consulting or other services to Interactive Data.  
The exercise price for all options granted to date has been equal to the market price of the underlying shares at the date of grant. Options  
expire ten years from the date of grant and generally vest over a three to four year period without any performance criteria attached. 

In addition, grants of restricted stock can be made to certain executives and members of the Board of Directors of Interactive Data.  
The awarded shares are available for distribution, at no cost, at the end of a three-year vesting period. No performance criteria are attached  
to shares granted under this plan. 

Interactive Data employees purchased 186,343 shares (2006: 206,324) under the 2001 Employee Stock Purchase Plan at an average share  
price of $17.77 (£8.93) (2006: $15.58; £7.96). The weighted average fair value at the date of grant was $4.76 (£2.39) (2006: $3.98; £2.03). 

86    Pearson Annual Report and Accounts 2007 

 
 
 
25. Share-based payments continued 
The number and weighted average exercise prices of share options granted under the 2000 Long-Term Incentive Plan are as follows: 

Outstanding at beginning of year 

Granted during the year 

Exercised during the year 

Forfeited during the year 

Expired during the year 

Outstanding at end of year 

Options exercisable at end of year 

Number
of share
options
000s 

10,506 

1,560 

(1,935)

(293)

(11)

9,827 

6,199 

Weighted
average
exercise
price
$ 

16.33 

27.17 

14.88 

20.38 

18.12 

18.21 

15.27 

2007   

Weighted 
average 
exercise 
price 

£   

8.34   

13.65   

Number 
of share 
options 
000s 

10,068 

1,835 

7.48   

(1,252) 

10.24   

9.10   

9.15   

7.67   

(139) 

(6) 

10,506 

6,547 

Weighted
average
exercise
price
$ 

15.16 

20.58 

12.88 

19.02 

11.46 

16.33 

14.11 

The options outstanding at the end of the year have a weighted average remaining contractual life and exercise price as follows: 

Range of exercise prices 
$ 

0 – 4.4 

4.4 – 7.5 

7.5 – 12 

12 – 20 

> 20 

2007   

Weighted 
average 
contractual 
life 
Years   

–   

2.1   

3.4   

5.6   

8.5   

6.6   

Number 
of share 
options 
000s 

– 

72 

1,745 

3,464 

4,546 

9,827 

Number
of share
options
000s 

30 

157 

2,164 

4,640 

3,515 

10,506 

2006 

Weighted
average
exercise
price
£ 

8.37 

10.52 

6.58 

9.72 

5.86 

8.34 

7.21 

2006 

Weighted
average
contractual
life
Years 

3.1 

2.3 

4.4 

6.4 

9.0 

6.8 

The fair value of the options granted under the Long-Term Incentive Plan and of the shares awarded under the 2001 Employee Stock Purchase 
Plan was estimated using a Black-Scholes model. The weighted average estimated fair values and the inputs into the Black-Scholes model are  
as follows: 

Fair value 

Weighted average share price 
Weighted average exercise price 

Expected volatility 

Expected life 

Risk free rate 

Expected dividend yield 

Forfeiture rate 

Long-Term Incentive Plan   

Employee Stock Purchase Plan 

2007 

2006   

2007 

2006 

Weighted 
average 

$6.60 

$27.17 
$27.17 

Weighted 

average   

$6.57   

$20.58   
$20.58   

Weighted
average 

$4.76 

$17.77 
$17.77 

Weighted
average 

$3.98 

$15.58 
$15.58 

23.40% 

25.90%   

20.50% 

18.32% 

5.0 years 

4.2% 
to 4.9% 
1.9% 

0.0% 

4.7 years   
4.6% 
to 5.1%   
0.0%   

0.5 years 

4.3%
to 5.1% 
2.0% 

0.5 years 
3.7%
to 5.2% 
0.0% 

0.0%   

0.0% 

0.0% 

The expected volatility is based on the historic volatility of Interactive Data’s share price over the vesting term of the options. 

During the year Interactive Data granted the following shares under restricted share arrangements: 

2000 Long-Term Incentive Plan 

Number
of shares
000s 

185 

Weighted
average
fair value
$ 

27.07 

2007 

Weighted 
average 
fair value 
£ 

13.60 

Number 
of shares 
000s 

196 

Weighted
average
fair value
$ 

20.82 

2006 

Weighted
average
fair value
£ 

10.64 

Shares awarded under the 2000 Long-Term Incentive Plan were valued based on the share price prevailing at the date of grant. 

87    Pearson Annual Report and Accounts 2007 

 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
Notes to the Consolidated Financial Statements continued 

26. Share capital and share premium 

At 1 January 2006 

Issue of ordinary shares – share option schemes 

At 31 December 2006 

Issue of ordinary shares – share option schemes 

At 31 December 2007 

Number  
of shares 
000s 

804,020 

2,089 

806,109 

1,919 

808,028 

Ordinary
shares
£m 

201 

1 

202 

– 

202 

Share
premium
£m 

2,477 

10 

2,487 

12 

2,499 

The total authorised number of ordinary shares is 1,194m shares (2006: 1,190m shares) with a par value of 25p per share (2006: 25p per share). 
All issued shares are fully paid. All shares have the same rights. 

The Group manages its capital to ensure that entities in the Group will be able to continue as a going concern while maximising the return to 
shareholders through the optimisation of the debt and equity balance.  

The capital structure of the Group consists of debt (see note 21), cash and cash equivalents (see note 20) and equity attributable to equity 
holders of the parent, comprising issued capital, reserves and retained earnings (see notes 26, 27 and 28). 

The Group reviews its capital structure on a regular basis and will balance its overall capital structure through payments of dividends, new share 
issues as well as the issue of new debt or the redemption of existing debt in line with the financial risk policies outlined on pages 22 to 24. 

27. Treasury shares 

At 1 January 2006 

Purchase of treasury shares 

Release of treasury shares 

At 31 December 2006 

Purchase of treasury shares 
Release of treasury shares 

At 31 December 2007 

Pearson plc   

Interactive Data 

Total 

Number
of shares
000s 

5,249 

4,700 

(1,188)

8,761 

4,900 
(1,900)

11,761 

Number 
of shares 
000s 

4,552 

1,500 

– 

6,052 

1,177 
– 

7,229 

£m   

110   

36   

(16)  

130   

40   
(29)  

141   

£m 

43 

16 

– 

59 

16 
– 

75 

 £m 

153 

52 

(16)

189 

56 
(29)

216 

The Group holds Pearson plc shares in trust to satisfy its obligations under its restricted share plans (see note 25). These shares, representing 
1.5% (2006: 1.1%) of called-up share capital, are held as treasury shares and have a par value of 25p per share. 

Interactive Data hold their own shares in respect of share buy-back programmes. These shares are held as treasury shares and have a par value 
of $0.01. 

The nominal value of Pearson plc treasury shares amounts to £2.9m (2006: £2.2m). The nominal value of Interactive Data treasury shares 
amounts to £0.04m (2006: £0.03m). 

At 31 December 2007 the market value of Pearson plc treasury shares was £86.1m (2006: £67.6m) and the market value of Interactive Data 
treasury shares was £119.9m (2006: £74.3m). 

88    Pearson Annual Report and Accounts 2007 

 
 
 
28. Other reserves and retained earnings 

All figures in £ millions 

At 1 January 2006 

Net exchange differences on translation of foreign operations 

Profit for the year attributable to equity holders of the Company 

Dividends paid to equity holders of the Company 

Equity settled transactions  

Actuarial gains on retirement benefit obligations 

Treasury shares released under employee share plans  

Taxation on items charged to equity  

At 31 December 2006 

Net exchange differences on translation of foreign operations 
Cumulative translation adjustment disposed 

Profit for the year attributable to equity holders of the Company 

Dividends paid to equity holders of the Company 

Equity settled transactions  

Actuarial gains on retirement benefit obligations 

Treasury shares released under employee share plans  

Taxation on items charged to equity  

At 31 December 2007 

Notes 

Translation  
reserve 

Fair value 
reserve 

(175) 

(417) 

– 

– 

– 

– 

– 

– 

(592) 

25 
53 

– 

– 

– 

– 

– 

– 

(514) 

9 

25 

24 

27 

7 

31 

9 

25 

24 

27 

7 

– 

– 

– 

– 

– 

– 

– 

– 

– 

– 
– 

– 

– 

– 

– 

– 

– 

– 

Total
other 
reserves 

(175)

(417)

– 

– 

– 

– 

– 

– 

Retained
earnings 

1,214 

– 

446 

(220)

25 

107 

(16)

12 

(592)

1,568 

25 
53 

– 

– 

– 

– 

– 

– 

– 
– 

284 

(238)

30 

80 

(29)

29 

(514)

1,724 

The translation reserve includes exchange differences arising from the translation of the net investment in foreign operations and of borrowings 
and other currency instruments designated as hedges of such investments. Included in the translation reserve is a £49m loss (2006: £53m loss) 
relating to net assets classified as held for sale. 

89    Pearson Annual Report and Accounts 2007 

 
 
 
 
 
 
 
Notes to the Consolidated Financial Statements continued 

29. Business combinations 
On 4 May 2007, the Group announced that it had agreed to acquire Harcourt Assessment, a leading test provider, and Harcourt Education 
International, publisher of textbooks and online materials. The Harcourt Education International acquisition has closed in several stages, 
following regulatory reviews of the relevant authorities where required. The acquisition of Harcourt Assessment completed on 30 January 2008 
and is therefore excluded from the numbers below (see note 36). 

On 31 July 2007, the Group acquired eCollege, a leader in the US online distance learning market. In addition, several other businesses were 
acquired in the current year, mainly within the FT Group. None of these other acquisitions were individually material to the Group. The largest 
single acquisition in 2006 was Mergermarket. 

The provisional assets and liabilities arising from acquisitions are as follows: 

All figures in £ millions 

Property, plant and equipment 

Intangible assets 

Intangible assets – Pre-publication 

Inventories 

Trade and other receivables 

Cash and cash equivalents 

Trade and other liabilities 

Financial liabilities – Borrowings 

Current income tax 

Net deferred income tax liabilities 

Retirement benefit obligations 

Provisions for other liabilities and charges 

Equity minority interest 

Net assets acquired at fair value 

Goodwill 

Total  

Satisfied by: 

Cash 

Deferred consideration 

Net prior year adjustments 

Total consideration 

Carrying value of net assets acquired 
Fair value adjustments 

Fair value to the Group 

Notes 

10 

11 

17 

13 

24 

22 

11 

Harcourt
Fair value 

eCollege 
Fair value 

Other 
Fair value 

2007 

Total
Fair value 

2006 

Total
Fair value 

6 

81 

16 

15 

12 

– 

(23)

– 

2 

(21)

– 

(1)

– 

87 

68 

155 

5 

100 

2 

– 

13 

– 

(12) 

(1) 

2 

(24) 

– 

– 

– 

85 

181 

266 

(155)

(266) 

– 

– 

– 

– 

(155)

(266) 

25 
62 

87 

15 
70 

85 

– 

16 

– 

– 

3 

– 

(3) 

– 

– 

– 

(1) 

– 

15 

55 

70 

(47) 

(12) 

(11) 

(70) 

1 
14 

15 

11 

197 

18 

15 

28 

– 

(38)

(1)

4 

(45)

– 

(2)

– 

187 

304 

491 

(468)

(12)

(11)

(491)

41 
146 

187 

13 

156 

4 

14 

24 

28 

(52)

(3)

– 

(26)

(2)

(3)

(9)

144 

246 

390 

(382)

(17)

9 

(390)

48 
96 

144 

The goodwill arising on the acquisition of Harcourt and eCollege results from substantial cost and revenue synergies and from benefits that 
cannot be separately recognised, such as the assembled workforce. 

The fair value adjustments relating to the acquisition of Harcourt and eCollege are provisional and will be finalised during 2008. They include 
the valuation of intangible assets and the related deferred tax effect. Prior year adjustments relate to the finalisation of fair value adjustments 
and increases in deferred consideration relating to Mergermarket. 

90    Pearson Annual Report and Accounts 2007 

 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
29. Business combinations continued 
Harcourt 

All figures in £ millions 

Property, plant and equipment 

Intangible assets 

Intangible assets – Pre-publication 

Inventories 

Trade and other receivables 

Trade and other liabilities 

Current income tax 

Net deferred income tax liabilities 

Provisions for other liabilities and charges 

Net assets acquired at fair value 

Goodwill 

Total  

eCollege 

All figures in £ millions 

Property, plant and equipment 

Intangible assets 

Intangible assets – Pre-publication 

Trade and other receivables 

Trade and other liabilities 

Financial liabilities – Borrowings 

Current income tax 

Net deferred income tax assets/(liabilities) 

Net assets acquired at fair value 

Goodwill 

Total  

Net cash outflow on acquisition: 
All figures in £ millions 

Cash – Current year acquisitions 

Deferred payments for prior year acquisitions and other items 

Cash and cash equivalents acquired 

Cash outflow on acquisition 

Carrying  
value 

Fair 
value adjs 

Provisional
fair value 

6 

– 

14 

15 

12 

(23) 

2 

– 

(1) 

25 

– 

81 

2 

– 

– 

– 

– 

(21)

– 

62 

6 

81 

16 

15 

12 

(23)

2 

(21)

(1)

87 

68 

155 

Carrying  
value 

Fair 
value adjs 

Provisional
fair value 

5 

2 

2 

13 

(10) 

(1) 

2 

2 

15 

– 

98 

– 

– 

(2)

– 

– 

(26)

70 

2007 

(468)

(4)

– 

5 

100 

2 

13 

(12)

(1)

2 

(24)

85 

181 

266 

2006 

(382)

(9)

28 

(472)

(363)

Harcourt contributed £71m of sales and £7m to the Group’s profit before tax between the date of acquisition and the balance sheet date. 
eCollege contributed £15m of sales and £4m to the Group’s profit before tax between the date of acquisition and the balance sheet date.  
Other businesses acquired contributed £4m to the Group’s sales and £2m to the Group’s profit before tax between the date of acquisition  
and the balance sheet date. 

If the acquisitions had been completed on 1 January 2007, the Group estimates that sales for the period would have been £4,307m and profit 
before tax would have been £479m. 

91    Pearson Annual Report and Accounts 2007 

 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
Notes to the Consolidated Financial Statements continued 

30. Non-current assets classified as held for sale 
The Group disposed of its Data Management business on 22 February 2008 and this business is classified as held for sale in 2007. The Data 
Management business was formerly part of the Group’s Other Assessment and Testing cash-generating unit (CGU) and was carved out of  
this CGU in preparation for disposal. As a result, the Group has recognised an impairment on the goodwill allocated to the Data Management 
business in anticipation of the loss on disposal (see note 3). In 2006, assets classified as held for sale related to Government Solutions. The major 
classes of assets and liabilities comprising the operations classified as held for sale at the balance sheet date are as follows: 

All figures in £ millions 

Property, plant and equipment 

Intangible assets – Goodwill 

Intangible assets – Other 

Intangible assets – Pre-publication 

Inventories 

Trade and other receivables 

Non-current assets classified as held for sale 

Other liabilities 

Liabilities directly associated with non-current assets classified as held for sale 

Net assets classified as held for sale 

31. Disposals 

All figures in £ millions 

Disposal of subsidiaries 

Property, plant and equipment 

Intangible assets 

Inventories 

Trade and other receivables 

Cash and cash equivalents 

Deferred income tax liabilities 

Trade and other liabilities 

Retirement benefit obligations 

Provisions for other liabilities and charges 
Equity minority interests 
Attributable goodwill 

Cumulative translation adjustment 

Net (assets)/liabilities disposed 

Cash received 

Other proceeds received 

Costs 

(Loss)/profit on sale 

Cash flow from disposals 

Cash – Current year disposals 

Costs paid 

Cash and cash equivalents disposed  

Net cash inflow 

Notes 

10 

11 

2007 

7 

96 

– 

2 

4 

8 

117 

(9) 

(9) 

108 

2007 

Government
Solutions 

Les Echos 

Datamark 

Other 

Total 

(10)

(6)

– 

(63)

– 

– 

23 

– 

– 
– 
(221)

(53)

(330)

286 

35 

(10)

(19)

(3)

– 

– 

(26)

(14)

2 

42 

3 

1 
– 
(4)

– 

1 

174 

– 

(10)

165 

(3) 

– 

(1) 

(5) 

– 

– 

6 

– 

– 
– 
(17) 

– 

(20) 

20 

– 

– 

– 

– 

– 

– 

(1) 

– 

– 

2 

– 

– 
(8) 
(8) 

– 

(15) 

15 

– 

– 

– 

(16)

(6)

(1)

(95)

(14)

2 

73 

3 

1 
(8)
(250)

(53)

(364)

495 

35 

(20)

146 

2006 

9 

221 

7 

– 

1 

56 

294 

(26)

(26)

268 

2006 

Total 

– 

– 

– 

– 

– 

– 

(1)

– 

– 
(4)
(5)

– 

(10)

10 

– 

– 

– 

2007 

2006 

495 

(12)

(14)

469 

10 

– 

– 

10 

Details of the businesses disposed are shown in note 3. 

The proceeds received for the sale of Government Solutions include £286m in cash, £20m in Loan Stock and a 10% interest in the acquiring 
company valued at £15m.  

Other includes share options exercised in Interactive Data. 

92    Pearson Annual Report and Accounts 2007 

 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
32. Cash generated from operations 
All figures in £ millions 

Net profit 

Adjustments for: 

Income tax 

Depreciation 

Amortisation of purchased intangible assets 

Adjustment on recognition of pre-acquisition deferred tax 

Amortisation of other intangible assets 

Investment in pre-publication assets 

Amortisation of pre-publication assets 

Loss on sale of property, plant and equipment 

Net finance costs 

Share of results of joint ventures and associates 

Profit on sale of discontinued operations 

Goodwill impairment of discontinued operation 

Net foreign exchange gains/(losses) from transactions 

Share-based payment costs 

Inventories 

Trade and other receivables 

Trade and other liabilities 

Retirement benefit obligations 

Provisions 

Net cash generated from operations 

Dividends from joint ventures and associates 
Purchase of property, plant and equipment 

Purchase of intangible assets 

Finance lease principal payments 

Proceeds from sale of property, plant and equipment 
Add back: Special pension contribution 

Add back: Cash spent against integration and fair value provisions 

Operating cash flow 

Operating tax paid 

Net operating finance costs paid 

Operating free cash flow 
Non-operating tax paid 

Special pension contribution 

Cash spent against integration and fair value provisions 

Total free cash flow 
Dividends paid (including to minorities) 

Net movement of funds from operations 

Notes 

10 

11 

11 

11 

17 

17 

6 

12 

3 

3 

25 

12 

2007 

310 

222 

68 

45 

– 

25 

(230)

192 

1 

106 

(23)

(146)

97 

11 

30 

(1)

(5)

80 

(126)

3 

659 

32 
(86)

(33)

(2)

14 
100 

– 

684 

(61)

(90)

533 
(26)

(100)

– 

407 
(248)

159 

2006 

469 

19 

77 

28 

7 

23 

(213)

210 

2 

74 

(24)

– 

– 

(37)

25 

(16)

(60)

54 

(17)

– 

621 

45 
(68)

(29)

(3)

8 
– 

1 

575 

(59)

(82)

434 
– 

– 

(1)

433 
(235)

198 

Included in net cash generated from operations is an amount of £7m (2006: £33m) relating to discontinued operations. 

Operating cash flow, operating free cash flow and total free cash flow have been disclosed as they are part of Pearson’s corporate and operating 
measures. Following the completion of the latest actuarial valuation of the UK Group pension plan as at January 2006, the Group agreed that 
during 2007 it would make additional payments to the plan amounting to £100m. The Group has excluded this £100m from its definition of 
operating cash flow and operating free cash flow as it distorts the underlying operating performance for the year. 

In the cash flow statement, proceeds from sale of property, plant and equipment comprise: 
All figures in £ millions 

Net book amount 

Loss on sale of property, plant and equipment 

Proceeds from sale of property, plant and equipment 

The principal other non-cash transactions are movements in finance lease obligations of £4m (2006: £4m). 

93    Pearson Annual Report and Accounts 2007 

2007 

2006 

15 

(1)

14 

10 

(2)

8 

 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
Notes to the Consolidated Financial Statements continued 

33. Contingencies 
There are contingent Group liabilities that arise in the normal course of business in respect of indemnities, warranties and guarantees in relation 
to former subsidiaries and in respect of guarantees in relation to subsidiaries and associates. In addition there are contingent liabilities of the 
Group in respect of legal claims. None of these claims are expected to result in a material gain or loss to the Group. 

34. Commitments 
Capital commitments 
Capital expenditure contracted for at the balance sheet date but not yet incurred is as follows: 
All figures in £ millions 

Property, plant and equipment 

2007 

3 

2006 

– 

The Group leases various offices and warehouses under non-cancellable operating lease agreements. The leases have varying terms and renewal 
rights. The Group also leases various plant and equipment under operating lease agreements, also with varying terms. The lease expenditure 
charged to the income statement during the year is disclosed in note 4. 

The future aggregate minimum lease payments in respect of operating leases are as follows: 
All figures in £ millions 

Not later than one year 

Later than one year and not later than two years 

Later than two years and not later than three years 

Later than three years and not later than four years 

Later than four years and not later than five years 

Later than five years 

2007 

123 

116 

102 

93 

85 

834 

2006 

123 

113 

103 

90 

83 

857 

1,353 

1,369 

35. Related party transactions 
Joint ventures and associates – Amounts advanced to joint ventures and associates during the year and at the balance sheet date are set out in 
note 12. Amounts falling due from joint ventures and associates are set out in note 19. 

Key management personnel are deemed to be the members of the board of directors of Pearson plc. It is this board which has responsibility  
for planning, directing and controlling the activities of the Group. Key management personnel compensation is disclosed in the directors’ 
remuneration report. 

There were no other material related party transactions. 

No guarantees have been provided to related parties. 

36. Events after the balance sheet date 
On 2 January 2008, the Group completed its acquisition of Money-Media, a US-based company offering online news and commentary  
for the money management industry, for $64m. 

On 30 January 2008, the Group completed its $647m acquisition of Harcourt Assessment from Reed Elsevier, after receiving clearance from  
the US Department of Justice.  

Also on 30 January 2008, the Group announced that it had agreed to sell its 50% interest in Financial Times Deutschland (FTD) to its joint 
venture partner, Gruner + Jahr. The Group’s share of FTD assets at 31 December 2007 was €8m and a small profit on sale is expected. 

On 22 February 2008, the Group completed the sale of its Data Management business to M & F Worldwide Corp. for $225m. The Group 
expects to report a loss on this transaction in 2008 after taking into account the cumulative translation adjustment and tax. 

94    Pearson Annual Report and Accounts 2007 

 
 
Company Statement of Recognised Income and Expense 
Year ended 31 December 2007 

All figures in £ millions 

(Loss)/profit for the year 

Total recognised income and expense for the year 

Company Balance Sheet 
As at 31 December 2007 

All figures in £ millions 

Assets 

Non-current assets 

Investments in subsidiaries 

Amounts due from subsidiaries 

Financial assets – Derivative financial instruments 

Other financial assets 

Current assets 

Amounts due from subsidiaries 

Current income tax assets 

Cash and cash equivalents (excluding overdrafts) 

Financial assets – Derivative financial instruments 

Other assets 

Total assets 

Liabilities 
Non-current liabilities 

Financial liabilities – Borrowings 

Financial liabilities – Derivative financial instruments 

Amounts due to subsidiaries 

Current liabilities 

Other liabilities 

Financial liabilities – Borrowings 

Amounts due to subsidiaries 

Total liabilities 

Net assets 

Equity 
Share capital 

Share premium 

Treasury shares 

Other reserves 

Retained earnings 

2007 

(43)

(43)

2006 

78 

78 

Notes 

2007 

2006 

2 

6 

4 

6 

5 

6 

5 

7 

7 

8 

9 

9 

6,650 

73 

23 

1 

7,103 

460 

36 

1 

6,747 

7,600 

2,040 

1,372 

42 

61 

28 

– 

73 

153 

50 

1 

8,918 

9,249 

(658)

(16)

(425)

(761)

(19)

(519)

(1,099)

(1,299)

– 

(749)

(3,401)

(5,249)

3,669 

202 

2,499 

(82)

447 

603 

(17)

(784)

(3,194)

(5,294)

3,955 

202 

2,487 

(65)

447 

884 

Total equity attributable to equity holders of the Company 

3,669 

3,955 

These financial statements have been approved for issue by the board of directors on 13 March 2008 and signed on its behalf by  

Robin Freestone, Chief financial officer 

95    Pearson Annual Report and Accounts 2007 

 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
Notes 

2007 

2006 

(43)

78 

(67)

183 
(1)

(499)

(32)

– 

(459)

(247)
99 

(607)

(46)

913 

5 

872 

12 

(33)

347 

(391)

(238)

(303)
1 

(37)

(183)

(220)

(67)

63 
16 

(115)

– 

20 

(5)

(175)
55 

(125)

(120)

– 

15 

(105)

11 

6 

– 

(12)

(220)

(215)
(10)

(455)

272 

(183)

7 

4 

Company Cash Flow Statement  
Year ended 31 December 2007 

All figures in £ millions 

Cash flows from operating activities 

Net (loss)/profit 

Adjustments for: 

Income tax  

Net finance costs 
Other liabilities 

Amounts due from subsidiaries 

Profit on sale of subsidiaries 

Amount written down in investments in subsidiaries 

Net cash used in operations 

Interest paid 
Tax received 

Net cash used in operating activities 
Cash flows from investing activities 

Acquisition of subsidiaries, net of cash acquired 

Disposal of subsidiaries, net of cash disposed 

Interest received 

Net cash generated/(used in) from investing activities 
Cash flows from financing activities 

Proceeds from issue of ordinary shares 

Net (investment in)/Group contribution to purchase of treasury shares 

Proceeds from borrowings 

Repayment of borrowings 

Dividends paid to Company’s shareholders 

Net cash used in financing activities 
Effects of exchange rate changes on cash and cash equivalents 

Net decrease in cash and cash equivalents 

Cash and cash equivalents at beginning of year 

Cash and cash equivalents at end of year 

96    Pearson Annual Report and Accounts 2007 

 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
Notes to the Company Financial Statements 

B1. Accounting policies 
Ba. Basis of preparation 
The financial statements on pages 95 to 101 comprise the separate financial statements of Pearson plc. As permitted by section 230(4) of the 
Companies Act 1985, only the Group’s income statement has been presented. 

The Company has no employees. 

Bb. Group accounting policies 
The accounting policies applied in the preparation of these Company financial statements are the same as those set out in note 1 to the Group 
financial statements with the addition of the following: 

BInvestments  
Investments in subsidiaries are stated at cost less provision for impairment. 

B2. Investments in subsidiaries 
All figures in £ millions 

At beginning of year 

Subscription for share capital in subsidiaries 

External disposal 

Disposal to subsidiary 

Provision for impairment 

At end of year 

2007 

7,103 

425 

(1)

(877)

– 

6,650 

2006 

6,883 

1,019 

– 

(779)

(20)

7,103 

3. Financial instruments and risk management 
The Company’s financial instruments comprise amounts due to/from subsidiary undertakings, cash and cash equivalents, derivative  
financial instruments and current and non-current borrowings. Derivative financial instruments are held at fair value, with all other  
financial instruments held at amortised cost. The Company’s approach to the management of financial risks is discussed on pages 22 to 24.  
The Company believes the value of its financial assets to be fully recoverable. 

The Company designates certain of its qualifying derivative financial instruments as hedges of the fair value of its bonds (fair value hedges). 
Changes in the fair value of these derivative financial instruments are recorded in the income statement, together with any change in the fair 
value of the hedged liability attributable to the hedged risk. 

The carrying value of the Company’s financial instruments is exposed to movements in interest rates and foreign currency exchange rates 
(primarily US dollars). The Company estimates that a 1% increase in interest rates would result in a £9m decrease in the carrying value of  
its financial instruments, with a 1% decrease in interest rates resulting in a £10m increase in their carrying value. The Company also estimates 
that a 10% strengthening in sterling would increase the carrying value of its financial instruments by £21m, while a 10% decrease in the  
value of sterling would decrease the carrying value by £25m. These increases and decreases in carrying value would be recorded through the 
income statement. 

The maturity of contracted cash flows on the Company’s borrowings and all of its derivative financial instruments are as follows: 

USD 

132 

734 

198 

1,064 

425 

546 

(268) 

361 

1,064 

GBP 

(30) 

70 

285 

325 

– 

483 

(160) 

2 

325 

2007 

Total 

102 

804 

483 

1,389 

425 

1,029 

(428)

363 

1,389 

EUR 

– 

– 

– 

– 

– 

– 

– 

– 

– 

All figures in £ millions 

Not later than one year 

Later than one year and not later than five years 

Later than five years 

Total 

Analysed as: 

Revolving credit facility and commercial paper 

Bonds 

Rate derivatives – inflows 

Rate derivatives – outflows 

Total 

97    Pearson Annual Report and Accounts 2007 

 
 
2
0
2
9
3
0
3
2
0
 
 
 
 
 
 
Notes to the Company Financial Statements continued 

3. Financial instruments and risk management continued 

All figures in £ millions 

Not later than one year 

Later than one year and not later than five years 

Later than five years 

Total 

Analysed as: 
Revolving credit facility and commercial paper 

Bonds 

Rate derivatives – inflows 

Rate derivatives – outflows 

Total 

USD  

142 

429 

248 

819 

– 

561 

GBP  

18 

60 

242 

320 

– 

511 

(318) 

(329) 

576 

819 

138 

320 

EUR  

265 

– 

– 

2006 

Total 

425 

489 

490 

265 

1,404 

– 

423 

(192)

34 

265 

– 

1,495 

(839)

748 

1,404 

All cash flow projections shown above are on an undiscounted basis. Any cash flows based on a floating rate are calculated using interest rates  
as set at the date of the last rate reset. Where this is not possible, floating rates are based on those prevailing at 31 December in the relevant year. 
Amounts drawn under revolving credit facilities are assumed to mature at the maturity date of the relevant facility, with interest calculated as 
payable in each calendar year up to and including the date of maturity of the facility. All derivative amounts are shown gross, although the 
company net settles these wherever possible. 

4. Cash and cash equivalents (excluding overdrafts) 
All figures in £ millions 

Cash at bank and in hand 

Short-term bank deposits 

2007 

1 

60 

61 

2006 

48 

105 

153 

Short-term bank deposits are invested with banks and earn interest at the prevailing short-term deposit rates. Cash and cash equivalents have 
fair values that approximate to their carrying amounts due to their short-term nature. 

Cash and cash equivalents include the following for the purpose of the cash flow statement: 
All figures in £ millions 

Cash and cash equivalents 

Bank overdrafts 

B5. Financial liabilities – Borrowings 
All figures in £ millions 

Non-current 

10.5% Sterling Bonds 2008 (nominal amount £100m) 

7% Global Dollar Bonds 2011 (nominal amount $500m) 

7% Sterling Bonds 2014 (nominal amount £250m) 

4.625% US Dollar notes 2018 (nominal amount $300m) 

Current 
Due within one year or on demand: 

Bank loans and overdrafts 
6.25% Euro Bonds 2007 (nominal amount €591m) 
10.5% Sterling Bonds 2008 (nominal amount £100m) 

2007 

61 

(281)

(220)

2006 

153 

(336)

(183)

2007 

2006 

– 

264 

251 

143 

658 

644 

– 

105 

749 

105 

266 

251 

139 

761 

363 

421 

– 

784 

Total borrowings 

1,407 

1,545 

Included in the non-current borrowings above is £4m of accrued interest (2006: £10m). 

Included in the current borrowings above is £7m of accrued interest (2006: £22m). 

98    Pearson Annual Report and Accounts 2007 

 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
2
1
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
5. Financial liabilities – Borrowings continued 
The maturity of the Company’s non-current borrowings is as follows: 
All figures in £ millions 

Between one and two years 

Between two and five years 

Over five years 

2007 

– 

264 

394 

658 

2006 

105 

266 

390 

761 

As at 31 December 2007 the exposure of the borrowings of the Company to interest rate changes when the borrowings re-price is as follows: 

All figures in £ millions 

Carrying value of borrowings 

Effect of rate derivatives 

The carrying amounts and market values of non-current borrowings are as follows: 

Total 

One year 

1,407 

– 

749 

359 

1,407 

1,108 

All figures in £ millions 

10.5% Sterling Bonds 2008 

7% Global Dollar Bonds 2011 

7% Sterling Bonds 2014 

4.625% US Dollar notes 2018 

Effective
interest rate 

10.53% 

7.16% 

7.20% 

4.69% 

Carrying  
amount 
2007 

Market value 
2007 

Carrying 
amount
2006 

– 

264 

251 

143 

658 

– 

267 

261 

135 

663 

105 

266 

251 

139 

761 

One to
five years 

More than
five years 

264 

(7)

257 

394 

(352)

42 

Market
value
2006 

106 

269 

265 

135 

775 

The market values are based on clean market prices at the year end or, where these are not available, on the quoted market prices of comparable 
debt issued by other companies. The effective interest rates above relate to the underlying debt instruments.  

The carrying amounts of the Company’s borrowings are denominated in the following currencies: 
All figures in £ millions 

US dollar 

Sterling 

Euro 

B6. Derivative financial instruments 
The Company’s outstanding derivative financial instruments are as follows: 

2007 

779 

620 

8 

2006 

462 

654 

429 

1,407 

1,545 

All figures in £ millions 

Interest rate derivatives – in a fair value hedge relationship 

Interest rate derivatives – not in hedge relationship 

Cross currency rate derivatives 

Total 

Analysed as expiring: 
In less than one year 

Later than one year and not later than five years 

Later than five years 

Total 

Gross notional
amounts 

Assets 

Liabilities   

Gross notional 
amounts 

Assets 

Liabilities 

2007   

2006 

522 

796 

150 

1,468 

320 

796 

352 

1,468 

18 

7 

26 

51 

28 

13 

10 

51 

(8)  

(8)  

–   

(16)  

–   

(8)  

(8)  

(16)  

953 

1,026 

410 

2,389 

976 

1,005 

408 

2,389 

20 

9 

57 

86 

50 

26 

10 

86 

(17)

(2)

– 

(19)

– 

(4)

(15)

(19)

The carrying value of the above derivative financial instruments equals their fair value. Fair values are determined by using market data and the 
use of established estimation techniques such as discounted cash flow and option valuation models.  

B 

99    Pearson Annual Report and Accounts 2007 

 
 
 
 
 
 
2
 
 
 
  
 
 
 
3
Notes to the Company Financial Statements continued 

7. Share capital and share premium 

At 1 January 2006 

Issue of shares – share option schemes 

At 31 December 2006 

Issue of shares – share option schemes 

At 31 December 2007 

Number  
of shares 
000s 

804,020 

2,089 

806,109 

1,919 

808,028 

Ordinary
shares
£m 

201 

1 

202 

– 

202 

Share
premium
£m 

2,477 

10 

2,487 

12 

2,499 

The total authorised number of ordinary shares is 1,194m shares (2006: 1,190m shares) with a par value of 25p per share (2006: 25p per share). 
All issued shares are fully paid. All shares have the same rights. 

B8. Treasury shares 

At 1 January 2006 

Purchase of treasury shares less contributions received 
Release of treasury shares  

At 31 December 2006 

Purchase of treasury shares less contributions received 

Release of treasury shares  

At 31 December 2007 

Number
of shares
000s 

5,249 

4,700 
(1,188)

8,761 

4,900 

(1,900)

11,761 

£m 

55 

26 
(16)

65 

46 

(29)

82 

The Company holds its own shares in trust to satisfy its obligations under its restricted share plans. These shares are held as treasury shares and 
have a par value of 25p per share. The nominal value of the Company’s treasury shares amounts to £2.9m (2006: £2.2m). At 31 December 2007 
the market value of the Company’s treasury shares was £86.1m (2006: £67.6m). 

B9. Other reserves and retained earnings 

All figures in £ millions 

At 1 January 2006 

Profit for the financial year 

Dividends paid 

Balance at 31 December 2006 

Loss for the financial year 
Dividends paid 

At 31 December 2007 

Special 
reserve 

447 

– 

– 

447 

– 
– 

447 

Retained 
earnings 

1,026 

78 

(220)

884 

(43)
(238)

603 

Total 

1,473 

78 

(220)

1,331 

(43)
(238)

1,050 

The special reserve represents the cumulative effect of cancellation of the Company’s share premium account.  

Included within retained earnings in 2007 is an amount of £131m (2006: £99m) relating to profit on intra-group disposals that is  
not distributable. 

B 

100    Pearson Annual Report and Accounts 2007 

 
 
2
3
 
4
5
10. Contingencies 
There are contingent liabilities that arise in the normal course of business in respect of indemnities, warranties and guarantees in relation to 
former subsidiaries and guarantees in relation to subsidiaries. In addition there are contingent liabilities in respect of legal claims. None of these 
claims is expected to result in a material gain or loss to the Company. 

611. Audit fees 
Statutory audit fees relating to the Company were £35,000 (2006: £35,000). Audit-related regulatory reporting fees relating to the Company 
were £nil (2006: £nil). 

B12. Related party transactions 
BSubsidiaries  
The Company transacts and has outstanding balances with its subsidiaries. Amounts due from subsidiaries and amounts due to subsidiaries  
are disclosed on the face of the Company Balance Sheet.  

These loans are generally unsecured and interest is calculated based on market rates. The Company has interest payable to subsidiaries during 
the year of £221m (2006: £149m) and interest receivable from subsidiaries during the year of £115m (2006: £61m). Management fees payable to 
subsidiaries in respect of centrally provided services amounted to £33m (2006: £33m). Dividends received from subsidiaries in 2007 were £74m 
(2006: £28m). 

Key management personnel 
Key management personnel are deemed to be the members of the board of directors of the Company. It is this board which has responsibility 
for planning, directing and controlling the activities of the Company. Key management personnel compensation is disclosed in the directors’ 
remuneration report of the Group.  

There were no other material related party transactions. 

101    Pearson Annual Report and Accounts 2007 

 
7
3
1
Principal Subsidiaries 

The principal operating subsidiaries at 31 December 2007 are listed below. They operate mainly in the countries of incorporation or 
registration, the investments are in equity share capital and they are all 100% owned unless stated otherwise. 

Country of incorporation or registration 

Pearson Education 

Pearson Education Inc. 

Pearson Education Ltd 

Edexcel Ltd* 

NCS Pearson Inc. 

FT Group 
The Financial Times Ltd 

Mergermarket Ltd 

Interactive Data (62%) 

The Penguin Group 

Penguin Group (USA) Inc. 

The Penguin Publishing Co Ltd 

Dorling Kindersley Holdings Ltd* 

*Direct investment of Pearson plc

US 

England 

England 

US 

England 

England 

US 

US 

England 

England 

102    Pearson Annual Report and Accounts 2007 

 
 
 
 
Five Year Summary 

All figures in £ millions 

Sales 

Continuing operations 

Discontinued businesses included in adjusted sales* 

Adjusted sales* 

Discontinued businesses excluded from adjusted sales 

Total sales 

Adjusted sales - continuing as reported** 

School 

Higher Education 

Professional* 

Education* 

FT Publishing 

Interactive Data 

FT Group 

Penguin 

Continuing* 

Discontinued 

Total sales 

Adjusted operating profit 
School 

Higher Education 

Professional* 

Education* 

FT Publishing 

Interactive Data 

FT Group 

Penguin 

Continuing* 
Discontinued 

Total adjusted operating profit 

Adjusted operating profit – continuing as reported** 

2003 

2004 

2005 

2006 

2007 

3,510 

73 

3,583 

436 

4,019 

3,850 

3,340  

3,662  

66  

3,406  

480  

3,886  

3,696  

63  

3,725  

398  

4,123  

4,096  

3,990 

61 

4,051 

372 

4,423 

4,051 

4,162 

56 

4,218 

111 

4,329 

4,218 

1,149 

1,087  

1,295  

1,455 

1,537 

770 

318 

729  

300  

779  

301  

795 

341 

793 

354 

2,237 

2,116  

2,375  

2,591 

2,684 

233 

273 

506 

840 

3,583 

436 

4,019 

116 

142 

33 

291 

(31)

70 

39 

83 

413 
34 

447 

416 

235  

269  

504  

786  

3,406  

480  

3,886  

108  

129  

18  

255  

(2) 

67  

65  

52  

372  
54  

426  

400  

249  

297  

546  

804  

3,725  

398  

4,123  

147  

156  

25  

328  

17  

80  

97  

60  

485  
21  

506  

509  

280 

332 

612 

848 

4,051 

372 

4,423 

184 

161 

38 

383 

27 

89 

116 

66 

565 
27 

592 

565 

344 

344 

688 

846 

4,218 

111 

4,329 

203 

161 

40 

404 

56 

97 

153 

74 

631 
3 

634 

631 

Operating margin – continuing as reported** 

10.8% 

10.8% 

12.4% 

13.9% 

15.0% 

447 

(90)

(116)

(22)

219 

794.4 

27.6 p 

426  

(76) 

(108) 

(23) 

219  

506  

(84) 

(128) 

(22) 

272  

592 

(90)

(130)

(28)

344 

795.6  

27.5 p 

797.9  

34.1 p 

798.4 

43.1 p 

634 

(85)

(145)

(32)

372 

796.8 

46.7 p 

Adjusted earnings 
Total adjusted operating profit 

Interest 

Tax*** 

Minorities 

Adjusted earnings*** 

Weighted average shares 

Adjusted earnings per share*** 

103    Pearson Annual Report and Accounts 2007 

 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
Five Year Summary continued 

All figures in £ millions 

Operating cash flow 

Operating cash conversion 

Operating free cash flow 

Operating free cash flow per share 

Free cash flow 

Free cash flow per share 

Net assets 

Net debt 

Return on invested capital 

Total adjusted operating profit 

Cash tax (15%) 

Return 

Invested capital 

Return on invested capital 

Dividend per share 

*Includes Data Management business classified as discontinued for statutory purposes 

**Includes Government Solutions and Les Echos in continuing for 2003, 2004 and 2005 

***2006 and 2007 restated for tax deductibility of goodwill and intangible amortisation (2003, 2004 and 2005 not restated) 

2003 

318 

71% 

208 

26.2p 

190 

23.9p 

3,161 

1,376 

447 

(67)

380 

6,315 

6.0% 

2004 

418  

98% 

278  

34.9p 

284  

35.7p 

3,014  

1,221  

426  

(64) 

362  

5,879  

6.2% 

2005 

570  

113% 

440  

55.1p 

431  

54.0p 

3,733  

996  

506  

(76) 

430  

6,454  

6.7% 

2006 

575 

97% 

434 

54.4p 

433 

54.2p 

3,644 

1,059 

592 

(89)

503 

6,280 

8.0% 

2007 

684 

108% 

533 

66.9p 

407 

51.1p 

3,874 

973 

634 

(95)

539 

6,592 

8.2% 

24.2p 

25.4p 

27.0p 

29.3p 

31.6p 

104    Pearson Annual Report and Accounts 2007 

 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
Corporate and Operating Measures 

BSales – underlying and constant exchange rate movement 
Sales movement for total operations (including the Data Management business) excluding the impact of acquisitions and disposals and 
movements in exchange rates. 
All figures in £ millions 

Underlying increase 

Portfolio changes 

Exchange differences 

Total sales increase 

Underlying increase 

Constant exchange rate increase 

2007 

249 

146 

(228)

167 

6% 

10% 

BAdjusted income statement 
Reconciliation of the Consolidated Income Statement to the adjusted numbers presented as non-GAAP measures in the financial statements. 

All figures in £ millions 

Sales  

Gross profit 

Operating expenses 

Share of results of joint ventures and associates 

Operating profit 
Net finance costs 

Profit before tax 
Income tax 

Profit for the year from continuing operations 

Profit for the year from discontinued operations 

Profit for the year 

Minority interest 

Earnings 

All figures in £ millions 

Sales  

Gross profit 

Operating expenses 

Share of results of joint ventures and associates 

Operating profit 

Net finance costs 

Profit before tax 
Income tax 

Profit for the year from continuing operations 
Profit for the year from discontinued operations 

Profit for the year 

Minority interest 

Earnings 

Statutory
Income
Statement 

Re-analyse
discontinued
operations 

Other
net gains
and losses 

Amortisation
of acquired
intangibles 

Other net 
finance 
costs/income 

Tax 
amortisation 
benefit 

Recognition
of tax
losses 

4,162 

2,252 

(1,701)

23 

574 
(106)

468 
(131)

337 

(27)

310 

(26)

284 

56 

72 

(57)

– 

15 
– 

15 
(5)

10 

(10)

– 

– 

– 

– 

– 

– 

– 

– 
– 

– 
(9)

(9)

37 

28 

– 

28 

– 

– 

45 

– 

45 
– 

45 
(19)

26 

– 

26 

(4)

22 

– 

– 

– 

– 

– 
21 

21 
(6) 

15 

– 

15 

– 

15 

– 

– 

– 

– 

– 
– 

– 
25 

25 

– 

25 

(2) 

23 

– 

– 

– 

– 

– 
– 

– 
– 

– 

– 

– 

– 

– 

Statutory
Income
Statement 

Re-analyse
discontinued
operations 

Other
net gains
and losses 

Amortisation
of acquired
intangibles 

Other net 
finance 
costs/income 

Tax 
amortisation 
benefit 

Recognition
of tax
losses 

3,990 

2,149 

(1,651)

24 

522 

(74)

448 
(4)

444 
25 

469 

(23)

446 

61 

130 

(90)

– 

40 

– 

40 
(15)

25 
(25)

– 

– 

– 

– 

– 

– 

(4)

(4)

– 

(4)
(4)

(8)
– 

(8)

– 

(8)

– 

– 

35 

– 

35 

– 

35 
(10)

25 
– 

25 

(3)

22 

– 

– 

– 

(1) 

(1) 

(16) 

(17) 
5 

(12) 
– 

(12) 

– 

(12) 

– 

– 

– 

– 

– 

– 

– 
25 

25 
– 

25 

(2) 

23 

– 

– 

– 

– 

– 

– 

– 
(127)

(127)
– 

(127)

– 

(127)

2007 

Adjusted
Income
Statement 

4,218 

2,324 

(1,713)

23 

634 
(85) 

549 
(145)

404 

– 

404 

(32)

372 

2006 

Adjusted
Income
Statement 

4,051 

2,279 

(1,706)

19 

592 

(90)

502 
(130)

372 
– 

372 

(28)

344 

Amortisation of acquired intangibles includes a £7m adjustment to goodwill on recognition of pre-acquisition deferred tax. 

Adjusted sales include sales from discontinued operations held throughout the current and previous years. 

105    Pearson Annual Report and Accounts 2007 

2
4
8
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
Corporate and Operating Measures continued 

BAdjusted operating profit – underlying and constant exchange rate movement 
Operating profit movement excluding the impact of acquisitions and disposals and movements in exchange rates. 
All figures in £ millions 

Underlying increase 

Portfolio changes 

Exchange differences 

Total adjusted operating profit increase 

Underlying increase 
Constant exchange rate increase 

2007 

81 

(2)

(37)

42 

14% 
13% 

BFree cash flow per share 
Operating cash flow for continuing and discontinued operations before tax, finance charges and integration costs paid, divided by the weighted 
average number of shares in issue. 
All figures in £ millions 

2006 

2007 

Adjusted operating profit 

Cash conversion 

Operating cash flow 

Operating tax paid 

Net operating finance costs paid 

Operating free cash flow 

Non operating tax paid 
Special pension contribution 

Integration costs paid 

Total free cash flow 

Weighted average number of shares in issue (millions) 
Operating free cash flow per share 

Total free cash flow per share 

BReturn on invested capital 
Adjusted operating profit less cash tax expressed as a percentage of gross invested capital. 
All figures in £ millions  

Adjusted operating profit 

Cash tax (15%) 

Return 

Gross goodwill 
Net operating assets 

Invested capital 

Return on invested capital 

634 

108% 

684 

(61)

(90)

533 

(26)
(100)

– 

407 

796.8 
66.9p 

51.1p 

2007 

634 

(95)

539 

5,592 
1,000 

6,592 

8.2% 

592 

97% 

575 

(59)

(82)

434 

– 
– 

(1)

433 

798.4 
54.4p 

54.2p 

2006 

592 

(89)

503 

5,477 
803 

6,280 

8.0% 

106    Pearson Annual Report and Accounts 2007 

 
2
5
9
1
0
Index to the Financial Statements 

Accounting policies 
Business combinations 
Cash and cash equivalents 
Cash generated from operations 
Commitments 
Company Balance Sheet 
Company Cash Flow Statement 
Company Statement of Recognised Income and Expense 
Consolidated Balance Sheet 
Consolidated Cash Flow Statement 
Consolidated Income Statement 
Consolidated Statement of Recognised Income and Expense 
Contingencies 
Derivative financial instruments 
Discontinued operations 
Disposals 
Dividends 
Earnings per share 
Employee information 
Events after balance sheet date 
Financial instruments and risk management 
Financial liabilities – Borrowings 
Independent Auditors’ Report – Report to the members of Pearson plc   
Intangible assets 
Inventories 
Joint ventures and associates 
Net finance costs 
Non-current assets classified as held for sale 
Notes to the Company Financial Statements 
Operating expenses 
Other financial assets 
Other reserves and retained earnings 
Property, plant and equipment 
Provisions 
Related party transactions 
Retirement benefit and other post-retirement obligations 
Segment information 
Share capital and share premium 
Share-based payments 
Taxation 
Trade and other liabilities 
Trade and other receivables 
Treasury shares 

54, 55, 56, 57, 58 
90, 91 
78 
93 
94 
95 
96 
95 
51 
52 
50 
50 
94 
75, 76 
61, 62 
92 
67 
65, 66, 67 
63 
94 
73, 74, 75 
78, 79 
53 
69, 70, 76 
76 
71 
64 
92 
97, 98, 99, 100, 101 
62, 63 
75 
89 
68 
80 
94 
81, 82, 83, 84 
59, 60, 61 
88 
84, 85, 86, 87 
64, 65, 72, 73 
80 
77 
88 

107    Pearson Annual Report and Accounts 2007 

 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
Shareholder Information 

BPayment of dividends to mandated accounts 
Where shareholders have given instructions for payment to be made 
direct into a bank or building society, this is done through the Bankers 
Automated Clearing System (BACS), with the associated tax voucher 
showing the tax credit attributable to the dividend payment sent direct 
to the shareholder at the address shown on our register. If you wish the 
tax voucher to be sent to your bank or building society, please contact 
Equiniti, Aspect House, Spencer Road, Lancing, West Sussex BN99 
6DA. Telephone 0871 384 2043* or, for those shareholders with 
hearing difficulties, textphone number 0871 384 2255*. 

BDividend reinvestment plan (DRIP) 
The DRIP gives shareholders the right to buy the company’s shares  
on the London stock market with the cash dividend. If you would  
like further information about the DRIP, please contact Equiniti  
on 0871 384 2268*. 

BIndividual Savings Accounts (ISAs) 
Equiniti offers ISAs in Pearson shares. For more information please 
call them on 0871 384 2244*. 

BShare dealing facilities 
A telephone and internet dealing service has been arranged through 
Equiniti which provides a simple way of buying and selling Pearson 
shares. Commission rates are shown at www.shareview.co.uk or call 
the telephone sales number. For telephone sales call 08456 037 037 
between 8.30 am and 4.30 pm, Monday to Friday, and for internet 
sales log on to www.shareview.co.uk/dealing. You will need your 
shareholder reference number as shown on your share certificate.  

A postal facility, which provides a simple, low cost way of buying  
and selling Pearson shares, is also available through the company’s 
stockbroker, JPMorgan Cazenove Limited, 20 Moorgate, London 
EC2R 6DA. Telephone 020 7588 2828. An alternative weekly postal 
dealing service is available through our registrars. Please telephone 
0871 384 2248* for details. 

BShareGift 
Shareholders with small holdings of shares, whose value makes them 
uneconomic to sell, may wish to donate them to ShareGift, the share 
donation charity (registered charity number 1052686). ShareGift is 
particularly designed to accept unwanted shares and uses the ultimate 
proceeds to support a wide range of UK charities. Over £11m has been 
given by ShareGift so far to over 1,400 different UK charities. Further 
information about ShareGift and the charities it has supported may  
be obtained from their website, www.ShareGift.org or by contacting 
ShareGift at 17 Carlton House Terrace, London SW1Y 5AH. 

BShareholder information online 
Equiniti provides a range of shareholder information online. You can 
check your holding and find practical help on transferring shares or 
updating your details at www.shareview.co.uk. Equiniti can be 
contacted for information on 0871 384 2030*. 

BInformation about the Pearson share price 
The current price of Pearson ordinary shares can be obtained from  
the company’s website, www.pearson.com or from www.ft.com 

108    Pearson Annual Report and Accounts 2007 

BAmerican Depositary Receipts (ADRs) 
Pearson’s ordinary shares are listed on the New York Stock Exchange 
in the form of ADRs and traded under the symbol PSO. Each ADR 
represents one ordinary share. All enquiries regarding registered ADR 
holder accounts and payment of dividends should be directed to  
The Bank of New York, the authorised depositary bank for Pearson’s 
ADR programme, at The Bank of New York, Investor Services,  
P.O. Box 11258, Church Street Station, New York, NY 10286-1258, 
telephone 1-888-BNY-ADRS (toll free within the US) or 1 212 815 
3700 (outside the US), or e-mail shareowners@bankofny.com, or  
sign-in at www.stockbny.com. Voting rights for registered ADR 
holders can be exercised through The Bank of New York, and for 
beneficial ADR holders (and/or nominee accounts) through your  
US brokerage institution. Pearson will file with the Securities and 
Exchange Commission a Form 20-F. 

BShare register fraud: protecting your investment 
Pearson does not contact its shareholders directly to provide 
recommendation advice and neither does it appoint third parties to do 
so. As required by law, our shareholder register is available for public 
inspection but we cannot control the use of information obtained by 
persons inspecting the register. Please treat any approaches purporting 
to originate from Pearson with caution. 

BTips on protecting your shares 
–  Keep any documentation that contains your shareowner reference 
number in a safe place and destroy any documentation which you 
no longer need by shredding it. 

–  Inform the registrars promptly when you change your address. 

–  Be aware of dividend payment dates and contact the registrars  
if you do not receive your dividend cheque or better still, make 
arrangements to have the dividend paid directly into your  
bank account. 

–  Consider holding your shares electronically in a CREST account  

via a nominee. 

For more information on how you can protect your shares from fraud 
please visit our website at www.pearson.com/shareholderfaqs 

BAdvisers  
Auditors PricewaterhouseCoopers LLP 

Bankers HSBC Bank plc 

Brokers JPMorgan Cazenove Limited and Citigroup 

Financial advisers Goldman Sachs, Citigroup and Lazard 

Solicitors Freshfields Bruckhaus Deringer, Herbert Smith and Morgan, 
Lewis & Bockius 

B2008 Financial calendar 
Ex-dividend date 

Record date 
Last date for dividend reinvestment election  

Annual general meeting   

Payment date for dividend and share purchase date  
for dividend reinvestment 
Interim results  

9 April 

11 April 
15 April 

25 April 

9 May 

28 July 

Payment date for interim dividend 

19 September 

*Calls to these numbers are charged at 8p per minute from a BT landline.  
Other provider costs may vary. 

2
6
1
1
1
2
1
3
1
4
1
5
1
6
2
7
1
7
2
8
1
8
1
9
Pearson is a world leader in education, business
information and consumer publishing. We help children
and adults to learn, business people to make good
decisions, readers to enjoy a good book. Our aim is to
help all of them understand the world a little better and
enjoy doing it – what we call ‘education in the broadest
sense of the word’.

We’ve consistently grown the company by investing
in content, technology, international expansion and
efficiency gains. In 2007, that strategy and investment
focus produced the best results in Pearson’s 164-year
history – and helped millions of our customers
get on in their lives.

Contents

1

Financial Highlights:
Record Results in 2007
2 Chairman’s Statement
4 Chief Executive’s Review
7 Our Business and Society
8
Business Review
25 Board of Directors
26 Directors’ Report
33 Additional Information

for Shareholders

50 Consolidated Income Statement
50 Consolidated Statement of

Recognised Income and Expense

51 Consolidated Balance Sheet
52 Consolidated Cash Flow Statement
53 Independent Auditors’ Report
to the Members of Pearson plc

54 Notes to the Consolidated
Financial Statements

95 Company Statement of Recognised

95 Company Balance Sheet
96 Company Cash Flow Statement
97 Notes to the Company

Financial Statements
102 Principal Subsidiaries
103 Five Year Summary
105 Corporate and Operating Measures
107 Index to the Financial Statements
108 Shareholder Information

35 Report on Directors’ Remuneration

Income and Expense

Notes

Throughout this document
(unless otherwise stated):
Growth rates are stated on an
underlying basis (i.e. excluding
currency movements and portfolio
changes). The business performance
measures are non-GAAP measures
and reconciliations to the equivalent
statutory heading under IFRS are
included in notes 2, 8 and 32 to the
annual report. Dollar comparative
figures have been translated at the
year end rate of $1.99:£1 sterling
for illustrative purposes only.

Reliance on this document
Our Business Review on pages 8 to 24
has been prepared in accordance with
the Directors’ Report Business Review
Requirements of section 234ZZB of the
Companies Act 1985. It also
incorporates much of the guidance
set out in the Accounting Standards
Board’s Reporting Statement on the
Operating and Financial Review.

The intention of this document is to
provide information to shareholders and
is not designed to be relied upon by any
other party or for any other purpose.

Forward-looking statements
This document contains forward-
looking statements which are made
by the directors in good faith based on
information available to them at the time
of approval of this report. In particular,
all statements that express forecasts,
expectations and projections with
respect to future matters, including
trends in results of operations, margins,
growth rates, overall market trends, the
impact of interest or exchange rates, the

availability of financing, anticipated costs
savings and synergies and the execution
of Pearson's strategy, are forward-
looking statements. By their nature,
forward-looking statements involve risks
and uncertainties because they relate
to events and depend on circumstances
that will occur in future. There are a
number of factors which could cause
actual results and developments to differ
materially from those expressed or
implied by these forward-looking
statements, including a number of
factors outside Pearson's control. Any
forward-looking statements speak only
as of the date they are made, and Pearson
gives no undertaking to update forward-
looking statements to reflect any changes
in its expectations with regard thereto or
any changes to events, conditions or
circumstances on which any such
statement is based.

Principal Offices Worldwide

Pearson (UK)
80 Strand, London WC2R 0RL, UK
T +44 (0)20 7010 2000
F +44 (0)20 7010 6060
firstname.lastname@pearson.com
www.pearson.com

Pearson (US)
1330 Avenue of the Americas,
New York City, NY 10019, USA
T +1 212 641 2400
F +1 212 641 2500
firstname.lastname@pearson-inc.com
www.pearson.com

Pearson Education
One Lake Street,
Upper Saddle River,
NJ 07458, USA
T +1 201 236 7000
F +1 201 236 3222
firstname.lastname@pearsoned.com
www.pearsoned.com

Financial Times Group
Number One Southwark Bridge,
London SE1 9HL, UK
T +44 (0)20 7873 3000
F +44 (0)20 7873 3076
firstname.lastname@ft.com
www.ft.com

The Penguin Group (UK)
80 Strand, London WC2R 0RL, UK
T +44 (0)20 7010 2000
F +44 (0)20 7010 6060
firstname.lastname@uk.penguingroup.com
www.penguin.co.uk

The Penguin Group (US)
375 Hudson Street, New York City,
NY 10014, USA
T +1 212 366 2000
F +1 212 366 2666
firstname.lastname@us.penguingroup.com
us.penguingroup.com

Pearson plc Registered number
53723 (England)

SGS-COC-2958

Design & Production: Radley Yeldar
Print: Burlington

Pearson has supported the planting of 350 trees with the Woodland Trust, helping
to offset the carbon dioxide emissions generated by the production of this report.
The cover of this report has been printed on Take 2 silk which is FSC certified and
contains 75% recycled and de-inked pulp from post consumer waste and 25% ECF
(Elemental Chlorine Free) virgin pulp. The text pages are printed on Take 2 Offset
which is 100% recycled. This report was printed by an FSC and ISO 14001 certified
printer using vegetable oil and soya based inks. It is 100% recyclable.

www.pearson.com

Find out how we educate, entertain and
inform at www.pearson.com/pearsonville

P
e
a
r
s
o
n
A
n
n
u
a
l

R
e
p
o
r
t

a
n
d
A
c
c
o
u
n
t
s
2
0
0
7

Annual Report and Accounts 2007